Home

OSA5548C-200 rev-k4

1. S S IL 1 3 3 IL 1 4 4 RE IL 2 1 5 J 6 _IL 2 2 6 EN en per een JE IL 2 3 7 5 GPS A A4 5 2 IL 2 4 8 GPS B A5 0 H J et A N H VJ GPS G ANTENNA a a N INC 2 A A3 INC 2 B A4 Figure 6 11 Input Connector Assignment The arrows on the above figure are the Input Lines IL which are virtual lines between connectors and INput Cards INC The IL are configurable with TL1 commands or via management software Each INC can be configured to connect to any of the 8 ports within that group through the IL Example The operator can assign IL 1 2 which is the second IL of the INC group 1 to Input connectors E1 1 to 4 or input connectors FREQ 1 to 4 7 Note The number between brackets on the IL is what the active THC card indicates on their digital display when the IL is selected as a reference for the 5548C OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 64 Operating amp Provisioning With respect to group configuration this chart describes all of the possible configurations Input Port Input line Port number abbreviation abbreviation GROUP LINE E1 IN1
2. 1 19 19 19 1 18 1 RU S OUTPUTS e OUTPUTS S E e S OUTPUTS OUTPUTS 00 0 0o00 0 oojo o oojo ooo 4 holes to fix the 5548C into the rack TO FI TT o o B99 gigi Be ojo VA O J O O JORN OUT 11 20 Figure 4 4 Mounting Remote Output Panel in the rack OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 9 Equipment Installation Note Sag e The Remote Panel can be adjusted in 19 or ETSI according to the rack type e The Remote Panel can also get its output connectors pointing on the rear of the rack STEP ACTION 1 Check the position in which to fit the shelf in the rack Intsall under or above the shelf eaving a space of 1 RU 4 6cm 2 Mount Remote Panel carefully onto the rack using four screws and their corresponding washers customer supplied 3 Read section 4 5 2 4 for cable connection between 5548C s output tiles and the Remote Panel OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 10 4 4 Grounding amp Power Connection The OSA 5548C SSU has redundant 48VDC power input connectors called POWER A and POWER B which supply power to each individual card slot Equipment Installation The POWER A connection tile is the tile A107 and the POWER B is the tile A101 On the Remote Power Input and Management panel the POWER A is on the left side and the POWER B on the
3. Z w w 40 60V OC 6 3A IS OSCILLOQUARTZ p o o BSA 2a 2a OUT 1 10 SYM o o 659 a ALARM OUT BosciLLOQUARTZ oe GROUP 2 o o gt OUT 11 20 ASYM Power tile Management tile Output tiles Input tile Power tile Figure 2 2 5548C SSU E200 Rear View 7 Note The equipment can look different depending on the installed cards OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 6 Product Overview Tracking amp OUtput gt INput a bi Holdover Card shanks Care A THC F Cr gt inc 20 Outputs OUtput Card Signal ee q FE IN 4 Generator pes L L mes Se H Card T SGC gt OUiput ee Card DUC 20 Outpuls GPS Antennas Pass through functionality 48 VDC A NTP SNTP al VDC B Power distribution to all modules MAnagement Card MAC F 1 1 protection possible Figure 2 3 5548C SSU E200 Simplified Block Diagram Up to 10 slots on SSU E200 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 or Product Overview The OSA 5548C is locally RS 232 and remotely TCP IP manageable Logical View of 5548C SSU E200 5548C
4. r 0 o E1IN2 E1 2 5 3 E1N3 E1 3 ae 19 lt lt E1IN4 2 8 lt 3 O fint FREQ 1 Eg De 5 L fIN2 FREQ 2 9 S Q FIN3 FREQ 3 S 5 1 4 TIN FREQ 4 a LEVIN n i o E1N2 5 9 C3 ST 3 E1IN3 E1 3 Fo 9 I E1IN4 3 9 lt x O FN FREQ 1 Eg Aa 3 fIN2 FREQ 2 QD S S fIN3 FREQ 3 2 f IN4 FREQ 4 GPS 1 GPS GPS 2 Table 6 11 Possible Input Configurations GPS 1 input port GPS A A5 amp GPS B A6 6 5 3 Retrieving Current Input Configuration This section describes how to check the current Input Line IL and INput Card INC configuration e The Input Lines IL For retrieving the configuration and editing the Input lines e The INput Card INC For retrieving the status of the INC s group retrieving the active card A or B in each group retrieving the SSM and the Performance state ON OFF OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 65 Operating amp Provisioning 6 5 3 1 Retrieving General Input Line Configuration This section describes how to retrieve and how to configure the configuration for the Input lines in a global view To learn about every single parameter follow the next sections A Note Read section Input connector to Input Line IL description 6 5 2 to understand the concept of cross connection of input lines to physical input ports Using TL1 Input Syntax RTRV EQPT IL aid ctag Example RTRV EQPT I
5. Serial connection to the RS 232C port located on the PWR B card in TL1 RS FRONT s Serial connection to the RS 232C o port located on the Management tile in TL1 RS REAR OG o Q Sy Qo fe a ANTENNA Figure 6 1 Local Comm Port Connection OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 12 Operating amp Provisioning A Note The AT LINK NULL MODEM cable is described in section 4 7 1 1 6 2 3 1 Serial Port Configuration To establish the connection via serial port here below is the configuration required to set up in the terminal emulator i e HyperTerminal Procomm Baud rate 19200 kbs Parity bit None Stop bits 1 Flow control None A Note The communication via serial link is designed for RAW DATA with TL1 protocol 6 2 3 2 Serial Connection with Terminal Emulator STEP ACTION 1 Connect a null modem cable to one of the two RS 232 ports located on the front and the rear side and labeled LOCAL COMM E Launch a terminal emulator HyperTerminal for example New Connection Hyper Ter
6. Figure 3 2 Remote BNC panel Front View 156mm Figure 3 3 Remote BNC panel Top View OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 3 7 Pre Installation Considerations 3 4 4 Power supply cables AN CAUTION Power voltage must be between 40VDC minimum and 60VDC maximum e DC power supply recommended minimum cable size 2mm2 e Ground recommended minimum cable size 2mm 3 5 GPS Antenna Mounting Please refer to the GPS Antenna amp Accessories Installation Guide For detailed information concerning the necessary precaution to undertake A CAUTION The installation guide must be carefully read prior connecting GPS antenna cable and antenna to the OSA 5548C 3 6 Remote Communication The OSA 5548C SSU includes a remote management port The operator must define the following parameters before installation e IP address e Gateway IP e Subnet mask The above information is to be configured via the local communication port RS 232 The OSA 5548C SSU includes a RJ 45 connector for remote management For communication specifications please refer to the Specifications chapter of this document N Recommendation To facilitate the full benefit of the 5548C SSU management possibilities Oscilloquartz recommends installation and use of the SyncTerminal and or the SyncView PLUS management software OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 3 8 Pre Installa
7. OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM lel BSE n sl 0000000000 POWER B EXPANSION L Z p S R DC 6 3A OSCILLOQUARTZ LINK A LINK B ALARM OUT GROUP 1 SN Be 9 Sl GO a OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 11 20 SYM 2 OUT 1 10 SYM oso0000000p 0000000000 OUT 11 20 ASYM 40 60V DC 6 3A OSCILLOQUARTZ style fuse LAMP 19 OUT 1 10 On Oo OT 11 20 O status eL O osian SELECTED D RER ESS EES Ee I I I1 I I I BB OSCILLOQUART 55480 Onovoover O osc iitaror SELECTED Z Cas ETE O STATUS 0 r EN o 10 G Gral ara cm 1 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 oe et Stv 2 3 ad onc oase 6 122 Operating amp Provisioning 6 9 1 3 Output Grou e Each OUtput Card OUC provides 2I utput groups OG of 10 output connectors OUT 1 10 L T Output Group OG 1 Output OUT 11 20 I iI Output Group OG 2 Output 20x ASYMMETRICAL 20x SYMMETRICAL 10x SYM amp 10x ASYM for remote BNC panel OUTPUTS ASYM
8. Micro OSA 5548C Internal Bus Processor Squelch funtion OUT 11 gt gt Squelch Ctrl L 4 AGC CODE 1 SGC A CODE 2 SGC A FREQ SGC A Input SIGNAL SGC CODE 1 SGC B Interface SELECT SELECT Squelch funtion vr CODE 2 SGC B FREQ SGC B Squelch Ctrl 5V 2W gt A8V 7 9V 10W Bp C current limiter 3 3V 2Wp Figure 2 32 Output Card Block Diagram OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 53 Product Overview 2 5 9 Time Code Card NTP TCC NTP 2 5 9 1 Physical Layout LED DESCRIPTION Status e RED Solid The card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure e RED Flashing Version error e ORANGE Solid Card s firmware is being upgraded STATUS gt e GREEN Solid Card system is working properly nie syne e OFF Card is not working at all ETHERNET NTP SYNC e RED Solid The card system is currently in power up mode wait TOD UTC GPS or server failure e RED Flashing Waiting synchronization TOD UTC GPS received e GREEN Solid NTP worked properly e GREEN flashing TOD UTC GPS lose NTP is waiting locked e ORANGE when the NTP module is being downloaded TCC NTP ETHERNET GREEN Solid Ethernet cable connected e OFF Ethernet cable disconnected Table 2 8 Time Code Card NTP TCC NTP LED Description Figure 2 33 Time Code Card NTP TCC NTP OSA 5548C SSU E200
9. see e eee eee ee 7 27 Procedure 7 22 Restoring Factory Parameters ee e e eee ee 7 27 Procedure 7 23 Serial Connection Test eee 7 28 Procedure 7 24 Ethernet Connection Test cccccccceecceeecseeeeeeeseeeneeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeseetseetseeeeeeees 7 29 Procedure 7 25 Verifying Shelf Inventory sse eee eee ee ee eee 7 30 Procedure 7 26 Verifying the Shelf Operation Mode sese eee 7 31 Procedure 7 27 LEDS Operation Test rrarararerarerarenanernrrnnennnennnenanenanernnernrnnnennnenunennnenusenunenenen 7 31 Procedure 7 28 Input Line Priority Configuration Test sse eee eee eee 7 32 Procedure 7 29 Redundant Card Stand by Test 7 33 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 XVI List of Procedures Procedure 7 30 Minor Alarm MN Test 7 34 Procedure 7 31 Major Alarm MJ Test 7 34 Procedure 7 32 Critical Alarm CR Test 7 35 Procedure 7 33 NTP Output Test Esir EE A EEA ENEAS AREE 7 38 Procedure 7 34 Alarm and History Flushing sese eee eee eee e ee 7 40 Procedure 8 1 LEDs Maintenance Test r arrnarnannnnrnanrnnrnannannnernanrnnenannnnnnernannnnenannnennennnannuennnenere 8 3 Procedure 8 2 Stand by Cards Maintenance Test 8 4 Procedure 8 3 Card Addition or Replacement rrrrrnnnnnnnnrnnonnnernnevannnnnnnnrnnnennnennnennnennnennsnnnenneennn 8 43 Procedure 8 4 Connector Tile Insertion see eee eee e eee e ee 8 44 Procedure 8 5 Power Card Fuse Replacement eee e ee e ee e 8 47 Procedure 8
10. OG lt IS lt O O lt O 2 OUT 11 20 ASYM O O lt O OE O The OG are labeled within the TL1 commands as shown below OUC Group Output Group OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 123 Operating amp Provisioning In the table below x is the OUC group number 1 10 Output Group OG TL1 Abbreviation First output group 1 10 Second output group 11 20 Table 6 13 Output GroupTL1 Abbreviations 6 9 1 4 Output Line OL description Each OUtput Card OUC provides 20 outputs lines that are labeled within the TL1 commands as shown below OUC Group Number Output Line In the table below x is the output OUC Group number 1 10 Output Group 1 OUT 1 10 Output Group 2 OUT 11 20 Output line TL1 Abbreviation Output line TL1 Abbreviation 1 Table 6 14 Output Line TL1 Abbreviation OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 124 Operating amp Provisioning 6 9 2 Signal Generation Card SGC Group Parameters and State The SGC cards treat the signal received from the THC s or directly from the INC Group when it is in pass through operation mode and distribute it independently as the following signal types e E1 option 1 amp 2 2 048 MHz 1 PPS amp 10MHz to each OUC group e E1 2 048 MHz and 1 PPS for expansion shelves LINK A amp
11. Example RTRV USER USERNAME MYCTAG eee Possible configurations Description eee AD 1 Login or Username UID 2 0000 9999 RS FRONT A list of up to 25 ports or channels RS REAR Each port When a session initiation request is separated with a amp received the NE checks the CID of the session request against the CID i e in the format of as stored in the NE 8023 amp 8024 amp RS FRONT RS FRONT is the RS 232 port on the POWER B RS REAR is the RS 232 port on the Management tile Password Aging Intervall in days At the end of this intervall the user receives a prompt that the existing password has to be replaced with a new one PAGE 30 999 Password Aging Intervall in days At the end of this intervall the user receives a prompt that the existing password has to be replaced with a OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 46 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Default Possible configurations Description S EE i ey i 7 POINT 1 999 UOUT 1 999 LSTOI IDENTIFIERS OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 newone lt lt lt This is an intervall signifying the number of days that a user can use the existing password before an update becomes mandatory It is typically 5 to 10 days This ts an integer signifying the number of times that an user can use the existing password before an update becomes mandatory Ty
12. MAC ACK 118 29 01 00 36 43 XX 2784 REPT ALM SGC Md EOPT SA 2005 29 01 00 36 43 NA Output faeilurer code Critical Alarm condition Major Alarm condition Minor Alarm condition A Non alarmed or cleared autonomous message CL or NA OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 172 Operating amp Provisioning 6 11 5 3 Message Format Given the message type definitions previously explained this is an example of message format Output Syntax sid date time almcde ctag REPT rept message Possible configurations for rept ALM Alarm message EVT Event message PM Performance Measurement message SW Switching card message Note L To understand the message given in the autonomous message read the next chapters accordingly 6 11 5 4 Message encapsulated in Alarm ALM report This message is spontaneously reported by the OSA 5548C SSU when an alarm occurs Output Syntax sid date time almcde ctag REPT ALM aid ntfencde condtype srveff ocrdat ocrtm locn dirn tmper conddescr aiddet obsdbhvr exptdbhvr dgntype tblislt 7 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 173 Operating amp Provisioning name configurations parameters INC 1 INC 2 ING Card related to the alarm report GPS THC SGC OUC 1 10 OUC MAC ALL NTFCNCDE CR MJ MN NA NULL Notification code associated with the alarm conditio
13. Using TL1 The following TL1 command is required to start the download Input Syntax OPR DNLDs 0080 During the download progress you should receive the following message Output Syntax sid date time M ctag IP A Note If it is required to abort the download progression use the following command Input Syntax ABT DNLD 5 tag Once the download is successfully completed the message below is displayed Output Syntax sid date time M otag COMPLD OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 193 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Tthe main window will show the following Select the Equipment type the available version required to be downloaded and click on the Download Button to execute the download process 155480 TSG 55480 SSU ES0 Select the Snn SSUE20 lt equipment type Select the Firmware file located in the FTP Server List of Firmware contained in the above selected file OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 194 Operating amp Provisioning 6 13 3 3 Installing New Firmware into a Card Once the MAC card receives the downloaded files the user can transfer the file to any card The user can install new firmware in a single card recommended or in a card group in the A or B card of the same card type AA Recommendation While a card is being upgraded with a new firmware its function will be interrupted causing a possib
14. dirn tmper name configurations parameters INC 1 INC 2 INC GPS Cards related to the event Da SGC OUC report OUC 10 OUC MAC E NTFCNCDE CR MJ MN NA NULL Notification code associated with the event conditions being retrieved CONDTYPE CONDTYPE NULL Type of event condition komm as NSA NULL Effect on service caused by the event alarm relative to the identified entity occurred occurred TMPER Accumulation time period for PM Performance Measurement parameters OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 175 Operating amp Provisioning 6 11 5 6 Message Encapsulated in Switching SW Report This message is spontaneously reported by the OSA 5548C SSU when two cards from the same group have swapped i e THC A becomes in stand by and THC B becomes active Output Syntax sid date time almcde ctag REPT SW actid stbyid l Parameter Possible configurations Description name ACTID INC 1 A INC 2 B GPS A This is the card which was in Stand by and GPS B THC A THC B SGC now has became as Active A SGC B MAC A MAC B STBYID INC 1 A INC 2 B GPS A This is the card which was Active and now GPS B THC A THC B SGC has became in Stand by A SGC B MAC A MAC B 6 11 5 7 Message Encapsulated in Database Change DBCHG Report This function is not implemented yet 6 11 5 8 Message Encapsulated in Performance Measurement PM Report
15. EXT ALARM INPUTS on the Management tile See Figure 4 20 2 Connect a SUB D 25 Female wired with respect to the Figure 4 21 External Input Alarm Connector 3 Tighten the two fixation screws 4 Verify that the connections have been correctly effected Procedure 4 12 External Alarm Input Connection A CAUTION Do not supply power into the IN pin or a voltage offset between IN pin and GND pin only a dry contact closure or opening can be connected Please read the specifications in section 9 6 2 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 32 4 6 2 Equipment Installation Output Alarm Groups The OSA 5548C SSU unit presents two groups of electrical output alarms ALARM OUT 1 2 as shown in Figure 4 20 Each group includes 3 levels of alarms e Critical Alarm e Major Alarm e Minor Alarm Each alarm contains three connections allowing the user to connect alarms as Normally Open NO or Normally Closed NC Alarm Output Groups SUB D 9p Male ALARM OUT GROUP 1 ALARM OUT GROUP 1 9 ALARM OUT GROUP 2 ALARM OUT GROUP 2 SEVERITY NO C NC CRITICAL 1 6 2 MAJOR 7 3 8 9 MINOR 4 9 5 Figure 4 23 Output Alarm Connection Note A One connector set can be reserved for Visual Alarms while the other is reserved for Audible alarms OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 33 Equipment Installation 4 6 2 1 Typical Applica
16. OBSDBHVR NULL Observed behavior that resulted in this reported trouble Limited to 512 characters enclosed within escaped quotes EXPTDBHVR NULL Expected behavior whose deviation is described in observed behavior that resulted in this reported trouble Limited to 512 characters enclosed within escaped quotes isolate the trouble TBLISLT NULL Significance of the isolation information provided by the card or element in question included in this message Not software configurable OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 166 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View a Fie View Alarms Configuration Help Homes co DE badet G E SY Ge Ayes Equipment Part Severity Description Acknowledged Time Acknowled Comment Cond Type NE Nar gt gt R Open the Event Viewer and look at the Active tab A Note Refer to the SyncView manual for EventViewer description and use 6 11 3 Alarm Condition This section explains how to retrieve alarm conditions which means all alarms and events reported by the shelf and their syntax The parameters in the response of the TL1 command to retrieve the active alarms are the following e Element on which the alarm status is requested AID The Cards Group s current active alarms and events as well as alarms and events from the entire shelf e Condition Type CONDTYPE This is the type of the alarm condition which
17. RED The card is currently not working or not During the power up sequence the LED can delivering a qualified signal remain red for a while If the LED stays in this status longer it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair RED Flashing The firmware version installed in the card does Download the correct firmware in the card not correspond or is outdated compared the with the command ACT DNLD after rest of the shelf version verified that the firmware is in the MAC card A new card s firmware is being downloaded No action needed OFF Dead no power is supplied to the card Test the GPS s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair GNSS GREEN GPS and or Glonass signal is received No action needed GREEN Flashing The line is in Wait to restore time and will be Wait until the WIR time has elapsed or recovered once the time elapsed initialize it with the command INIT WTR YELLOW The GNSS input is being monitored No action needed Select the line enable to make it available for reference No or not enough GPS signal available PPS 3 Check that the GNSS antenna has a input not available This state is present during clear view of the sky and respects about 5 min after powered on the card the conditions described in section 3 5 and in the GNSS installations documentation Check that a in line amplifier is mounted if the cable length is longer than 70 meters loss depend of ca
18. Up to 4 chained Slave or Expansion Shelves Figure 6 17 Pass through Mode OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 119 Operating amp Provisioning A Note The automatic switching between input lines is possible during Pass through operation when a line is removed or fails However this can introduce phase jumps on output signal During the pass through mode the SSM code supplied on outputs is the one received by the Input Line IL A forced SSM value activated and defined on the IL is ignored during pass through mode A Note Refer to section 6 5 to retrieve input port and line configuration In order to retrieve the current pass through status the following TL1 command is required Input Syntax RTRV PTHRGH ctag The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMP LD input ssm name configurations parameters INPUT IL 1 1 IL 1 2 IL 1 3 IL 1 1 Input line providing the pass IL 1 4 GPS A through signal GPS B NONE SSM PRC SSU A SSM quality of the pass through SSU_B SEC DNU signal FAILED DISABLED Note J During pass through mode the f and E1 LEDs of the SGC card s flash GREEN OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 120 Operating amp Provisioning 6 9 Signal Generation amp Output Properties In this section we explain the parameters to set and how to proceed to obtain correct output frequency ty
19. Using TL1 To retrieve the number of available visible and tracked satellites send the following command Input Syntax RTRV EQPT GNSS GLN A GLN B ctag Example RTRV EQPT GNSS GLN A MYCTAG OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 105 Operating amp Provisioning The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD opstate ssm PPS_OFFSET pps_offset ADM_STATE adm_state INDOOR indoor ELEVATION elevation FRCD frcd VISIBLE visible TRACKED tracked r To retrieve the list of Visible satellites send the following command Input Syntax RTRV EQPT GNSS VSAT aid ctag Example RTRV EQPT GNSS VSAT 1 MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sig date time M etag COMP LD aid SAT_ID sat_id ELEVATION elevation BEARING bearing SNR snr HEALTH health To retrieve the list of Tracked satellites send the following command Input Syntax RTRV EQPT GNSS TSAT aid ctag Example RTRV EQPT GNSS TSAT 1 MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M otag COMPLD aid SAT ID sat id r OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 106 Operating amp Provisioning name configurations EN VISIBLE 0 3 gt TRaGKED 0 4 T Numero wate ss Specify the Satellite number SAT ID 32 37 69 Identification number of satellite ELEVATION 7 90 Elevation angle of
20. 20 OL Tip Ring Shield OL Tip Ring Shield _ ee 1 25 12 13 12 13 OUT 1 10 DS1 l ee 4122 9 20 14 22 9 20 mS f 51211 8 7 fait 8 7 6119 6 7 8 17 4 14 16 19 6 7 Output Group 1 9116 3 1 OUT 11 20 DS1 1 Output Group 2 2 E 7 Note Any shield pins can be connected with any Output Line STEP ACTION 1 Locate the connector tile corresponding to the group required to cable 2 Select a connector which will be configured with the signal desired The output port configuration is done by software as described in section 6 9 3 Use a SUB D male connector with 25 pins with a ribbon cable connected on the pins described on the above table 4 Plug the connector and tighten it correctly Procedure 4 8 Cabling Output port from Output Tile with SUB D 25pins connectors OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 23 Equipment Installation 4 5 2 4 Cabling BNC Output Port Remote Panel 20x ASYM with IDC connector for Remote BNC panel OL 1 10 OL 11 20 dE Output Group 1 dE Output Group 2 Output Tile Output Tile Output Tile Output Tile Output Tile 1or6 2or 3or8 40r9 bor 10 I OUTPUTS GO G 6 18 O DO jO 99 MOLL Output Conn OG 1 OG 1 OG 2 Output Conn OG2 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 24 STEP 6 Equipment Installation ACTIO
21. NONE FAILED DISABLED INPUT E1 _1 E1_2 E1 3 This is the port connector assigned E1_4 FREQ 1 to the Input Line IL FREQ 2 FREQ 3 FREQ 4 ADM STATE DISABLED ENABLED This is the status of the line MONITORED DISABLED The input line is ENABLED disabled and hence cannot be selected by the 5548C MONITORED The line is monitored but cannot be selected as reference by the 5548C ENABLED The line is enabled and can be selected by the 5548C TERMINATION TERMINATED TERMINATED Input connector connection type BRIDGED UNK CODE HDB3 AMI HDB3 Code type of the E1 signal WTR DISABLED 1 12 DISABLED This is the delay in minutes before that the 5548C is allowed to select an input line recovered FRCD PRC SSU_A NONE This is the forced SSM quality set SSU_B SEC DNU for the corresponding line NONE OOF DETECT DISABLED ENABLED Determine whether an Out Of ENABLED 10 4 10 Frame alarm should be detected 3 10 2 and generated or not 10 4 10 3 or 10 2 corresponds to the alarm detection threshold i e 10E 4 10E 3 or 10E 2 In that case an alarm is produced when false words rate of the total number 4000 during 1s is higher or equal than the selected Threshold OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 67 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter forene Default Description name forene parameters CRC4 DETECT DISABLED DISABLED Determine whether an CRC 4 ENABLED 10 4 10
22. Revision K October 2012 2 61 2 5 11 2 Main features Product Overview The MAC card is designed to monitor and manage the OSA 5548C SSU its main features are e Gathering the status of all cards e Management of external output and input alarm e Management of front panel cards LEDs information e Internal card management and communication e Expansion shelves management and communication e Ethernet and serial communication management e Ethernet speed setting 10M or 100M e Events and alarms storage and timing e Retaining every card s firmware in its memory e FTP client for firmware upgrade e Remotely software also called firmware upgradeable OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 62 Product Overview 2 5 11 3 MAC Block Diagram Programmable Logic Devices ke ag AL input 1 Al MAJOR 1 gt AL input 2 arm CRITICAL 1 gt AL input gt SS Hiah AL input a el MINOR 2 gt External AL input 5 13x MAJOR 2 gt alarms AL input 6 gt E CRITICAL 2 gt AL input 7 AL input gt AL input 9 AL input md C Sae AL Input Power 1 Buzzer AL Input Power 2 EXT BUS L Test Ext IB amp Tes controller xterna uw OSA 5548C Internal Bus Master ADDRO Remote ADDR1 gt Expansion ADDR2 oo address ADDR3 Micro processor LOCAL MGMT RS232 rear REMOTE MGMT Ethe
23. Revision K October 2012 6 112 Operating amp Provisioning Using TL1 Use the following command to obtain the state of the switching parameters Inout Syntax RTRV EQPT THC ctag The response is formatted as below Output Syntax Sid date time M clag COMPLD opstate MAN INPUT man input MODE mode ACT INPUT act input SSM ssm 7 7 Note To retrieve current IL configuration refer to section 6 5 3 Read section Input connector to Input Line IL description to understand cross conection concept of input lines to physical input ports For editing the configuration in one single line the following command is required For more details on each parameter refer to the next sections Input Syntax ED EQPT THC ctag MODE mode MAN INPUT man input Example ED EQPT THC MYCTAG MODE MAN MAN_INPUT IL 1 2 Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters AUTO MAN There are different modes of input FHLDVR selection AUTO Automatic selection mode i e when a line has failed the 5548C will automatically switch to the line presenting the next priority MAN Manual selection mode The user can select a specific input reference with the MAN INPUT parameter FHLDVR Forced Holdover This mode forces the THC to operate in Holdover mode OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 113 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Possible Default Des
24. To retrieve current IL configuration refer to section 6 5 3 Read section Input connector to Input Line IL description to understand the concept of cross connection of input lines to physical input ports Using TL1 Input Syntax ED EQPT IL aid ctag WTR wtr Example ED EQPT IL 1 1 MYCTAG WIR 10 name configurations parameters This is the input line abbreviation The first digit is the group number AID DISABLED 1 12 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 and the second digit is the input number 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 This is the delay in minute before that the 5548C is allowed to select a recovered input line 6 81 Operating amp Provisioning When a line is in Wait to restore time it is possible to manually clear the remaining time using the following command Input Syntax INIT WIR MAL Example INIT WTR IL 1 1 MYCTAG Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters AID IL 1 1 IL 2 4 GPS This parameter is the line to be configured to clear the remaining WTR time Using SyncView Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt Input 1 8 gt Details gt Wait to restore Time SEI Signal Performances Termination Input Alarm Detection OOF EK When the Input is SSM Bit gwed being in WTR mode the user can dd stop the WIR countdown by Code pushing the Clear Sree Button L evi W
25. external Cesium source THC with Rubidium Rb SSU Type II Stability 5E 11 month e THC with Double Oven Controlled Quartz OCXO SSU types I III IV or V Stability 1E 10 day Freerun Frequency accuracy for Input selection SSU type II Rb 1 6E 8 SSU types I and V Not Applicable Priority table SSM value Performance mask Manual selection Pull In Hold In The system accepts references according to Jitter tolerance Wander tolerance Wander Generation e SSU type I OCXO 1E 8 SSU type II Rb 1 6E 8 SSU types III OCXO 4 6E 6 Exceeds ITU T G 812 9 2 EN 300 462 4 1 7 1 Exceeds ITU T G 812 9 1 EN 300 462 4 1 7 2 e MTIE and TDEV limit Exceeds ITU T G 812 8 1 EN 300 462 4 1 6 1 Wander transient Jitter generation Transient response Phase discontinuity Filtering Bandwidth Exceeds ITU T G 812 10 EN 300 462 4 1 6 8 Exceeds ITU T G 812 8 3 1 EN 300 462 4 1 6 8 max 0 05 Ul Exceeds ITU T G 812 11 1 1 and EN 300 462 4 1 Exceeds ITU T G 812 11 4 EN 300 462 4 1 e SSU type II and Ill 1mHz e SSU type I 3mHz Table 9 3 Tracking Holdover Specifications OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 5 Specifications 9 4 Performance Measurement PM PM Resolution Ins Sampling rate 1s 1Hz Interval of 3 hours to complete a PM set measurement and calculation Type MTIE Maximum Time Interval Error
26. in this status longer it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair RED Flashing The firmware version installed in the card Download the correct firmware in the card with does not correspond or is outdated the command ACT DNLD after verified that compared the rest of the shelf version the firmware is in the MAC card ORANGE A new card s firmware is being No action needed downloaded It means that the MAC internal flash support memory is corrupted Dead no power is supplied to the card Test the MAC s fuse and replace it if vn seen MST GREEN The 5548C is a master shelf No action needed GREEN Flashing The master shelf is being started Or when the STATUS LED is orange and Flashing the internal MAC flash memory is corrupted No action needed the 5548C is starting as starting as a master shelf If internal flash memory is corrupted contact Oscilloquartz for support Or when RMT amp EXP LEDs are Flashing together with the MST the network parameters have not been found in the POWER B card OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 23 If network parameters have not been found insert the POWER B card or send it for repair after a last plug in out manipulation Maintenance amp Troubleshooting mm 5548C is not recognize as a master No action needed this LED can be off during shelf the start up sequence Not used in 5548C SSU The 5548C is an expansion s
27. 1 1 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 4 Operating amp Provisioning D Correlation Tag CTAG is a sequential command identifier to be used with every command input The CTAG correlates acknowledgments errors and responses with an originating request E General Block Format is usually empty and is the fourth and final parameter in the TL1 message s staging block F The Payload block of any TL1 command message contains any additional information needed to carry out the specified command Typically any parameters associated with the operation are conveyed within this block G The TL1 input message terminator is a semicolon 7 input or command messages gt which must always end any 6 2 1 3 Abbreviations and Characters for Command Format Types Characters for commands and received messages Characters Description Example Optional parameters or command Two types exist e The parameters defined by variable i e VARIABLE PARAMETER can be ignored and not typed in the command e The single parameter must be located by its position in the command i e to set the PARAMETER2 in the following series PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER2 PARAMETER3 It should be written with nothing at its position such as follow PARAMETER1 PARAMETER3 gt Separate value or parameters IL 1 4 IL 1 2 i al autonomous message List of logical values between the first and the last written value Sepa
28. Current Maximum 1 A AC Voltage Maximum 125 VDC Power Maximum 60 VA Current Maximum 1 A Table 9 10 Output Alarms Relays Specifications 9 7 Power Supply Power Supplies Connectors Redundant connectors POWER A and POWER B Each contains one and one connectors and two Grounding GND studs Label amp location POWER A located on the rear right of the shelf and POWER B on the rear left of the shelf Input Voltage 40 to 60 VDC 48 VDC nominal Power Consumption Fully loaded with THC Rubidium Warm up max 214W Steady state max 178W Fully loaded with THC Quartz Warm up max 176W Steady state max 166W Fuse types 2x T 6 3A L 250V 5x20mm size located on the front panel of the POWER A and POWER B Cards Table 9 11 Power Supply Specifications OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 9 Specifications 9 8 Mechanical Mechanical Mounting ETSI or 19 rack mounting Size Vertical rack size 26 6 cm 10 5 inches 6U HxWxD Depth rack size 27 0 cm 10 6 inches output connectors included e Width rack size 53 3 cm 21 inches ETSI or 48 26 cm 19 0 inches 19 Weight e SSU 14 5 kg 31 75 Ibs fully loaded with THC Rubidium type cards embedded Remote Panel 1 75 Kg 3 85 lbs 10x flat cables Management Panel 1 6 Kg 3 52 Ibs Table 9 12 Mechanical Specifications 9 9 General General Architecture Main OSA 5548C SSU E200 fully loaded
29. Degrees MN 10 89 10 Minutes S FRAC MIN 0 9099 Fraction of minute ALT 999 18 000 O Altitude in meters OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 108 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt GPS Input gt Details gt Position tab GPS Position Latitude N 46 594919 Longitude E67 548015 Altitude 514 m I Indoor Degree Min Fraction of minute OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 109 Operating amp Provisioning 6 7 5 GPS Time To retrieve the GPS time send the following command Input Syntax RTRV EQPT GPSTIME ctag Example RTRV EQPT GPSTIME MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sad date time M ctag COMPLD WEEK week SEC sec Parameter Possible Default name configurations parameters WEEK 0 3182 a Week number since 6 January 1980 0 604799 Degrees OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 110 Operating amp Provisioning 6 8 Line Switching Tracking amp Holdover THC Signal Filtering and Processing This section includes information on what and how the 5548C can do with the signal processed by the INCs as per the previous section 6 5 and the SGCs amp OUCs in section 6 9 according to the following points e The THC group state and configuration e The selection mode to configur
30. Event Viewer 5548C SSU E60 x Loe File View Alarms Configuration Help et EEC Cleared Time Acknowledged Time Acknowledged User Comment Active Ugan W ell 17 alarmson 1 pages gt A Note Refer to the SyncView manual for EventViewer description and use 6 11 4 3 Erasing the Alarm History Should it is needed to clear the complete alarm amp event history stored in the OSA 5548C the following TL1 command is required Input Syntax INIT ALM HIST ctag OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 171 Operating amp Provisioning 6 11 5 Autonomous Messages 6 11 5 1 Message types An autonomous message is information spontaneously sent by the OSA 5548C SSU when something happens in the system The following types of autonomous messages are available e Alarm message ALM Message sent as soon as an alarm is detected in the shelf e Event message EVT Message sent as soon as an event is detected in the shelf e Performance message PM This message reports the performances being measured e Switching message SW This message is reported when an active card typically card A has switched to a standby card i e INC 1 A to INC 1 B 6 11 5 2 Alarm Code Parameters in Autonomous Alarm Messages almcde When receiving automatic alarm messages a couple of characters are written at the beginning of the message this is called almede Example of autonomous alarm message
31. Holdover Freerun mode sese sese eee 2 20 234 LEN 2 20 235 Nme DNETNDUIO T 2 21 20 RAMM 2 21 2 3 7 Synchronization Status Messaging SSM eee 2 21 250 PSN 2 22 2 3 9 Performance Measurement eee eee e ee 2 23 2310 REMEN Lae 2 24 2 3 11 Firmware download ee eee 2 24 5 PO 2 24 2 4 System D SGCriPON unsamemtenennndeieemaesbumneekensesseskkanntn 2 25 2 4 1 WWE OCU GEO EE EN 2 25 242 A INOUE LINES L essre a eE ra OaE 2 25 243 GIN Cards INC ene 2 26 2AA BP INDUS seen n ee ne E E E E T 2 26 2405 DR 2 26 2 4 6 D GNSS cards GPS GLONASS rrrrrrnnrrnrarernnrrnarnnnnennnrrnnnrnnnrnnnnennenennnr 2 26 2 4 7 E Tracking amp Holdover Cards THC 2 27 2 4 8 F Signal Generator Cards SGC se 2 27 249 G ENN 2 27 2410 A EXDANSION Shelves seuren d a OE EATI ENEE 2 30 2501 PR Ne 2 30 2 4 12 J MAnagament Cards VAC 2 30 2 5 System Components amp OperatiOn xnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnennnn 2 31 2 5 1 NENNE 2 31 252 PENN 2 34 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 V Contents 295 INp t Card ING 2 eee ee eee eee eee 2 36 LDA Ps PE 2 39 299 NSL 2 42 2 5 6 Tracking Holdover Card THC sse 2 45 2 5 7 Signal Generator Card SGC sse 2 48 256 UTTERN 2 51 2 5 9 Time Code Card NTP TCC NTP cece cece ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeneees 2 54 2 5 10 Time Code Card PTP TCC PTP rararaneranenarnnnnnnnrnnernnnrnnnennnenunen
32. OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM ee ma pp RS 232 port O 2 2 ANTENNA ouc A ouc ouc T ouc ouc J ouc ouc f ouc Figure 4 25 Local management Port location on the shelf OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 35 Equipment Installation FREQ UPI 3 EI 2 i GRO 4 GROUP BJOSCILLOQUARTZ RS 232 port Figure 4 26 Local management port location on Remote Panel 4 7 1 1 R 5 232 AT Link serial cable PIN assignment Note 7 ote This cable can be ordered to Oscilloquartz the article number is A012740 Should the computer or laptop only have USB ports use a universal USB to RS 232 adapter AT LINK or Null Modem Cable with two ends SUB D 9p Female SUB D 9p Female on SUB D 9p Female on cables end cable end EV H Table 4 3 Serial AT LINK Cable PIN assignment Local Comm OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 36 Equipment Installation 4 7 2 Ethernet LAN Connection The OSA 5548C SSU allows communicating with via an Ethernet network for remote management A RJ 45 port is located on the management tile Connector
33. Oe O O ANTENNA GPS 1 2 2 LINK l Sk B GROUP 1 AN M PO RTA NT N LO 0 EXT 0 ALARM INPUTS When no GPS receivers are installed en the PPS signal is not phase locked to GROUP 2 UTC 00000000000606009 900600000000060600 00000 000000600060 0000090000000 PPS 2 PPS 1 Figure 4 17 Output Connectors PPS OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 28 Equipment Installation JOSCILLOC PPS 1 PPS 2 Figure 4 18 Output PPS on Remote Panel PPS is phase locked to UTC when GPS receiver cards are locked to GPS signal 4 5 2 7 Cabling a PPS Output Connector STEP ACTION 1 Choose a PPS output BNC connector available 2 Use a coaxial cable 50 ohms with BNC male termination and connect it into the intended connector 3 Check that the cable is tightened correctly Procedure 4 11 Cabling a PPS Output Connector OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 29 Equipment Installation 4 6 Alarms Figure 4 20 shows two types of alarm connectors the EXTERNAL ALARM INPUTS and the ALARM OUT group 1 amp 2 OD ZY ALARMS OUT 1 EXPANSION ALARM OUT LINK A LINK B GROUP 1 0 of la N UH ALARM OUT EXT ALARMS IN N EXPANSION 1 LINK A LINK
34. Pass through expansion B mode PPS status for expansion A PPS status for expansion B 7 Note The 10 MHz frequency is not supplied to the expansion shelves because they are able to generate this frequency by using the others Signal properties for PPS outputs 1 amp 2 on the Management connector tile Parameters generated Configuration PPS output 1 OK if everything is running fine Failure if any problem Squelch if the system has cut the signal PPS output 2 Passthrough if the system is in Pass through mode OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 126 Operating amp Provisioning The following TL1 command is issued to retrieve the current status of the signal generation parameters AN Note The command response refers to the SGC group status and not to individual SGC card status Input Syntax RTRV EQPT SGC ctag The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M Lag COMPLD opstate SSM ssm OQL oql SYS MODE sys mode el l el 2 el exp a el exp b freq 1 freq exp a freq exp b pps gen pps timing pps exp a pps exp b pps out l pps out 2 freq 2 lL Parameter Possible Default OPSTATE EMPTY OK There are nine different SGC group EXTRACTED states INIT EMPTY The group slots are empty DOWNLOAD EXTRACTED The group has been OK ALARM extracted from its respective slots DEGRADED INIT The group is being restarted TESTERROR DOWNLOAD The group firmw
35. Power Supply 5V Figure 2 24 GPS Card Block Diagram OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 048MHz GPS Reference PPS Reference GPS Pass through Product Overview 2 5 5 GNSS Card 2 5 5 1 Physical View DESCRIPTION Status GREEN Solid Card system is working properly RED Solid Card system is currently not working properly or GNSS card is in initialization phase RED Flashing Version error ORANGE Solid Card s firmware is being upgraded OFF Card is not working at all GREEN Solid GNSS signal reception is OK PPS input reference available RED Solid No or not enough GNSS signal available PPS input reference not available RED Flashing No connection to GNSS Antenna Either shorted or opened GPS antenna cable When both GNSS and OCXO LEDs have this status the input is rejected due to a performance alarm Yellow The GNSS input is OK but currently monitored OFF The GNSS input is disabled or the GNSS Card is in Stand by Figure 2 25 RED Solid Internal GNSS s OCXO failure or GNSS Card GLN Initialisation phase RED Flashing GNSS pre tracking sequence When both GNSS and OCXO LEDs have this status the input is rejected due to a performance alarm OFF Card is in stand by without XO alarm e For detailed GPS LED status description refer to section 8 2 1 e For ordering Information refer to Error Reference sour
36. TDEV Time DEViation Ym Factional Deviation MTIE and TDEV ITU T G 812 9 1 related to SSU type e YM 5Sppm MTIE e Algorithm according to ITU T G 810 Appendix I1 5 TDEV Algorithm according to ITU T G 810 Appendix I1 3 Ym Algorithm according to Telcordia GR 1244 3 43 PM storage capacity 24 hours of PM 8 PM sets the on going set Table 9 4 Performance Measurement PM Specifications 9 5 Outputs PM default threshold E1 Connector e CEI 1 0 2 3 SUB D 25 pins or BNC Remote panel Label OUT 1 10 and 11 20 E1 Ports e Up to 200 providing 200x E1 outputs 1 1 protected Configuration E1 Level Impedance Time Slot 16 structure Supported Code Output failure criteria 2 048MHz Connector Label Ports Configuration 2 048MHz Level Impedance Output failure criteria PPS outputs OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 6 when all OUtput Cards OUC are installed Up to 20 OUtput Cards OUC providing 10 groups in 1 1 protection ITU T G 703 9 Nominal 75 O ASYMM or 120 Q SYM CCS or CAS user selectable AMI and HDB3 user selectable Failed when the amplifier is detected as defective e Shorted when the output line impedance is too low e CEI 1 0 2 3 SUB D 25 pins or BNC on Remote panel OUT 1 10 and 11 20 T e Up to 200 providing 200x outputs 1 1 protected when all Output Cards OUC are installed e Up to 20 OUtput Cards OUC provi
37. alarm should be detected and 3 10 2 generated or not 10 4 10 3 amp 10 2 corresponds to the alarm detection threshold i e 10E 4 10E 3 or 10E 2 In that case an alarm is produced when false CRC 4 values rate of the total number 1000 during 1s is higher or equal than the selected Threshold BPV DETECT DISABLED DISABLED Determine whether a Bipolar ENABLED 10 4 10 Violation BPV alarm when using 3 10 2 AMI code or Code Violation alarm when using HDB3 code should be detected and generated or not 10 4 10 3 amp 10 2 corresponds to the alarm detection threshold i e 10E 4 10E 3 or 10E 2 In that case an alarm is produced when BPV or CV rate of the total number 2 048E during 1s is higher or equal than the selected Threshold SA4 JOFFONSSM ValueoftheSa4bt BAR JOFFONSSM Value of the Sad bit SAR JOFFONSSM Value of the Sa6 bit SAT JOFFONSSM ValueoftheSarbt OFF ON SSM ON SSM Value of the Sa8 bit hass BIT ON SSM 7 SA5 SA6 SA7 w Value ofthe Sa8 bit nnm bit used to transmit the SSM as fae NONE quality FREQ 2 048M 5M 10M 2 048M If the line is assigned to a INVALID frequency input this is the frequency detected by the INC My Tag with up to Double quoted tag Up to 32 32 chars characters alphabetic upper and lower case numeric and punctuation Not configurable with software OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 68 Operating amp Provis
38. and hence the internal oscillator provides the shelf synchronization source OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 117 Operating amp Provisioning Using TL1 To retrieve the current status the following command is required Input Syntax RTRV EQPT MADDS ctag The response is formatted as below Output Syntax Sid date time M tag COMP LD madds_state OSACLK osaclk OSACLKAVL osaclkavl SYS MODE sys mode To set the parameters the following command should be sent Input Syntax ED EQPT MADDS ctag OSACLK osaclk Example ED EQPT MADDS MYCTAG OSACLK OFF Parameter name Possible Default Description configurations parameters MADDS STATE TRACKED This is the state of MADDS THC WARMUP FAST TRACKED the MADDS is correctly FREERUN tracking the selected input signal HOLDOVER WARMUP this state is present while the internal THC oscillator is warming up i e after shelf power up FAST this state should take approximately 1 minute This is shown when the MADDS is changing its bandwidth in order to track the selected signal rapidly FREERUN This status is shown when the THC MADDS have never tracked any Input signal HOLDOVER This status is shown when the THC MADDS no longer have any input signals on their inputs OSACLK ON OFF OSAClock enable ON or disable OFF kanin YESNO NO EE if the OSAclock is available or NOT if ME eae MODE bn EXP INV 5548C
39. e Generates a minor alarm if the Time Of Day TOD disappears although the performance will be affected more than 1 year later e Generates a major alarm if the PPS from SGC card disappear OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 56 Product Overview 2 5 9 4 TCC NTP Block Diagram Front panel Connector 8625 P gt gt el Ob L Status val PPS gt m lt plOMHz T P PPS FPGA p gt gt gt LEDs NTP y driver Svnchr Out n t PPS RJ 45 Pos Id nn m R 0 Ohms b B 0 NTP Oo y Reset Ethernet NTP S Fact def x Ethernet LED Ra driver Front panel m 9 or tile set xX Zoo 5V access RS 232 Download uC gt ae Mode ACCESS Rx e Select lt 3V3 4 CANH CAN CANL Driver 20 gt 60V a 20 gt 5V gt 12V Vref S Extracted lt T Figure 2 35 NTP Card Block Diagram OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 57 Product Overview 2 5 10 Time Code Card PTP TCC PTP 2 5 10 1 Physical Layout LED DESCRIPTION Status e RED Solid The card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure e RED Flashing Version error
40. e ORANGE Solid Card s firmware is being upgraded STATUS e GREEN Solid Card system is working properly e OFF Card is not working at all PTP e RED Solid The card system is currently in power up mode wait PPS TOD UTC GPS or server failure e RED Flashing Waiting synchronization PPS TOD UTC GPS received e GREEN Solid PTP working properly e GREEN flashing PTP alarm which doesn t affect the operational state PTP port is always active e ORANGE when the PTP module is being downloaded ETHERNET GREEN Solid Ethernet cable connected e OFF Ethernet cable disconnected Figure 2 36 Time Code SFP e Ethernet link Card PTP TCC PTP Table 2 10 Time Code Card PTP TCC PTP LED Description OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 58 Product Overview 2 5 10 2 Main Features TCC PTP Server accuracy PPS reference 50ns Global accuracy on data network is depending on traffic and topology Number of PTP slaves supported 128 Slaves 16 Sync s 80 Slaves 32 Sync s 6x TCC PTP cards available for 5548C E60 SSU 20x TCC PTP cards available for 5548C E200 SSU PTP load sharing between different groups of TCC PTP cards One or two step clock UNICAST and or MULTICAST addressing mode Ethernet UDP transmission protocol Configuration of the PTP domain Configuration by DHCP or Fixed IP Plug and play installation Can be inserted in any of the OUC slots Software is remotely upgradeable 2 5
41. e RTRV EQPT OUC To restore the parameters e ED EQPT OL e ED EQPT OG e ED EQPT OUC For MAC cards To store the parameters e RIRV EQPT MAC To restore the parameters e ED EQPT MAC A Note The SyncView PLUS management software has a back up tool which can save the configuration and restore it in any shelf OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 42 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 3 2 2 Card Addition or Replacement Procedure The procedure is identical for each type of card Ad CAUTION When handling the OSA 5548C SSU unit or spare cards use a grounded wrist strap to avoid ESD Electro Static Discharge e Avoid touching components or connectors e Avoid placing the card on an ungrounded surface e Avoid placing the card on or near insulated elements and or surfaces STEP ACTION 1 Locate and verify the slot you want to insert the card 2 If a card or tile already occupies the slot unscrew it using a flathead screwdriver and pull it out carefully still using ESD precaution 3 Align the card edge with the top and bottom metallic slides until you can slide the module inside AN CAUTION Prior to insert any card verify that currently inserted cards have their locking screws well tightened 4 Slide the card in carefully until it sits well on the rear DIN connector 5 Verify that the card has been correctly inserted 6 Tighten the two screws of the card located on the top and the bott
42. input line CTAG Then the SyncTerminal should show the following message in one single line where you can check the bold blue parameters SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD input_line OK ENABLED DISABLED MONITORED PRC SSU_A SSU_B SEC DNU FAILED NONE DISABLED INPUT FREQ connector OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 17 STEP Commissioning ACTION ADM STATE ENABLED DISABLED MONITORED TERM TERMINATED CODE B8ZS AMI WTR 1 12 DISABLED FRCD PRC SSU A SSU B SEC DNU NONE OOF DETECTION DISDABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 CRC4 DETECTION DISDABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 BPV DETECTION DISDABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 SA4 OFF ON SSM SA5 OFF ON SSM SA6 OFF ON SSM SA7 OFF ON SSM SA8 OFF ON SSM FREQ the frequency fed TAG My Input Line Tag On the active INC card of the corresponding group the LED related to the Input Line you configured should either flashes in Green due to Wait To Restore time or illuminates in solid Green Procedure 7 11 Frequency Input Line Configuration 7 2 5 3 Disabling an Unused Input Line The purpose of disabling an unused input line is to suppress alarms STEP 1 2 3 ACTION To discover which cards are unused check the INC card input LEDs for RED condition after configuring the lines and connecting them Then simply send the following command to all the unused lines ED EQPT IL input line CTAG ADM STATE DISABLED Once the command is sent
43. represent TL1 syntax of up to 10 characters 2004 01 01 2099 12 Date and Time of the last 31 00 00 00 23 59 59 session established by this LAST TIME user ATTEMPTS Number of unsuccessful session attempts since last session Not software configurable A Note By default once logged when no command is sent during 10 minutes the session closes automatically for security The following automatic message format is prompted sid date time almcde ctag CANC lL 6 3 4 Logout the 5548C 6 3 4 1 User Logout When user needs to end the session the following command is required Input Syntax CANC USER aid ctag Example CANC USER OSCILLOQUARTZ MYCTAG name configurations AD pf gin oF Usemame UD OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 40 Operating amp Provisioning 6 3 4 2 Logout User from an Administrator Account An admistrator can logout a user with the following command Input Syntax CANCG USER SE R ER L Clad Example CANC USER SECU USER1 MYCTAG Default Parameter Possible configurations name AID Login or Username UID of the user being G 6 3 5 Password Modification 6 3 5 1 Own User Password Modification The user can modify his password with the following command Input Syntax ED PID aid ctag oldpid newpid Example ED PID OSCILLOQUARTZ ctag OSA MYNEWPWD aD eS UID OLDPID Fo a Po Current Password N
44. second card does not show any alarm it is recommended to return this card for repair RED Flashing No E1 signal is received to be processed and During the turn up procedure it is normal to distributed by the OUC card get such alarm until the shelf is able to provide a valid signal to the OUC cards However if this status remains longer follow this OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 16 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Des riptlon Aetion The output line group is not configured as E1 or no output tile is installed if the f LED is also OFF If the description does not correspond to the behavior currently shown by the shelf follow the next 1 Verify that output configuration is correct 2 Verify that Output Tile is present 3 OUT 1 10 GREEN The function is working and the Frequency No action needed signals are distributed correctly RED An alarm has been detected on at least one of Verify that the output lines connected are the 10 outputs 1 to 10 not shorted if you have enabled this alarm detection Measure each output ports and check that the level and shape are correct If the card is protected 1 1 and the second card does not show any alarm it is recommended to return this card for repair OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 17 procedure Verify the SGC cards operation and configuration Verify the THC cards operation and configur
45. send the following command RIRV 1INV SYSSTILIAG 4 You should receive the following answer SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD SERIAL NUMBER SHELF TYPE 1 To retrieve the inventory of all cards send the following command RTRV INV ALL CTAG 6 The SyncTerminal will respond with the following answer SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD card slot number article number serial number clei number eci number hardware version software version testing date last upgrade date 7 Procedure 7 25 Verifying Shelf Inventory OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 30 Commissioning 7 3 9 Verifying the Shelf Operation Mode With the procedure below the user can check the shelf type configured STEP ACTION 1 Look at the MAC card and check it lights the corresponding LED according to the shelf type e MST fora MASTER shelf e EXP for an Expension shelf 2 To check via software send the following command RTRV EQPT MAC CTAG The shelf will answer the following SID DATE TIME M TAG COMPLD OK BUZZER OFF CR MJ MN ACO 1 2 BOTH NONE ALMESC 0 6 24 SYS MODE INV MST EXP The SYS MODE parameter is the shelf operation mode the INV means INVALID The EXP means Expansion Shelf The MST means MASTER shelf by default If the shelf operation mode is wrong it is mandatory to power off the shelf to change the configuration with the rotary switch located on the Management tile Procedure 7
46. 2 Bipolar Violation with AMI code Check the E1 signal in question Lo atol e 1 or more BPV detected during an interval of 1s e f Threshold alarm is enabled o When BPV rate of the total number 2 048E 06 during 1s is higher or equal than the Threshold selected Code INC 1 INC 2 Bipolar Violation with HDB3 code Check the E1 signal in question Lo atol e 1 or more CV detected during an interval of 1s e lf Threshold alarm is enabled o When CV rate of the total number 2 048E 06 during 1s is higher or equal than the Threshold selected OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 30 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Condition Cards in or ten contre son adem veien aon CRC 4 CRO4 INC 1 INC 2 e 915 CRC 4 values or more Check the E1 signal in question are false on a total of 1000 ITU T G 706 If Threshold alarm is enabled o When false CRC 4 values rate of the total number 1000 during 1s is higher or equal than the Threshold selected i M 3 Dead EQPT M The system is not able to Initialize the card in card for repair M N J EGC Link LNKBRK J EGC A No signal at all is received by the Check the cable connected to Broken EGC B EGC card LINK A and or LINK B connector on Management Tile R J communicate with the card question Pull it out and reinsert it If the above action did not clear this alarm return the EGC Link LNKSIG
47. 2 4 This is the input line abbreviation The first digit is the group number and the second digit is the input number 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 INPUT EI 1 612 E1 3 This is the port connector assigned to the related E1 4 FREQ 1 line FREQ 2 FREQ 3 FREQ 4 Table 6 12 Input Line Editing Setting OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 71 Operating amp Provisioning A Important We do not recommend selecting the same input connector to more than one input line IL for evident reason of operation reliability Using SyncView Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt Input 1 8 gt Details E og Signal Performances Input Line G Be a Termination l Input Alarm Detection Select the input type to be applied on the specified line anp ENABLED e FREQ_1 to 4 are the M Bit DISABLED Frequency bnt a connectors 2 048 5 10 MHz e E1 1to4arethe E1 connectors AMI 2 048 Mbit s __ Wait to restore Time Enabled L Disabled Cancel Apply Refresh Figure 6 13 SyncView Input Type configuration Window OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 72 Operating amp Provisioning 6 5 5 Enabling Disabling or Monitoring an Input Line Disable any unused Input Lines to avoid alarms Use the Monitoring function to assess an Input Line prior to enabling that line into service The following example demonstrates the admin
48. 2012 6 85 Operating amp Provisioning Using TL1 To retrieve the current GPS Properties send the following command Input Syntax RTRV EQPT GPS ctag Example RTRV EQPT GPS MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD opstate ssm PPS OFFSET pps offset ADM STATE adm state INDOOR indoor ELEVATION elevation FRCD fred VISIBLE visible TRACKED tracked r To edit all the parameters send the following command Input Syntax ED EOPT GPS 0Leg Z FPS OFFSET pp5s offset ADM STATE adm state INDOOR indoor ELEVATION elevation FRCD fredl Example ED EOPT GPS MYCTAG PPS OFFSET 274 ADM STATE ENABLED INDOOR OFF ELEVATION 15 FRCD NONE Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters OPSTATE OK ALARM Depends on GPS Operation state PERFALARM state OK The system works correctly ALARM GPS reception in alarm PRFALARM Performance crosses the quality threshold PRC SSU A PRC when SSM quality supplied by the GPS SSU_B SEC locked DNU group DNU NONE when DISABLED unlocked PPS OFFSET 999 999 999 999 0 PPSoffset o ADM_STATE ENABLED ENABLED Administrative state of the line MONITORED ENABLED the line can be DISABLED selected MONITORED the line is measured but ignored for selection DISABLED The line is deactivated OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 86 Operat
49. 21 S O System M MYCTAG COMPLD L INIT SYS INITialize SYStem SET SID SET Source IDentifier RTRV HDR I SMYCTAG RTRV NETYPE ReTRieve Network Element TYPE ED DAT EDit DATe RTRY PTHRGH ReTRieve Pass THRouGH SET CCALIGN SET CC ALIGN RTRY CCALIGN ReTRieve CC ALIGN OPR LEDS OPeRate LEDS RTRY LEDS ReTRieve LEDS i ENCAP CMD ENCAPsulate CoMmanD H Fault H 0 Performance H E 55M H 0 Download Sort By Categories Alphabetically Procedure 6 6 Typing TL1 Commands OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 35 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 6 9 Keyboard Shortcuts for Typing TL1 Commands The SyncTerminal interface uses tips and shortcuts to assist the user with TL1 command Shortcut Function amp Description Keyboard vision Repeat a previous command To repeat a previously typed TL1 command the operator can press the top cursor one time if it is required to repeat the previous command Or as many times as he wants want to retrieve past typed TL1 commands Select a parameter in the callout To select a parameter in a long list of available parameters as in the picture below press the keys CTRL Cursor right Edit Equipment IL Edits the parameters of the Input Line ED EQPT IL TID 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 CT AG INPUT D5S1 1 05 i ED EGPT IL 1 3 Select an optional configuration parameter in the callout When setting one of the optional parameters in a TL1 comman
50. 2E 5 12ppm Ym 1H 1 2E 5 12ppm Ym 2H 1 2E 5 12ppm Ym 3H 1 2E 5 12ppm Table 6 21 Default Ym Threshold df F mean 1 2E 5 1 0E 5 8 0E 6 6 0E 6 4 0E 6 2 0E 6 0 2 0E 6 4 0E 6 6 0E 6 8 0E 6 1 0E 5 1 2E 5 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 11000 Time s Figure 6 22 Default Ym Threshold OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 187 Operating amp Provisioning 6 12 6 4 Editing the PM threshold The PMthreshold can be modified by the user for any input line The following command is required to retrieve the actual mask Input Syntax RTRV PM TH aid ctag kind Example RTRV PM TH IL 2 3 MYCTAG TDEV The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sgid date time M ctag COMPLD aid kind pointl point2 point3 point4 point5 point6 To set a threshold the following TL1 command is necessary Input Syntax BOSE v TH aid ctag kind pointl1 point2 point3 point4 point5 point6 Example ED PM TH IL 1 2 MYCTAG YM 5 2E 6 5 2E 6 5 2E 6 5 2E 6 5 2E 6 5 2E 6 name configurations parameters AID IL 1 1 IL 2 4 GPS This parameter is the input line for which you want to retrieve or edit the mask KIND MTIE TDEV YM This is the type of mask For TDEV TDEV_1S For YM YM 608 POINT2 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE_1M For TDEV TDEV_4S For YM YM_540S OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 1
51. 3 6 The input line priority configuration has been successfully tested see section 7 3 7 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 41 Commissioning The stand by cards INC THC MAC have been successfully tested see section 7 3 8 The alarm levels have been successfully tested See section 7 3 9 The output ports have been successfully tested see section 7 3 10 All alarms and events have been flushed see section 7 3 11 Table 7 1 End of Commissioning Check List The commissioning procedure is complete The OSA 5548C SSU is ready to be placed in service First name Last Name of the responsible Date of completion m 1 cm fT Comments OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 42 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Chapter 8 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Including Maintenance Troubleshooting Cards amp Tiles Replacement or Addition Fuse Replacement Repair amp Return Oscilloguartz Contact Information OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 3 1 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 2 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 1 Maintenance The OSA 5548C SSU does not require any routine maintenance However in order to ensure correct functioning of the LEDS and the cards operati
52. 4 2 2 Single Card Fuse If a card cannot light its LEDs anymore the fuse might be the cause of such behavior A Note Fuse specifications and Order Numbers are described in 0 If the replaced fuse blows again replace the card OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 45 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 4 3 Fuse Location 8 4 3 1 POWER Card Fuse The fuse is located on the front panel of the POWER A amp POWER B cards 8 4 3 2 Single Card Fuse All the cards except POWER A amp POWER B have their fuse at the same place as shown here below LOCKING SCREWS LOCATING TEETH DIN CONNECTOR SERIAL NUMBER STATUS OUT 1 10 Qps1 O cc FRONT PANEL FUSE OUT 1120 Qos1 ecc CARD ABBREVIATION amp PART NUMBER BAIL HANDL one Figure 8 2 Single Card Fuse Location OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 46 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 4 4 Fuse Replacement Procedure 8 4 4 1 STEP 1 2 POWER Cards Fuse ACTION Unscrew the fuse with a flat screwdriver doing a 4 CCW turn rotation Pull out the fuse from its holder socket Remove the fuse from the black fuse holder Measure the fuse resistance with an ohmmeter and check that the value is infinite If the resistance is at 0 ohms the fuse is not the cause of the trouble you should check the power fed If necessary replace the fuse with
53. 4x INC cards 2X GPS cards 2X THC cards 2X SGC cards 20x OUC cards 2X MAC cards 2X POWER cards Long term frequency ITU T G 811 G 811 PRC accurac Input reference e E1 2 048 5 10 MHz GPS Output signals E1 2 048 MHz PPS Synchronization Status ITU T G 703 Messages SSM Expansion shelves Up to 4 expansion shelves providing 200 more 1 1 outputs each one for a total of 1000 1 1 protected outputs Contact Oscilloquartz for availability OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 10 Specifications Environmental Environment e Storage as specified in ETS 300 019 1 1 class 1 1 Transportation as specified in ETS 300 019 1 2 class 2 2 Operation as specified in ETS 300 019 1 3 class 3 2 Operating Temperature 5 to 45 C Range Storage Temperature 20 to 50 C Humidit 5 to 95 non condensing Norms and certificates EMC amp ESD Emission EN 55022 ClassB Immunity EN 55024 Safet Conformance to EN60950 1 Compliance Built to comply with ITU T G 703 G 811 G 812 G 704 G 781 ETSI EN 300 462 6 4 Table 9 13 General Specifications OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 11 Specifications This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 12 Ordering Information Shelf Spares amp Replacement Parts The following tables contain the articles an
54. 5548C TCC NTP OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 143 Operating amp Provisioning 6 9 6 Time Code Card PTP TCC PTP State Configuring a network to use the TCC PTP card basically consists of the following steps e IP configuration e PTP parameters configuration on the Grandmaster e PTP parameters configuration on the slaves if any PTP Port The SFP connector cage on the front panel hosts the SFP transceiver corresponding to the network in use electrical or optical Oscilloquartz supplies SFP transceivers upon request The user may optionally integrate his own transceivers but without any warranty on the performances The TCC PTP has only one PTP port Thus the port number asked by several TL1 commands shall always be 1 6 9 6 1 IP Configuration The TCC PTP card allows PTP connections with two transmission protocol Ethernet and UDP The system s configuration may differ according to the chosen transmission protocol The Ethernet IP configuration may be accomplished using the ED EQPT PTPC IP TL1 command TL1 Syntax ED EQPT PTPC IP TID PTPC 1 A PTPC 10 B CTAG PORT 1 2 IPADDRESS titt fit NETMASK Fit ii GATEWAY fit fit HHH DHCP MODE ENABLED DISABLED ETHER SDEF AUTO MANUAL ETHER _SPEED 10 100 1000 DUPLEX MOD E HALF FULL Example ED EQPT PTPC IP PTPC 1 Asr PORT 1 TPADDRESS 145 133 40 122 NETMASK 255 255 255 0
55. Abbreviation and Name used within TL1 Commands In the below table are represented the cards with their corresponding abbreviation used with TL1 commands Z O i Ql QIO U U PP UT gt Q Op MIN gt gt gt U U ill TCC 1 A TCC 2 A OUC 2 B OUC 3 B MAC A A21 PWR A is not software manageable Slot Abbreviation T T A A A TCC 7 TCC 8 A TCC 9 A TCC 10 A PWR B is not software manageable Table 6 3 Card Names amp Abbreviations within TL1 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 11 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 2 Establishing Communication with the 5548C SSU The 5548C can communicate either via a direct serial connection using a computer with a terminal emulation software or if the 5548C is connected to a LAN Local Area Network through an Ethernet connection via TELNET Please refer to the below section 6 2 3 if it is necessary to connect a computer with direct serial connection or the 6 2 4 for the Ethernet connection 6 2 3 Serial Port Communication The OSA 5548C SSU has two serial communication ports RS 232C labeled LOCAL COMM located on the front of the POWER B card the Management tile and the Remote panel Cable type AT link Nullmodem Cable termination Sub d 9 pins female 5548C s serial connector LOCAL COMM Serial connection to the RS 232C port located on the Remote Panel in TL1 RS
56. B PPS GEN OK FAIL SQLCH This is the state of the PPS PTHRGH generated for internal 5548C use rre mune OK FAIL SQLCH This is the state of the PPS This is the state of the PPS PPS EXP S FAIL SQLCH generated for expansion shelf A PTHRGH LINK A This is the state of the PPS PPS_EXP_B OK FAIL SQLCH generated for expansion shelf B PTHRGH LINK B T is T state of the PPS PPS OUT 1 OK FAIL SQLCH OK generated for the Management tile PTHRGH PPS output 1 This is the state of the PPS PPS OUT 2 OK FAIL SQLCH OK generated for the Management tile PTHRGH PPS output 2 FREQ 2 OK FAIL SQLCH This is the state of the Frequency PTHRGH line nr 2 generated for OUCSs correct functioning on the generated signal vg This status is shown if any problem is encountered on the generated signal SQLCH if the system has cut the signal Usually when both the THCs havent ended their start up procedure PTHRGH if the system is in Passthrough mode The signal is provided directly to the SGCs without passing through the THC 6 9 3 OUtput Card Group State OUC OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 128 Operating amp Provisioning Send the following TL1 command to retrieve the current OUC card group status 1 to 10 AN Note The command response refers to the OUC group status and not to individual OUC card status 7 Note For OUC cards and Output Tile relation refer to se
57. B on the management tile e 1 PPS for the PPS output BNC connectors 1 amp 2 on the management tile 6 9 2 1 Retrieving the State of all Signal Types Generated and SGC Group State A Note The distributed PPS signal is synchronized to the UTC Universal Coordinated Time only when at least one GPS Input card is locked to GPS SSM state and SSM output properties Parameters generated Configuration SSM Enable or disable OQL SSM Output quality level A Note The OQL parameter is the SSM status supplied on all E1 output ports OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 125 Operating amp Provisioning Properties of the signal generated for OUCs NTP PIP Parameters generated Configuration E1 Option 1 status OK if everything is running fine E1 Option 2 status Failure if any problem 2 048 MHz status Squelch if the system has cut the signal 10 MHz status Passthrough if the system is in Pass through PPS Timing mode PPS General Not yet available 7 Note PPS General is for internal OSA 5548C SSU use only i e to make the LEDs blink Properties of the signal generated for expansion shelves LINK A amp LINK B Parameters generated Configuration E1 status for expansion A E1 status for expansion B OK if everything is running fine 2 048 MHz status for Failure if any problem expansion A Squelch if the system has cut the signal 2 048 MHz status for Passthrough if the system is in
58. CC 1 CC 2 RTRY EQPT OL ReTRieve EQuiPmenT OL PS gt ED EQPT OG EDit EQuiPmenT OG lt RTRY EQPT OG ReTRieve EQuiPmenT OG v ED EQPT OUC EDit EQuiPmenT OUC ED EQPT IL 1 1 CTAG RTRY EQPT OUC ReTRieve EQuiPmenT OUC ED EQPT MAC EDit EQuiPmenT MAC RTRY EQPT MAC ReTRieve EQuiPmenT MAC RTRY INY ReTRieve INVentory RTRY EOPT OP ReTRieve EOuiPmenT Operational State Sort By Categories Alphabetically Ready Figure 2 58 SyncTerminal example OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 86 2 1 2 7 1 2 1 2 Product Overview Synchronization Status Messaging SSM E1 lines can carry Synchronization Status Messages SSM which is embedded information about the frequency quality level allowing any SSM compatible network element NE to select the best frequency quality according to the sync source The SSM status transfers synchronization quality from the active input or source toward E1 outputs The SSM byte is encoded on E1 signals The OSA 5548C SSU supports Synchronization Status Messaging SSM on input and output interfaces E1 2 048 Mbit s according to ITU T G 781 second generation SSM norms Here are the different SSM quality levels supported by the OSA 5548C SSU G T E 9 512 Type VO S8UB O SSM Failure oS FALED O SSM Quality unknown TE UNKNOWN Table 2 21 SSM Levels SSM Inputs The OSA 5548C SSU extracts the SSM information from each E1 input signal The operator c
59. Connection Test Procedure STEP ACTION 1 Start the SyncTerminal interface 2 If you were not able to communicate until now despite you followed the correct Ethernet connection procedure read the follow below information e Ifthe IP address is already configured in the SyncTerminal Go in the menu TOOLS gt Ping Current Connection then check that the IP address answers e Ifthe IP address is not yet configured in the SyncTerminal Go in the menu TOOLS gt Ping Specific Address gt Enter the IP address then check that the IP address answers If the connection cannot be established by the PING check that the cat 5 10 or 100 Base T Ethernet cable is OK and well connected If the problem persists contact an IT person to check that the network connection corresponds to the network rules 3 If you were able to establish the communication send the following command RIRV HDRr GEA 4 The SyncTerminal should show you the following message SLD DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD 7 Procedure 7 24 Ethernet Connection Test OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 29 Commissioning 7 3 4 Verifying Shelf Inventory STEP ACTION Enter the following TL1 command in one single line to retrieve the OSA L 5548C type information RIRV NEIYPE 11 2 Then the SyncTerminal should prompts the following answer SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD VENDOR MODEL TYPE RELEASE 3 To retrieve the serial number of the shelf
60. Connector Tile Insertion sese eee e eee ee e ee ee e e ee e 8 44 Figure 8 2 Single Card Fuse Location sss 8 46 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 xiii List of Tables List of Tables Page PETE 2 34 TaTable 2 2 INput Card INC LED Description rrrrrrrrarernnrrnnrevnnrnrarernnrrnnnevnarnranennnnrnnnennnnnnnee 2 36 Table 2 3 GPS Card GPS LED Description eee eee ee eee ee 2 39 Table 2 4 GNSS Card LED Description rrrnrrrnnrrnrenarennrrnnrrnnrrnnrnnnrnnnennnennnennsennsennennnennuennnenneen 2 42 Table 2 5 Tracking Holdover Card THC LED Description sese eee e eee 2 45 Table 2 6 Signal Generator Card SGC LED DEeSCTiIDTION ee ee ee 2 48 Table 2 7 OUput Card OUC LED Description ses eee eee eee ee 2 51 Table 2 8 Time Code Card NTP TCC NTP LED Description sss sese eee e 2 54 Table 2 9 Time Code Card NTP TCC NTP LED Description sse eee e 2 55 Table 2 10 Time Code Card PTP TCC PTP LED Description sss ses eee eee eee 2 58 Table 2 11 MAnagement Card MAC LED Description sese ee eee ee e 2 61 Table 2 12 Power Card PWR LED Description esse eee ee eee ee 2 64 Table 2 13 RS 232 Local COMM Port Connector Description esse eee ee eee 2 65 Table 2 14 Connector Tile Locations sese ee eee eee 2 67 Table 2 15 Expansion Link Connector Description see ee ee e e eee 2 71 Table 2 16 LAN COMM Port Connector Description rirnarernrnnrnnnrnurnnvernrvnnnnvrruennverrnnseneerneenen 2 71 Table
61. Description E EE Po Login or Username UID OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 48 Operating amp Provisioning 6 4 General Parameters and Information This section contains general information and setting such as e Setting the 5548C s shelf name e Setting the time and date e Checking the inventory and retrieving the 5548C type information e Checking card operation state e Deleting a card for empty slots e Swapping active card within a group i e INC A to INC B e Initializing card firmware e Lamp test e LEDs status 6 4 1 Set the 5548C s Name To set the network element s name also called the source identifier use the following command Input Syntax SET SID ctag newsid Example SET SID MYCTAG MY5548C To retrieve the name send the following TL1 command Input Syntax EIR EDE 2a A Note The name of the 5548C shelf should be displayed in the first line of the response after sending any command Parameter Default Possible Description name Parameter configurations NEWSID A string limited to This is the source identifier of the 5548C 20 Characters in the ranges A to Z and 0 to 9 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 49 Operating amp Provisioning 6 4 2 Time amp Date To set the time and the date in the 5548C the following command can be sent 6 4 2 1 Using TL1 Input Syntax ED DAT ctag
62. F m Neeme TATUS RT RT DUC POWER E 3 1d O MOM D ldo de S O IC BB OSCILLOQUARTZ 5548C DLODVE rm SELECTED WPUT sole 19 186 E ald pe AEG 0 JEG o A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ABI AQ MOL A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A19 A17 Input section GPS Tracking amp Holdover Signal Output Management receiver section Generator section section card Figure 2 19 5548C SSU E200 Front Panel Layout OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 31 Product Overview Downward Card Range A1 INput Card A INC INC 1 A2 INput Card B INC A3 INput Card A INC INC 2 A4 INput Card B INC A5 GPS A GPS GPS A6 GPS B GPS AT Tracking amp Holdover Card A THC THC A8 Tracking amp Holdover Card B A9 Signal Generator Card A SGC SGC A10 Signal Generator Card B SGC OUtput Card TCC NTP card TCC PTP card OUC 1 NTP 1 PTP 1 A11 OUtput Card OUtput Card TCC NTP card TCC PTP card OUC NTP PTP OUC 2 NTP 2 PTP 2 OUtput Card OUC OUtput Card TCC NTP card TCC PTP card OUC NTP PTP OUC 3 NTP 3 PTP 3 OUtput Card OUC MAnagement Card MAC OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 32 Product Overview Upward card range Slot Card name Type Abbrev A21 Power A PWRA W JJ OUtput Card TCC NTP card TCC PTP card A23 OUt
63. GATE WAY 145 133 40 122 DHCP MODE DISABLED OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 144 Operating amp Provisioning Parameters descriptions Parameter Possible Default name configurations parameters PESCHA UON Hem PTP 1 A PTP 10 B Card position IPADRESS XXX XXX XXX XXX X 0 255 10 16 1 108 PIP port IP address GATEWAY XXX XXX XXX XXX X 0 255 10 16 1 1 PIP port gateway NETMASK XXX XXX XXX XXX X 0 255 255 255 254 0 PIP port netmask If ENABLED the card asks request its own IP settings to a DHCP server DHCP_MODE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE The current release allows only 1Gb ETHER SPEED 100 1000 AUTO connections Ask Oscilloquartz for 100Mb availability Configuring the PTP port in HALF duplex DUPLEX MODE HALF FULL FULL mode may worse PTP performances Retrieving the Ethernet IP configuration The RTRV EQPT PTPC IP TL1 command can be used to retrieve and verify the Ethernet IP configuration TL1 Syntax RIR V EOPTPIPC TP TID PIP LA SPIP 1U BITAG SPORT La 4 Example RTRV EOPT PTPC IP PIP L A MYCTAG PORT 1 The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time Mctag COMPLD aid IPADDRESS NETMASK HFE HEH fit GATEWAY Hoo Poe Hed 2H DHCP MODE ENABLED ETHER SDEF MANUAL ETHER SPEE D 1000 DUPLEX MODE FULL OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 145 Operating amp Provisioning 6 9 6 2 PT
64. INC A INC B This is the card or the card group where INC GPS A GPS B GPS THC you want to install the new firmware A THC B THC MADDS A MADDS B MADDS SGC A SGC B SGC OUC 1 A OUC 10 B OUC A OUC B OUC MAC A MAC B MAC OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 196 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Downloader gt Select the card to upgrade by clicking on the checkbox Dwnld and then start the upgrade process by clicking the Download button The list of number on each card can be used to make an upgrade sequence of card upgrade strating from one to the highest number set The Download Method can be set to upgrade all cards at the same time a Download 5548C SSU 5548C SSU E200 Master Job STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS O OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 197 Operating amp Provisioning 6 13 3 4 Roll Back to the Previous Firmware Version In case of unexpected condition or eventual firmware issues after upgrade the OSA 5548C is able to reinstall the previous version The following command is required NN Recommendation It is recommended to contact a Customer Support Representative before applying this command Input Syntax DLT DNLD aid ctag Example DLT DNLD THC A MYCTAG Parameter Possible configurations Description name AID INC 1 A INC 2 B INC A INC B
65. INIT EXTRACTED The group has been DOWNLOAD extracted from their respective slots OK ALARM INIT The group is being restarted DEGRADED DOWNLOAD The group firmware is TESTERROR being downloaded DEAD OK The group is running correctly ALARM The group is in alarm DEGRADED The firmware version is not the same as the rest of the shelf TESTERROR Invalid testing date DEAD The MAC group is not able to communicate OFF ON Indicates if the SSM is ON or OFF PERF OFF ON ALARM ON Indicates if the PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT is activated deactivated or in alarm SYS MODE MST EXP INV MST 5548C system mode MST MASTER shelf EXP EXPANSION shelf INV Invalid 6 6 3 GPS Input Properties Various parameters can be configured and shown in the GPS according such as PPS Offset The user can set the GPS antenna cable propagation delay between GPS antenna and GPS receiver 3 92ns per meter for LMR 400 cable in order to trig the PPS phase as close as possible to the UTC time E g for 60m 10m of LMR 400 cable the PPS offset would be 70 x 3 92 274 ns Add 10ns when a GPS in line amplifier is mounted along the cable 7 Note The offset must be negative when setting the PPS delay from the Antenna e g 274 ns as it is an anticipation of the GPS receiver clock of the time received on the GPS antenna Changing the PPS offset affects the PPS output only The GPS card indicates an alarm during a few seconds Administrative Stat
66. K October 2012 1 5 Introduction A VENTILATION Slots and openings in the chassis are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product To protect the unit from overheating those openings must not be blocked or covered When integrating this unit in a rack cabinet at least 1 RU 4 3 cm of clearance above and below the unit is necessary to assure sufficient cooling AN GROUNDING EARTH CONNECTION IS ESSENTIAL BEFORE CONNECTING TO THE SUPPLY Ensure that all devices connected to it are connected to its protective earth ground Grounding one conductor of a two conductor outlet is not sufficient Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor inside the equipment or disconnecting the protective earth terminal is likely to make this equipment dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited AN POWER Make sure the power sources are compatible with the power inputs of the equipment Verify that the correct fuses are installed The equipment s protective earth terminals must be connected to the protective conductor of the mains power cord or the station earth The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact The protective action must not be negated by the use of an extension cord power cable without a protective conductor grounding Make sure that only fuses with the required rated current and of the specified type normal blow tim
67. LED is lit once the OUC has received a signal from the SGC Table 5 7 Output Card Turn up Status OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 5 12 Operating amp Provisioning Chapter 6 Operating amp Provisioning Including Overview Communication Security Management General Parameters and Information Input Line IL Properties amp INput Card INC Configurations Line Switching Tracking amp Holdover THC Signal Filtering and Processing Signal Generation amp Output Properties Synchronization Status Message SSM Alarms amp Events Performance Measurement PM Firmware Download OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 1 Operating amp Provisioning This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 2 Operating amp Provisioning 6 1 Overview This chapter provides instructions and procedure to configure the available functions and settings in the OSA 5548C SSU R Recommendation Review the information in this chapter prior to configuration of the shelf 6 2 Communication AA Recommendation In order to take full benefit of the 5548C SSU management possibilities use the SyncTerminal or SyncView PLUS software 6 2 1 TL 1 Protocol A Note All of the 5548C s TL1 commands are listed in the TL1 Command List document 6 2 1 1 Overview The OSA 5548C SSU u
68. MJ EGC A One signal is not received by the Check the cable connected to Signal Failure EGC B SGC card LINK A and or LINK B connector on Management Tile External EXT Alarm OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 31 EXT 1 EXT 10 External alarms coming from third Check the device connected to party equipment connected to the the alarm input which presents input port alarm on the an alarm C MJ Management tile EXT 1 3 CR EXT 4 6 MJ EXT 7 9 MN EXT 10 N A B Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Deseription Gond Type Sov eause Description FSTSYNC N A THC The THC card is in fast start mode No action needed leave the in order to synchronize its system THC ending their fast start against the input signal selected procedure rapidly FRNGSYNC MJ TH The THC card has not been fed If this behavior was not with input signal reference since it excepted follow this procedure has been powered up Check the INC cards configuration and operation Check the Input Line configuration Check the input lines connected to the shelf General EQPT CR All A general failure has been Verify the status of the card failure detected on a card and its 2 Initialize the card in redundant ko redundant card is not OK question 3 Pull it out and reinsert it 4 Ifthe above action did not clear this alarm return the card for repair General EQPT MJ All A general failure has been 1 Check the sta
69. O O lt OG 3 O Figure 2 48 100 Outputs Ports Remote Panel OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 77 Product Overview 2 5 19 1 Output Tile with 20x CEI 1 0 2 3 connectors 20x ASYMMETRICAL with CEI 1 0 2 3 75ohms GO OG lt O a i gt i gt Gl D O 3 O a Output Output Group 1 Group 2 Figure 2 49 ASYM Output Connectors Tiles OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 78 Product Overview 2 5 19 2 Output Tile with 20x SUB D 25 pins 20x SYMMETRICAL with SUB D 25 pins female 120 ohms OL 1 10 OL 11 20 OL Tip Ring Shield OL Tip Ring Shield ENE 1 25 12 13 12 13 Papan ra faz 9 20 14 a2 9 20 VINDEN Af startet 7 slays 7 6119 6 7 8 17 4 14 16 19 6 7 Output Group 1 9116 3 1 OUT 11 20 SYM 1 Output Group 2 2 E Figure 2 50 SUB D Output Connectors Tiles OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 79 Product Overview 2 5 19 3 20x Output Tile with IDC 20 pins 20x ASYM with IDC connector for Remote BNC panel OL 1 10 OL 11 20 OL Tip Ring OL Tip Ring Ce ee 3 5 6 3 5 6 4 7 8 4 7 8 T pr 5 9 10 5 9 10 6 11 12 6 1 12 8 15 16 8 15 16 Es 9 17 18 Output Group 1 n Output Group 2 Figure 2 51 IDC Output Connector
70. OFF CR MJ MN This parameter is the level to tae the tae Card buzzer sound om TT 2 BOTH NONE This is the parameter to choose for applying the cutoff on the range 1 2 both ranges or none System mode INV INVALID MST MASTER EXP EXPANSION When the system is an EXPANSION shelf this parameter returns the expansion number SYS MODE INV MST EXP 6 11 1 2 Editing Buzzer sound There are different types of alarm conditions these levels are CR CRITICAL MJ MAJOR and MN MINOR lt This is the delay in hour after which a severity of an active alarm is escalated to an higher level 0 means no escalation The MAC card can make a sound using its on board buzzer on any of these 3 alarm severities when an alarm occurs to user defined levels listed below e OFF buzzer not activated e CR buzzer audibly sound on critical alarms only e MJ buzzer audibly sound on major and critical alarms e MN buzzer audibly sound on minor major and critical alarms A Note Retrieve current configuration in section 6 11 1 1 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 160 Operating amp Provisioning Using TL1 To edit the alarm level to make a sound the following TL1 command is required Input Syntax ED EQPT MAC ctag BUZZER buzzer Example ED EQPT MAC S MYCTAG BUZZER CR Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters BUZZER OFF CR MJ MN This par
71. Once completed it is written an information as SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD 5 To install the new firmware in any card use the following command A CAUTION Serious outage can result if the firmware installation is performed on an active card as the card will not operate during download It is recommended to upgrade card by card during the maintenance window or before placing the shelf in service ACT DNLD INC INC 1 A INC 2 B INC A INC B GPS GPS A GPS B THC THC A THC B MADDS MADDS A MADDS B SGC SGC A SGC B OUC OUC 1 A OUC 10 B 0UC A O0UC B MAC MAC A MAC B ALL CTAG OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 11 Commissioning STEP ACTION If the shelf is physically visible the operator should see the STATUS LED in ORANGE during firmware installation After sending the above command the following answer should be shown during installation process IP CTAG lt IP CTAG lt IP CTAG lt Once completed it is written an information as SID DATE TIME M CAG COMPLD 7 A Note Do not forget to upgrade MADDS when upgrading the THC as they belongs to the same card Procedure 7 6 Firmware Upgrade OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 12 Commissioning 7 2 4 General Configuration 7 2 4 1 Setting the OSA 5548C SSU Name SID STEP ACTION 1 Retrieve current name SID of the 5548C shelf RTRV HDR CTAG And the answer should be shown
72. P ower Sourc b ources before replacing the shelf ANTENNA GPS 1 A103 A104 A105 A107 Figure 2 41 5548C SSU E200 Rear View OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 66 Product Overview Downward Tiles Range Cards or Slots _ aoi PowerBtile B tile POWER B card POWER B card Redundant Power source connection and Power source connection and POWER B card Redundant Power source connection and sl ee tile IMAC SGC groups Ethernet LAN Local RS 232 Expansion shelves link alarms IN and OUT and PPS output connections Provides 20 output synchronization ports A15 amp A16 A13 amp A14 A11 amp A12 nil Input tile INC En Input ports are split in two groups of 4 for the A1 to A4 Frequency and 4 for the E1 references from which the user can cable and use 8 lines second group of two BNC connectors are available for GPS antenna connection A107 POWER A card First Power source connection and grounding Upward Tiles Range Cards or pe ee ti om ooo Provides 20 output synchronization ports A34 amp A35 A32 amp A33 A123 Output tile OUC 8 A30 amp A31 A124 Output tile OUC 7 ee pne 7 A125 Output tile OUC 6 MS pne esan A126 Output tile OUC 5 Ha A127 OQutput tile OUC 4 A22 amp A23 Table 2 14 Connector Tile Locations OS
73. PORT 1 2 Example RTRV EQPT PTPC PTP PTP 1 A MYCTAG PORT 1 Answer TEST 11 03 15 15 17 32 M a COMPLD PTPC 2 A PORT 1 PORT STATE PASSIVEADM STATE ENABLEADDR MODE UNICA ST DOMAIN 1 PROTOCOL UDP TWOSTEP NO MASTER STATE ENABLED SL AVE STATE DISABLED 6 9 6 3 PTP Multicast configuration The ED EQPT PTPC MCAST TL1 command allows setting the multicast message rates Multicast addresses In MIXED and MULTICAST mode PTP packets are sent to the following addresses according to the transmission protocol Ethernet 224 0 1 129 UDP IP 01 1B 19 00 00 00 TL1 Syntax ED EQPT PTPC MCAST TID PTP 1 A PTP 10 B CTAG PORT 1 2 ANNOUNCE LOG2PERIOD 7 3 SYNC LOG2PERIOD 7 3 DELAY LOG2PERIOD 7 3 Example ED EQPT PTPC MCAST PTP 1 A MYCTAG PORT 1 ANNOUNCE_ LOG2PERIOD 5 SYNC LOG2PERIOD 5DELAY LOG2PERIOD 5 LOG2PERIOD is 1 2 so if N 5 the message is sent 1 2 32 times per second NOTE the current version of TCC PTP can accept values between 3 and 6 The Multicast configuration can be retrieved with the command RTRV EQPT PTPC MCAST OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 147 Operating amp Provisioning TL1 Syntax RTRV EQPT PTPC MCAST TID PTP 1 A PTP 10 B CTAG PORT 1 2 Example RTRV EQPT PTPC MCAST PTP 1 A MYCTAG PORT 1 Answer TEST 11 03 15 15 17 32 M a COMPLD PTPC 2 A PORT 1 ANNOUNCE_LOG2PERIOD 1 SYNC_LOG2PERIOD 5 DELAY_LOG2PERIOD 5 Clock Quality Configu
74. PTHRIGH ReTRieve Pass THR ou SET CCALIGNM SET OC ALIGN TSG Only RTRV CCALIGH ReTRieve CC ALIGN TSG Only OPR LEDS OPeRate LEDS RTRY LEDS ReTRieve LEDS ENCAP CMD ENCAPsulate ColmanD APPLY CHANGES APPLY CHANGES 1 Faulk C Performance 0 ssM G Download 5548C TL1 Management Commands E TEE L Sort By Categories Alphabetically Figure 6 4 SyncTerminal Short Cut Menu OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 26 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 6 6 Main or command window Once the SyncTerminal is connected to the shelf a new window appears on the right part of the SyncTerminal as in the figure below On the top side the Sync Terminal will respond to the commands or automatically send information from the shelf On the bottom side the operator types the commands SyncTerminal Connected on 149 133 41 49 8023 Terminal Edit Tools Window Help 1 5548C TL1 Management Commands CQ Security MAC ACK 05 06 02 15 06 11 2 03 Communication 2624 REPT PM bai ENT PORT ENTer PORT IL 1 2 MTIE 2005 06 02 14 18 53 1 093500E 05 1 093510E 04 1 093530E DLT PORT CANCel PORT ED PORT EDit PORT RTRY PORT ReTRieve PORT MAC ACK 05 06 02 15 06 11 ED COM SYS EDit COMmunication 5 2625 REPT PM RTRY COM SYS ReTRieve COMmun TL 1 2 TDEV 2005 06 02 14 18 53 2 654500E 07 1 662233E 06 7 384989E H 0 Equipment eo System INIT SYS INITialize SYStem SET SID SET Source IDentifier RTR
75. Refer to section 6 12 6 11 5 9 Retrieving all Autonomous Messages To retrieve a list of queued autonomous messages or a missing one use the following TL1 command Input Syntax RTRV AO ctag ATAGSEQ atagseq MSGTYPE msgtype DBCHGSEO dbehgseq Example RTRV AO MYCTAG MSGTYPE PM Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD message OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 176 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters ATAGSEQ This is the ATAG of the autonomous message to be retrieved Multiple or range values can be specified by using amp or amp amp notation This message can be used together with the MSGTYPE parameter It is not usable if DBCHSEQ is configured MSGTYPE ALM EVT PM NULL Type of message to be retrieved DBCHSEQ 1 99999 NULL Sequence number of DBCHG Database Change messages MESSAGE SA NSA NULL This is the autonomous message 6 11 5 10 Deleting Autonomous Messages It is possible to clear the entire automatic message log or any specified autonomous message contained in the log The following command is required Input Syntax INITT AO0s said OL AG Example INIT AO ALM MYCTAG Parameter Possible Description name configurations AID ALM EVT PM This is the type of autonomous message that you DBCHG SW ALL want to clear ALM Alarm EVT Events PM Perfo
76. Revision K October 2012 6 183 Operating amp Provisioning 6 12 5 Receiving Spontaneous Measurement Results Once the OSA 5548C SSU is able to provide a first PM result or an update it will show it as an autonomous message formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time atag REPT PM aid kind date time point1 point2 point3 point4 point5 point6 name configurations parameters GPS which the result is received KIND MTIE TDEV YM Thisisthetype of value received DATE 2004 01 01 2099 ne This is the PM set date 12 31 TIME 00 00 00 23 59 59 This is the PM set time oa Toe For TDEV TDEV_1S For YM YM_60S POINT2 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE_1M For TDEV TDEV_4S For YM YM 5408 POINT3 1E 9 1E0 For YM YM_15M POINT4 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE_30M For TDEV TDEV_64S a For YM YM_1H For MTIE MTIE 15M POINTS 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE_1H For TDEV TDEV_256S POINT6 1E 9 1E0 For YM YM 2H For MTIE MTIE 3H For TDEV TDEV 10008 For YM YM 3H OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 184 Operating amp Provisioning 6 12 6 Performance Threshold Parameters The OSA 5548C SSU can be configured to disqualify an input line based on performance outside a user define MTIE TDEV or Ym threshold 6 12 6 1 Default MTIE Threshold According to ITU T G 812 clock input section 9 1 1 the default MTIE threshold mask configured in the OSA 5548C SSU is described in the table be
77. SGC Signal Generator Card MY DYTTE MED Emer Bas TE HETE Figure 5 6 Signal Generator Card Turn up Seq STATUS E1 f DESCRIPTION Extinguished Extinguished This status remains briefly 2 GREEN RED RED Status while the SGC does not flashing flashing receive any signal from the THC The SGC cards squelch their outputs and the OUC cards do not receive signals GREEN GREEN This condition means that the shelf flashing flashing is in Pass through mode So no THC is currently available to process input signal fed 3 GREEN GREEN GREEN The SGC now receives a signal from the THC and can process and supply it to the OUC Table 5 6 Signal Generator Card Turn up Status A Note Redundant SGC are simultaneously active and should show the same status at the same time OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 5 11 Turn up Procedure 5 3 7 OUC OUtput Card ll 2 2 7 TS ouc Tf ouc Tove Toe i ouc sac IO la lo JO lo 101010 E Figure 5 7 Output Card Turn up STATUS OUT 10 OUT 11 20 S f EL f DESCRIPTION edhe Extinguished This status remains very shortly iad E1 or f RED E1 orf RED Depending on the output flashing flashing configuration either the f or E1 RED LED flashes during signal outage from SGC GREEN E1 or f GREEN E1 or f GREEN Depending on the output configuration either the f or E1 GREEN
78. SGC B 0UC 1 A OUC 10 B MAC A MAC B CTAG 2 Otherwise reinsert the corresponding card in the slot S Cards in Desopion Error Ku N A All An internal error has been detected in the card system ES INC 1 INC 2 With E1 signal Signal e The signal is lower than 15dB with a terminated connection The signal is lower than 35dB with a bridged connection With Frequency signal e Signal level is lower than 200mV rms with sine wave e Signal level is lower than 0 6V MTIE Alarm PRFMTIE MJ INC 1 INC 2 The MTIE threshold has been Check and measure the stability GPS crossed over by the current of the signal in question Performance Measurement Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 1 Check the status of the card 2 Initialize the card in question 3 Pull it out and reinsert it If the above action did not clear this alarm return the card for repair Check the signal level in question OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 34 Condition Cards in w No Reference NOREF MJ SGC OUC The card is not fed with signal Check the status of the OUC and SGC cards Check the configuration and operation of the THC card SL EG ee ORS MN INC 1 INC 2 Som is enabled and frame type is Check the E1 signal in question PCM31 3 consecutive incorrects FAS words ITU T G 706 If Threshold alarm is enabled o When false words rate of the total number 4000 during 1s is higher or equal than
79. SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 93 Operating amp Provisioning 6 6 4 Retrieving GPS Position Once the GPS card has tracked 4 satellites or 1 in Indoor mode it can show the antenna position Using TL1 Input Syntax RTRV EOQPT POS ctag Example RTRV EQPT POS MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag CUMP LD ER NER Parameter Possible Default Description fname elne parameters 0 N ssid Latitude gt Mr 1 Hin os 1 o FRAC MIN 10 9999 O Frractionofminute gt DEG 10 90 10 Degrees MN 0 59 10 Minutes S FRAC MIN 0 9099 O Frractionofminute ALT 1999 18000 O Altitude in meters OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 94 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt GPS Input gt Details gt Position tab GPS Position Latitude N 46 594919 Longitude E BS 548015 Altitude 514 Cancel i Refresh i OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 95 Operating amp Provisioning 6 6 5 GPS Time To retrieve the GPS time send the following command Inout Syntax RTRV EQPT GPSTIME ctag Example RTRV EQPT GPSTIME MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M otag COMPLD WEEK week SEC sec Parameter Possible Default name configuration
80. SSU Release 1 20 Master Job File Configuration View Elements INC 1 55480 SSU E200 X 10 MHz nt 3 FREG E1 1 a E1 1 E1 1 at FREG ET1 1 u FREG E1 1 SGE a E E RUBIDIUM B ERE mm E1 17E1 1 E1 1 E1 1 SEE QUC 1 Figure 2 4 Logical View of SyncView PLUS Physical View of 5548C SSU E200 5548C SSU Release 1 20 Master BIS File Configuration View Elements A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A35 AJ 2 L OUT 2 20 OUT 1 10 Al A2 A3 ae A5 AG A7 AS A9 A10 All A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 AIT Figure 2 5 Physical View of SyncView PLUS OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 8 Product Overview 2 2 Main Applications 2 2 1 Synchronous Network Technologies Requiring Synchronization 2 2 1 1 Telephony Exchanges The switching of 64 kbit s circuits in digital telephony exchanges requires strict synchronism between the processed signals Some limited amount of wander usually at least 18 microseconds can be absorbed by the buffer stores on the input ports Too much wander relative to the equipment clock will cause the buffer stores to over or underflow ending in loss or duplication of 125 microseconds worth of data one frame on an 2048 kbit s signal or one octet on a 64 kbit s signal This is called a controlled slip ITU T Rec G 822 specifies upper limits for slip rates In order to maintain the operation of the network wit
81. Scrip Save Scripts Cancel OK To avoid overwhelming the MAC card with too many commands too quickly Oscilloquartz recommends adding delay between commands To set a delay between commands press the button shown below Sync Terminal Terminal Edit Tools Window OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 37 Options Scmpts Display Y Protocol gt Wal response before send L utoRepeat Response timeout e Time to wait between 2 sends me Example of script Operating amp Provisioning This check box should be checked to delay the script before sending another command When checked the AutoRepeat feature automatically repeats the script when executed until halted by the user This is the delay before stoping the script when no response Is received This is the delay between two commands within the script To retrieve all the input line parameters create the following script RTRV EQPT IL 1 1 MYCTAG RTRV EQPT IL 1 2 MYCTAG RTRV EQPT IL 1 3 MYCTAG RTRV EQPT IL 1 4 MYCTAG To stop the script you can simply press the below button EI SyncTerminal Connected on 149 133 Terminal Edit Tools Window Help i BK Commands List OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 38 Operating amp Provisioning 6 3 Security Management 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 Introduction This chapter describes
82. T OUTPUT EN Previous Next OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 137 Operating amp Provisioning 6 9 4 4 Short Circuit Detection on OL The OSA 5548C has the capability to show a SHORTED alarm when it detects short circuit on any of an OUC s Output Lines To enable this function on any of the OUC group follow this procedure M Note For OUC cards and Output Tile correspondence refer to section 6 9 1 2 For Output Group information refer to section 6 9 1 3 Using TL1 To retrieve the current OUC state use the following command Input Syntax RIRV BOPT QOUC taid Clad Example RTRV EQPT OUC 3 MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD aid opstate SHORTED shorted 7 To enable the SHORT CIRCUIT detection send the below command Input Syntax ED EQPT OUC aid ctag SHORTED shorted Example ED EQPT OUC 2 MYCTAG SHORTED ON Parameter Possible Default This is the card group specified OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 138 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Possible Default OPSTATE EMPTY EXTRACTED INIT DOWNLOAD OK ALARM DEGRADED TESTERROR DEAD not software configurable Using SyncView There are nine different OUC group states EMPTY The group slots are empty EXTRACTED The group has been extracted from its respective slots INIT The
83. TELNET access the IP address configured in the OSA 5548C SSU Procedure 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 2 4 3 Ethernet Connection with the SyncView PLUS software STEP 1 ACTION Connect the 5548C SSU to the LAN with an Ethernet cable 10 or 100 Base T category 5 with RJ 45 connectors Refer to section 4 7 for more details Connect one Ethernet cable end into the RJ 45 connector as shown on the Figure 4 27 LAN Comm Port Location Test the connection with a PING to the shelfis IP Launch the SyncView PLUS software OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 19 Operating amp Provisioning 5 Set the 5548C s IP Address and click on the Connect button 49 Connect Hod pasperencosasevessonsosestessenesesessoscassote Zessccasecensuasseassonsouesvecsusacctssecnsced IP Address 149 133 41 37 User Ie Use default Name Procedure 6 4 Ethernet Connection with SyncView PLUS 6 2 5 Communication Ports 6 2 5 1 Default Communication Ports Connector Type Available Number of Max Maximum of comm type port s number of simultaneous max session s sessions per port On MAC card RS 232C Raw data 1 1 LOCAL 32 COMM LOCAL COMM LAN COMM default amp Telnet Table 6 5 Default Communication Ports 8023 For 5548C management with TL1 User selectable ports from commands Raw 8000 1025 to 9999 For 5548C management with TL1 data
84. THC B SGC A SGC B O0UC 1 A OUC 10 B MAC A MAC B ALL CTAG COLD Procedure 7 22 Restoring Factory Parameters OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 27 Commissioning 7 3 Test and Verification Procedure AN CAUTION This section can be performed only before placing the shelf in service as it can create outages while shelf is in service 7 3 1 Introduction 7 3 1 1 Overview This chapter presents some basic testing and checking procedure which can be used to check that the OSA 5548C SSU is working properly after installation and configuration completion 7 3 1 2 Requirements The shelf must have completed its starting procedure which means that the THC cards must be operational i e not in warm up or in fast start up The configuration shall be already completed but it is not mandatory 7 3 2 Serial Connection Test Procedure STEP ACTION 1 Write the following command in the bottom of the right window which has appeared once you have been connected RTRV HDR CTAG 2 Then if the communication is working correctly you should be prompted with the following answer SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD 3 Redo the same test on the second serial RS 232C connector one is located on the POWER B card and the other on rear side on the Management connector tile Procedure 7 23 Serial Connection Test OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 28 Commissioning 7 3 3 Ethernet
85. THC filtering 7 Note One of the input references must be enabled and selected qualified by the OSA 5548C SSU This active input is used as the Performance Measurement reference once it has been processed by THC filtering OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 178 Operating amp Provisioning 6 12 1 3 Operation The OSA 5548C SSU performs the input signal measurement every second within a period of 3 hours to create a performance measurement set The OSA 5548C can store up to 8 sets of measurements over 24 hours To store and display more measurement results sets we recommend SyncView PLUS remote management software Characteristics Description Value PM resolution Resolution of the measurement the 1 ns smallest unit measured Sampling rate This is the rate of the measurement 1s sampling So each second the system measures the input signal quality Duration of an interval The duration of a PM set As soon as an 3h for the calculation amp input reference is detected as good OK measurement of a PM the measurement process starts for 3 hours set thereafter it restarts a new set and so on until that an alarm or a PM deactivation is detected 6 12 2 Turn on off and resetting PM 6 12 2 1 Turn ON or OFF the PM To turn on the performance measurement function the following TL1 command is required Using TL1 Input Syntax SET PM Z 2 cag Z pmon Example SET PM MYCTAG ON Par
86. THC pair of modules ensures phase alignment between both cards in the instance that an active THC is removed 2 5 6 4 THC Block Diagram 8kHz INT INC 1A gt 8kHz IN2 INC1A 8kHz IN3 INC1A 3 gt 8kHz IN4 INC1A Oscillator SkHz IN1 INC1B 8kHz IN2 INC1B 7 segments 8kHz IN3 INC1B display 8kHz INA INC1B _ lt Input 2 5 SkHz IN1 INC2A interface BE C SkHz IN2 INC2A and 8kHz IN3 INC2A Input Selector 2048kHz THC SGC Ap 2048kHz TH fin Automatic Direct ON Digital T OUT output 2048kHz amplifier 8kHz IN3 INC2B 8kHz IN4 INC2B 2048kHz THC ING Synthesis MADDS 2048kHz REF OU Tp 2048kHz Micro Processor DC DC current limiter OSA 5548C Internal Bus Figure 2 28 Tracking Holdover Card Block Diagram OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 47 2 5 7 Signal Generator Card SGC 2 5 7 1 Physical Layout STATUS E1 Figure 2 29 Signal Generator Card SGC LED Status Product Overview DESCRIPTION RED Solid The card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure RED Flashing Version error ORANGE Solid Card s firmware is being upgraded GREEN Solid Card system is working properly OFF Card is not working at all GREEN Solid E1 generated properly GREEN Flashing Pass through mode RED Solid E1 generation failure RED Flashing No clock s
87. The firmware version is not the same as the rest of the shelf TESTERROR Invalid testing date DEAD The MAC group is not able to communicate SSM state SYS MODE MST EXP INV MST 5548C system mode MST MASTER shelf EXP EXPANSION shelf INV Invalid 6 8 2 Switching Mode The input selection can be set in different modes such as Automatic Manual and it is also possible to force the THC internal Oscillator to operate in Holdover mode Automatic Mode AUTO This mode enables the 5548C to select the line according to priority criteria Example If the line with priority 2 fails the 5548C selects the line with the highest priority when available and not in alarm To configure input priorities please refer to the next section 6 8 3 The SSM mode is also an automatic method to select an E1 line according to a quality level To enable this switching mode please refer to section 6 10 Manual Mode MAN This condition forces the selection of one defined working input line with no alarm Using this selection the user must enter the line required to select with the parameter MAN INPUT within the TL1 command If the selected input line fails the system immediately goes in Automatic mode Forced Holdover Mode FHLDVR This selection mode forces the 5548C to work in holdover The system will not select any input lines and the internal oscillator supplies synchronization source to the shelf OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual
88. This is the card or the card group where INC GPS A GPS B GPS THC you want to reapply the previous A THC B THC MADDS A version MADDS B MADDS SGC A SGC B SGC OUC 1 A OUC 10 B OUC A OUC B OUC MAC A MAC B MAC 1 Not implemented yet OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 198 Commissioning Chapter 7 Commissioning Including Introduction Configuration amp Provisioning Procedures Test and Verification Procedure OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 1 Commissioning This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 72 Commissioning 7 1 Introduction 7 1 1 Overview This chapter contains quick configuration and test procedures in order to set up the OSA 5548C SSU rapidly with fewer details than the previous chapter 7 1 2 Prerequisites Chapter 3 and 4 must be read before following this chapter chapter 6 is an asset to better understanding the configuration protocols described in this chapter 7 1 3 Requirements To make configuration and tests the following material and elements are required For basic tests and configuration The OSA 5548C SSU has already powered up and the MAC card has ended its starting procedure as per described in chapter 5 A computer or laptop with the SyncTerminal or SyncView PLUS software installed A serial NULL MODEM or AT LINK cable with
89. User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 54 Product Overview Ethernet port access directly on TCC NTP Card LED DESCRIPTION Status e RED Solid The card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure e RED Flashing Version error sta e ORANGE Solid Card s firmware is being upgraded gt e GREEN Solid Card system is working properly e OFF Card is not working at all nr Sync NTP SYNC e RED Solid The card system is currently in power ETHERNET up mode wait TOD UTC GPS or server failure e RED Flashing Waiting synchronization TOD UTC GPS received e GREEN Solid NTP worked properly e GREEN flashing TOD UTC GPS lose NTP is waiting locked e ORANGE when the NTP module is being downloaded e GREEN Solid Ethernet cable connected e OFF Ethernet cable disconnected ETHERNET Table 2 9 Time Code Card NTP TCC NTP LED Description Figure 2 34 Time Code Card NTP TCC NTP OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 55 Product Overview 2 5 9 2 Main Features TCC NTP e Stratum 1 NTP server e Configuration by DHCP or Fixed IP e 64 MD5 Message Digest Algorithm e Plug and play installation e Can be inserted in any of the OUC slots e Remotely software upgradeable 2 5 9 3 Operation The NTP card receives a signal from the SGC group and from the GPS group There are two modes e Needs a GPS card and PPS signal from SGC card to power up and to synchronize the UTC time
90. a new one Insert it in the black fuse holder Insert the fuse in its holder socket on the POWER card Screw it doing CW turn rotation Check that the POWER card LED lights in Green If it is not the case measure the power feed Procedure 8 5 Power Card Fuse Replacement OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 47 STEP 10 11 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Single Card Fuse CAUTION e When handling the OSA 5548C SSU unit or spare cards use a grounded wrist strap to avoid ESD Electro Static Discharge e Avoid touching components or connectors e Avoid placing the card on an ungrounded surface e Avoid placing the card on or near insulated elements and or surfaces ACTION Unscrew the two locking screws of the intended card Remove the card carefully with its bail using ESD protection Put the card on an ESD protected surface Pull out the cylindrical fuse located on the erar bottom of the card Measure the fuse resistance with an ohmmeter and check that the value is infinite If the resistance is at 0 zero ohms the fuse is not the cause of the trouble the card might be failed and should be returned to your Oscilloquartz representative for repair If necessary replace the fuse with a new one Insert the fuse in its socket holder Plug the card in its slot A CAUTION Prior to insert the card verify that currently inserted cards have their locking screws well tightened Check that th
91. amp 2048 Mbit s Outputs GPS antenna vr Tracking amp Signal Output Holdover Generator Amplifiers signal g Receiver Figure 2 12 The 5548C with internal GPS cards Figure 2 13 shows a second possibility Here the PRC system consists of an external PRC source typically an atomic Cesium clock and an OSA 5548C SSU possibly with a GPS card Other combinations are also possible e g two external Cesium clocks and two internal GPS cards or an external Cesium clock and an external GPS receivers etc Tracking amp Signal Output External cesium input Card Holdover Generator Amplifiers Clock 2 048 MHz amp 2048 Mbit s Outputs GPS antenna mere Tracking amp Signal Output GPS je signal Holdover Generator Amplifiers Receiver Figure 2 13 The 5548C with an external Cesium clock 2 16 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Product Overview 2 2 3 2 The 5548C as a Synchronization Supply Unit The OSA 5548 SSU configured as shown in Figure 2 14 functions as a true Synchronization Supply Unit in the sense of and compliant with ITU T Recommendation G 812 The SSU terminates up to eight synchronization input signals and selects one of them as the active reference The internal oscillator is normally phase locked to the active reference The Phase Locked Loop removes jitter and wander from the signal and fans out the cleaned up signal to up to 200 output ports If all input signals are lost the
92. as below SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMP LD 7 To edit the name enter the following TL1 command in one single line SET SID CTAG MY5548C Replace MY5548C with the name you want and press enter 3 Then if the configuration has been settled correctly you should be prompted with the following answer The name should be shown instead of MY5548C MY5548C DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD 7 Procedure 7 7 Setting the OSA 5548C SSU Name SID OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 743 Commissioning 7 2 4 2 Setting the Date and Time STEP 1 ACTION Retrieve current Date and Time set in the 5548C shelf RTRV HDR SSL TAG And the answer should be shown as below SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD Enter the following TL1 command in one single line ED DAT CTAG YYYY MM DD HH MM SS HH MM Replace YYYY MM DD by the date Replace HH MM SS by the time on 24 hours Replace HH MM by the UTC offset from 12 00 to 12 00 Example ED DAT MYCTAG 2006 02 18 09 30 00 02 00 Then if the configuration has been settled correctly you should be prompted with the following answer with the date and time you have set SID YYYY MM DD HH MM SS M CTAG COMPLD r Procedure 7 8 Setting the Date and Time OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 14 Commissioning 7 2 4 3 Disabling Empty Unused Slots To avoid receiving alarms e g IMPROPER REMOVAL fr
93. commands Not user selectable For card and shelf upgrade Table 6 6 Ethernet Ports 6 2 5 2 Add Edit or Remove a Port 7 Note OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 20 Operating amp Provisioning It is possible to configure up to 25 Ethernet ports but the maximum of simultaneous sessions number of user connected simultaneously is 32 including the sessions via serial ports Adding a new Ethernet port It is possible to add up to 25 Ethernet ports within the range of 1025 to 9999 Input Syntax ENT PORT aid ctag type A Note The user security account must be configured to authorize the communication through any port Read section 6 3 6 to allow a new port for an user Deleting an Ethernet port To delete an Ethernet port within the range of 1025 to 9999 simply send the following command Input Syntax DLT PORT aid ctag Editing any port Ethernet or RS With the following command you can edit all the existing Ethernet and RS ports Input Syntax ED PORT aid ctag IDLEDELAY idledelay SESSIONS sessions Example ED PORT 8023 MYCTAG IDLEDELAY 10 SESSIONS 5 Idle delay It is possible to add an idle delay to any port The idle delay determines the maximum time after a command allowing the user to stay connected after it until the session connection will close Example If the idle delay is set to 5 minutes after 5 minutes of inactivity the access will automat
94. connect the oscilloscope input to a provisioned Frequency output port and verify the following information OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 36 Commissioning 2048 kHz 50 ppm Pulse shape The signal must conform with the mask Figure 7 2 The value V corresponds to the maximum peak value The value V1 corresponds to the minimum peak value Output Tile CEI connectors or BNC With Sub D connectors or with Remote panel CEI BNC connected with Balun 75Q to 1200 adapter Cable type Asymmetrical Symmetrical Test load impedance 75 ohms 120 ohms voltage Vop voltage Vop An isolated pulse shall be shown as in the following Figure An isolated pulse is defined as a pulse preceded by a bipolar violation followed by a sequence of 3 negatives and 3 positives pulses and ended by a bipolar violation two consecutives intervals at the same value T T T T T T 30 30 30 li 30 30 11 30 pe TG e as V I l E I l E I l E I l E I I 7 2 U STE 1 TTT LL V1 1 li 7 1 li 1 li EE are EE S IB EEE 0 ens Gane A JE j de Jo T i I Tt I i 4 4 4 i 4 Ap Gp tp tp Figure 7 2 Wave shape ata Frequency output port OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 201
95. date time utcoffset Example ED DAT MYCTAG 2006 10 05 10 30 00 8 00 Parameter Default Possible Description name Parameter configurations DATE me 2004 01 01 2099 12 The date in the format of YYYY MM DD 31 TIME 00 00 00 23 59 59 The time in the format of HH MM SS UTCOFFSET 02 00 12 00 12 00 Offset between local time and UTC time in the format of HH MM 6 4 2 2 Using SyncView PLUS Open the Physical or Logical view and go to View gt Local Time Elements Local Time Event Viewer pee Time IA J FF Date amp Time Figure 6 6 SyncView PLUS time and date OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 50 Operating amp Provisioning 6 4 3 55480 Type Information and Inventory 6 4 3 1 5548C Type Information Physically The model number Mod the serial number No and the order reference also called part or article number Order ref can be found on the right side of the shelf and on the 5548C shelf s right ear Mod 5548C No XXX Order ref AOXXXXX Figure 6 7 5548C SSU Physical Type Information Using TL1 Retrieve information about the product using the following command Input Syntax RTRV NETYPE ctag An answer similar to the following should be responded Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD vendor model netype sw Parameter Range Description name VENDOR OSCILLOQUARTZ This is the equipm
96. for asymmetrical E1 input references A 120 75 ohms converter Balun can be installed for the symmetrical option e 2 groups of 4 BNC connectors for asymmetrical Frequency 2 048 5 and 10 MHz input references A 120 75 ohms converter Balun can be installed for the symmetrical option 2 4 3 C INput Cards INC The 5548C SSU E200 can be equipped with 2 groups of up to 2 INC cards Each INC group can be protected when the second card is inserted in the adjacent slot The 2 INC groups allow introducing up to 8 input references in the OSA 5548C SSU Depending on user configuration the input signals can be e 2 048 Mbit s E1 e 2 048 MHz 5 MHz or 10 MHz The INC cards condition and qualify the input references Input Lines They are also able to make phase measurement between the input signal and Tracking amp Holdover Cards THC output signal to provide Maximum Time Interval Error MTIE Time DEViation TDEV and Fractional Frequency Deviation Ym 2 4 4 B GPS Inputs There are 2 GPS inputs connectors to connect two GPS antennas to the 5548C These GPS inputs make the 5548C to get 2 redundant PRS quality references when GPS cards are locked The GPS inputs are considered by the system as a single IL such as described in section A Input Lines 2 4 5 D GPS cards GPS 1 or 2 redundant GPS cards can be installed to condition and qualify the GPS signal coming through the GPS Inputs 2 46 D GNSS cards GPS GLONASS 1 or 2 redund
97. from a PRS to the Freq BNC connector shown on with a 75 ohms asymmetrical coaxial cable Connect the E1 input either directly to the BNC connector for the asymmetrical 75 ohms option or through a 120 75 ohms adapter Balun for the symmetrical 120 ohms option A Note Contact Oscilloquartz or your local representative for ordering BALUN The GPS antenna cable has to be connected on the BNC GPS inputs detailed in 7 Note Refer to section 9 2 for input signal specifications 4 5 1 2 Cabling a Frequency of 2 048 5 or 10 MHz STEP ACTION 1 Select a connector among the 4 BNC Connectors under the label FREQ of Group 1 or Group 2 according to the INC group chosen 2 Use coaxial cable 75 ohms with BNC male termination and connect it into the intended connector 3 Check that the cable is tightened correctly into the BNC connector Procedure 4 4 Cabling a Frequency Input Connector OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 18 Equipment Installation 4 5 1 3 Cabling an E1 Input Connector STEP ACTION 1 Select a connector among the 4 BNC connectors under the label E1 of Group 1 or Group 2 according to the INC group chosen 2 Use a coaxial cable 75 ohms with BNC male termination and connect it into the intended connector Should you have a 120 ohms symmetrical cable use a 120 75 ohm adapter balun 3 Check that the cable is tightened correctly into the BNC connector or onto the BALUN
98. is currently not working properly or may be in failure STATUS RED Flashing Version error ORANGE Solid Card s firmware is being upgraded OFF Card is not working at all IN1 e GREEN Solid The related input signal is qualified and provisioned correctly INE e GREEN Flashing The Input Line is currently in Wait To Restore time IN3 e ORANGE Solid The line is being in MONITORING IN4 mode e RED Solid The input signal is rejected or disqualified by one of the signal validity criteria e RED Flashing The input is rejected due to a performance alarm Figure 2 21 e OFF Input Line unused disabled or INC in stand by INput Card ING TaTable 2 2 INput Card INC LED Description Note e For detailed INC LED status description refer to section 8 2 1 e For ordering Information refer to 0 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 36 Product Overview 2 5 3 2 Main features The INC card is designed to provide the following functions e Input signal processing and provisioning e Input signal distribution to the THC cards or to the SGC cards when the pass through function is enabled e Performance Measurement and reference disqualification when Performance Thresholds are defined e Input signal and card 1 1 protection e Up to 4 inputs processing up to 4x E1 or 4x Frequency such as 2 048 5 and 10 MHz e Wait To Restore WTR time function e Synchronization Status Messaging
99. is prompted OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 31 Operating amp Provisioning STEP ACTION When no connection can be established via RS 232 although there is no connection it is written Connected as the SyncTerminal detects the computer serial port but it is not able to send command Procedure 6 5 SyncTerminal Communication Configuration and Set up 6 2 6 8 Typing TL1 commands 7 Note If the 5548C is being accessed for the first time please refer to the previous sections for connection procedure and parameters There are two ways to send commands from the SyncTerminal To assist the operators who may be unfamiliar with the TL1 command set for the 5548C use these steps described in the following procedure For those familiar with TL1 command set the interface allows operators to type the command line directly into the bottom right area of the terminal screen STEP ACTION 1 The operator can launch the SyncTerminal and proceed to the 5548C connection refer to the section 6 2 2 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 32 Operating amp Provisioning STEP ACTION 2 The operator can select the command to send in the left part of the window as in the following example SyncTerminal Connected on 149 133 41 49 8023 Terminal Edit Tools Window Help 6 OBC SIS S 9 T 0 e Commands List Connected on 149 133 41 49 8023 5548C TL1 Man
100. is written as an alarm abbreviation i e LOS for Loss Of Signal e Location LOCN This parameter indicates the location of alarm If the alarm concerns the card itself the response is called NEAR END NEND and if the alarm occurs on a distant device that is connected to the card it is called FAR END FEND OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 167 Operating amp Provisioning e Direction DIRN This is the direction of the alarm condition which can be Transmitted TRMT Received RCV Both Transmitted and Received BTH or Non Applicable NA e Time period TMPER Accumulation time period for Performances Measurement parameters e Notification Code NTFCNCDE This is the alarm severity associated to the alarm Critical Major Minor or Non Applicable e Service Effect SRVEFF This parameter inform if the service is affected SA or not NSA e Occurrence Date OCRDATE This is the date when the event alarm occurred e Occurrence Time OCRTM This is the time when the event alarm occurred e Condition Description CONDESCR This parameter describes the alarm condition Input Syntax RTRV COND aid ctag condtype locn dirn Example RTRV COND OUC 2 MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMP LO aid ntfcncde condtype srveff ocrdat ocrtm locn dir n tmper conddescr Parameter Possible Defaul
101. made Changed the SSU shelf to change its output quality It can be a reference input switching the input quality has changed or the SSU is in holdover System Mode EQPT N A MAC The rotary switch located on the Turn the rotary switch with a flat Error management tile is not correctly screwdriver to the correct configured position MASTER Not Used EXPANSION 1 EXPANSION 2 EXPANSION 3 5 EXPANSION 4 Reboot EG ar Me default parameters reboot completion Reboot Warm S parameters reboot completion TDEV Alarm PRFTDEV MA 1 INC 2 The TDEV threshold has been Check and measure the stability GPS crossed over by the current of the signal in question Performance Measurement E Date The date when the card has been Unplug and plug in the card and E K E if it doesn t resolve the problem return the card for factory repair Version Error PROGFLT The firmware version installed in Download the correct firmware in the card does not correspond or is outdated compared the rest of the shelf version the card with the command OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 38 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting ACT DNLD after verified that the firmware is in the MAC card Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Condition Cards in Wait To N A INC 1 INC 2 The input line has been recovered No action needed however it is Restore and qualified by the system but will possible to initialize the WT
102. on both POWER A and B cards AN CAUTION Do not exchange POWER A amp POWER B cards in their respective slots This may cause damage and inhibit the correct functioning of the shelf A Note The fuse specification is T 6 3A L 250V 5mm x 20 mm size DC Inputs are isolated from shelf and logic ground In order to ensure correct powering up of the system it is necessary to follow these instructions STEP ACTION 1 The unit should be installed near the socket outlet which must be easily accessible 2 The shelf and if ordered the Remote Panel must be connected to a proper earth a The ground connections of the shelf are made using the studs of the power tiles and the Remote Panel b Connect the OSA 5548C SSU to the earth using cable min 2mm c Verify that no voltage exists between the ground and the shelf using a voltmeter R Recommendation Make this cable as short as possible Remove the fuses located on the POWER A and the POWER B cards front panel Slots A21 amp A37 using a flathead screwdriver They will be reinstalled in the power up procedure in chapter 5 Locate the power tiles on top range of the shelf respectively A107 for POWER A and A101 for POWER B Or on the Remote Panel the left side for OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 12 Equipment Installation STEP ACTION POWER A and right side for POWER B 5 Remove if necessary the transparent plastic protection above the p
103. on the Input tile or on the Remote Panel The first group of 8 Input connectors is linked to INC group 1 and the second group to INC Group 2 e E1 connectors can be cabled with asymmetrical E1 signal 2 048 Mbits at 75 ohms or symmetrical with a 120 75 ohms adapter balun e Freq connectors can be cabled with asymmetrical 2 048 5 amp 10 MHz sine or square wave frequency 75 ohms Note S The Input Connectors to the Input Lines assignments and configurations have to be configured via TL1 commands or via management software Refer to section 6 5 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 16 E1 FREQUENCY Kode FREQ AAO O OOO T LC G _ A 1 2 S 3 4 2 3 4 AR ANTENNA oN 0 Figure 4 13 Input Tile on 5548C shelf INPUT GR 2 GPS Equipment Installation Figure 4 14 Input Tile on Remote Panel E1 FREQUENCY a INPUTS FREQ i O ANTENNA A TEE Q GPS 1 GPS 2 a ATA x S GPS S 4 GROUP 2 3 gt Antenna GPS 2 Input Group 1 Input Group 2 GPS GPS B INC 1A INC 1B INC 2 A INC 2 B Antenna GPS 1 Input type to Input type to connector connector E1 1 E1 1 E1 2 E1 2 E1 3 E1 3 E1 4 E1 4 FREQ 1 FREQ 1 FREQ 2 FREQ 2 FREQ 3 FREQ 3 FREQ 4 FREQ 4 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 17 Equipment Installation 4 5 1 1 Introduction to Cable Input Ports Connect the frequency inputs i e
104. operation Condition Cards in Reference KE N A SGC The SGC card has detected that No action needed If this Passthrough the INC card provides the signal behavior was not expected directly to itself without passing control and check the through the THC cards The shelf configuration and status of the is SO in pass through mode THC cards Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Reference REFA N A SGC The SGC card has detected that No action needed except if a THC A the signal fed to itself is provided failure has been detected in by the THC A card THC B If you prefer to get the THC B active simply send the command SW Dx Reference REFB N A SGC The SGC card has detected that No action needed except if a THC B the signal fed to itself is provided failure has been detected in by the THC B card THC A If you prefer to get the THC A active simply send the command SW Dx download end of the download MN INC 1 INC 2 When unknown SSM value is Check the SSM information decoded for more than 10 carried in the DS1 input seconds once valid SSM value has already been read SSM IQL SSMIQL N A INC 1 INC 2 The input SSM quality has No action needed Check the Changed GPS changed SSM sent to the input in question reference in question OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 37 Po Cards in Description OQL KLE N A THC The output quality has changed Retrieve which event has
105. or TSG Synchronization Traceability Unknown An abbreviated form of 1544 kbit s also called DS1 Time Code Card Network Time Protocol or TCC NTP card Transmission Control Protocol Internet protocol Time DEViation Square root of TVAR expressed in nano seconds Tracking amp Holdover Card Target Identifier Time Slot 0 Time Interval Error Variation in time delay of a given timing signal with respect to an ideal timing signals over a particular time period Time interval error over an observation time S seconds Two wires required for a connection positive amp negative Transaction Language 1 Transit Node traCeable Timing Signal Generator also called BITS SSU or SASE TVAR Ul UL UTC WAN Wander WTR XO Ym Glossary Measure of the expected time variation of signal as a function of integration time See also TDEV Unit Interval Underwriter s Laboratories Inc Universal Time Coordinated Wide Area Network Long term non cumulative variations of the significant instants of a digital signal form their ideal positions in time expressed in seconds or in Ul unit interval Wait To Restore time function Crystal X tal Oscillator Fractional Frequency Deviation normalised instantaneous offset from a reference in function of time OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 IV Document History Project N Document Type Version Author Revision Last Up date Creation REVI
106. or not If the alarm event is stored in the history log by default or by user configuration Note For the complete list of all available alarms and events please refer to Error Reference source not found OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 158 Operating amp Provisioning 6 11 1 Buzzer Alarm Cutoff ACO and MAC State The MAC cards slots A17 and A36 have various LEDs on their front panel This section concentrates on Alarm levels and cutoff function STATUS mst OG Rut OG ExP usc cr Alarm level CR CRITICAL MJ MAJOR MN MINOR Alarm cutoff ACO ALARM CUT OFF ACO switch CUT OFF current active alarms 6 11 1 1 Retrieving MAC Configuration and State To retrieve the current MAC configuration and status the following command is required Input Syntax RIRV EOPI MACS eg The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M otag COMPLD opstate BUZZER buzzer ALMESC almesc ACO aco SYS_MODE sys_mode EXP_NR exp_nr OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 159 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters OPSTATE OK ALARM OK There are nine different MAC group DEGRADED states TESTERROR OK The card is running correctly ALARM The card is in alarm DEGRADED The firmware version is not the same as the rest of the shelf TESTERROR Invalid testing date BUZZER
107. ordering Information refer to 0 2 5 8 2 Main features The OUC card is designed to provide the following functions e Selection of the output signal to be distributed according to the user configuration e Distribution of 2 048 MHz frequency ITU T G 703 13 and or E1 signal ITU T G 703 9 to 20 output ports e Card and output 1 1 protection e Distribute the SSM generated by the SGC cards e Manual output squelching e Output circuit short detection e Remotely software upgradeable 2 5 8 3 Operation The user can insert one or two OUC cards in each of the OUC groups depending on protection requirements When two OUC cards are installed both are active The OUC card receives a signal from the SGC group The signal types delivered on the 20 outputs is defined by the user configuration The user has a choice of 3 output configurations per group of 10 outputs e E1 with user configuration no 1 e E1 with user configuration no 2 e 2 048 MHz frequency according to ITU T G 703 13 The output ports can be configured to show alarm when outputs are shorted OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 52 Product Overview 2 5 8 4 OUC Block Diagram CODE 1 SGC A Squelch Ctrl CODE 2 SGC A FREQ SGC A AGC Input 4 k SIGNAL SGC CODE 1 SGC B Interface SELECT SELECT CODE 2 SGC B Squelch funtion OUT 1 gt P gt FREQ SGC B Squelch Ctrl Squelch funtion OUT_10
108. specifications Label LAN comm Type RJ 45 Cable type 100 Base T Category 5 OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM POKER B EXPANSION M POWER A m m mq LINK A GROUP 1 nm igi IKA LINKE oL TPUTS ASYM sneg n Jaaa E lt 3 we e Ba lt S S INPUTS 6 n l EG L UA S o Lu ee e 0 gg PB I L B 9 k oe at OUT 1 10 SYM 4 3 4 TE DC 6 3A oe 2 9 7 12 AR AR R oe Sree an oe of 2 BIOSCILLOQUARTZ 2 2 T gg PB Ne eal er BjosciLLOQUARTZ gt a E o fo um r 8 13 ge 14 9 B AN pe 10 15 pe i LOCAL ALARM OUT COMM GROUP 1 i AAAS i aga ANTENNA GROUP 1 O 6 i i fo 2o o o 70 60v GPS 1 GPS 2 0 G DC 6 3A j j fo Da 1 3 Do h 20 2 ALARM DUT 2 2 GROUP 2 at j I Figure 4 28
109. systems e The input signals qualification Part A B C and D e The signal reference selection tracking filtering and holdover capability Part E e The signal generation Part F e The output signal amplification and distribution Part G and H e The power distribution Part I e The communication and alarm management Part J Cr a ee 666666666 e 6666666666666 gm 6666666666666 66 6666666666666 6666666666666 66666666 6666666666666 ee eee 66666666 6666 6666666866666666 666666 66666 mE 66666666 s Tracking amp Holdover Card THC Signal Input HN Generator Selection r Card SGC or nen eee ic anne nennnnoteenennee GPS Antennas 9 T Card Up to 10 slots on SSU E 200 B Pass through functionality 48 VDC A P ower distribution to all modules 3 C a D Fre i 48 VDC B Power distribution to all modules i NTP SNTP server ffl 1 1 protection possible Figure 2 18 System Description Diagram 2 4 2 A Input Lines IL OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 25 Product Overview The IL are the link between input connectors INput Cards INC and Tracking amp Holdover Cards THC A total of 8 IL can be assigned by software command to the 8 available input connectors e 2 groups of 4 BNC connectors
110. the Threshold selected om er ml WAI f ORC pp Frequency signal Check the signal in question e The frequency is not recongnised by the system e Delta f f gt 50ppm OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 35 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Po Cards in Description KE MJ OUC SGC A failure has been detected on an Failure output line OL Shorted ea eer as shorted connectors Output SQLCH m T The output line OL is squelched No action needed To unsquelch Squelched the port simply deactivate it with the command ED EQPT OL Performance a 1 GPS A failure of Performance Control and measure the wander Failure Measurement has been detected of the signal in question Power Failure PWR PWR A A power failure has been detected Measure the power on the PWR B power connectors Check the fuse embedded in the POWER card in question Return the card for repair if the above action could not determine the cause of failure Redundancy EQPT CR The card group is in failure Check the status of the cards Failure Initialize the cards in question Pull it out and reinsert it If the above action did not clear this alarm return the card for repair OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 36 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Verify the output signal Check the OUC configuration and operation Check the SGC configuration and operation Check the THC configuration and
111. the critical alarm is reported after sending the following command RTRV ALM ALL CTAG Procedure 7 32 Critical Alarm CR Test 7 3 10 Testing Output Ports 7 3 10 1 Testing E1 Output An oscilloscope with a test load impedance of 75 Q 5 or 120 Q 5 depending on the Output tile is necessary to execute the following test Then connect the oscilloscope input to a provisioned output E1 port and verify the following information Output Tile CEI connectors or BNC With Sub D connectors Remote panel or with CEI BNC connected with Balun 75Q to 1200Q adapter Cable type Asymmetrical Symmetrical Test load impedance 75 ohms 120 ohms Nominal peak voltage of a 2 3 V 3V pulse Unit Interval Ul width 488 28 ns Ratio of the eee of positive and negative pulses 0 95 to 1 05 at the centre of the pulse interval Ratio of the widths of positive and negative pulses at the 0 95 to 1 05 nominal half amplitude Pulse shape Rectangular An isolated pulse shall fit the template shown in the Figure 7 1 E1 Pulse Template The negative pulse is the upside down representation of the following Figure OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 35 Commissioning Template 32 O LO Nominal Pulse E O LO 7 3 10 2 Testing Frequency Output An oscilloscope with a test load impedance of 75 Q 5 or 120 Q 5 depending on the Output Tile is necessary to test a Frequency Output Line Then
112. the response is called NEAR END NEND and if the alarm occurs on a distant device that is connected to the card it is called FAR END FEND e Direction DIRN This is the direction of the alarm condition which can be Transmitted TRMT Received RCV Both Transmitted and Received BTH or Non Applicable NA e Time period TMPER Accumulation time period for Performance Measurement parameters OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 164 Operating amp Provisioning e Occurrence Date OCRDATE This is the date when the event alarm occurred e Occurrence Time OCRTM This is the time when the event alarm occurred e Condition Description CONDESCR This parameter describes the alarm condition in up to 64 characters e Detailed information of the element AIDET Detailed and supplementary information of the card or element of details of the current alarm to identify the location of the reported trouble e Observed Behavior OBSDBHVR This concerns the behavior observed resulting from the trouble reported by this alarm It is limited to 512 characters e Expected Behavior EXPTBHVR This concerns the behavior expected Its deviation is described in the observed behavior that resulted in this reported trouble It is limited to 512 characters e Diagnostic Type DGNTYPE Type of the diagnostic routine used to isolate the trouble e Trouble Isolation TBISLT Significance of the isolation info
113. used to transport synchronization to the other end There a passive timing extractor redirects a small part of the signal power to the SSU Digital Digital Switch Switch OSA 5548C SSU Figure 2 10 Synchronization transfer in PDH OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Product Overview Figure 2 11 shows the case of SDH SONET over WDM DWDM or CWDM WDM networks are more or less transparent for the timing of the STM n or OC n signals Therefore it is possible to use the STM n or OC n signals as synchronization carriers The SSU s inputs are connected to the SDH SONET network element exactly like in the pure SDH SONET case Mux E1 SDH Digital Switch Digital Switch p OSA 5548C SSU Figure 2 11 Synchronization transfer in WDM OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 15 Product Overview 2 2 3 Use Cases 2 2 3 1 The 5548C as a Primary Reference Clock The OSA 5548C SSU can be used as a Primary Reference Clock PRC in several ways The first way is to equip the 5548C with one or two GPS cards as shown in Figure 2 12 The second GPS card is optional and serves to improve reliability With this configuration the 5548C is a self contained PRC which complies with ITU T Recommendation G 811 when locked to GPS GPS antenna merma Tracking amp Signal Output GPS H signal Holdover Generator Amplifiers Receiver 2 048 MHZ
114. with a phase jump as the THC will not be there to filter and insure phase alignment Note Ss For more details and configuration refer to section 6 8 5 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 22 Product Overview 2 3 9 Performance Measurement The OSA 5548C SSU monitors measures and calculates performances in Ym fractional frequency TDEV Time DEViation and MTIE Maximum Time Interval Error of every single input signal connected to its inputs as well as the GPS input line The measurement is performed in the INC cards which compare the input signal against a reliable frequency reference produced by the signal filtered and processed by the active THC card The performance measurement is processed when the input line meets one of the following criteria e Enabled the line is activated to select an input reference e Monitored the input line is only measured in order to assess the signal Source SSU 107 1 00E 007 MTIE S e 13 10 2006 09 52 12_SSU_107_IL 1 3 G 823 Network limit for wander at PRC interfaces MTIE 13 10 2006 09 52 12 SSU 107 IL 1 2 SS RET 13 10 2006 09 52 12 SSU 107 IL 1 4 TAU S The user can also define a performance threshold to disqualify and reject input signals that fail to meet this programmable threshold OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 23 Product Overview 2 3 10 Re
115. 0 0110 0100 0110 0100 0110 0100 0110 0100 0110 0100 0110 0100 0110 0100 0110 0100 0110 0100 0110 0100 0110 IWWWWWWWWWWW NN 1 1 VINNSSRSSSSESENNS BRR 15 01 2007 11 32 33 Nextpollingon 15 01 2007 23 32 33 Figure 6 9 SyncView Inventory Via the File menu the user can fre e save the inventory as a XML file Save As e print the inventory Page setup The inventory is gathered once a day The user Print Ctrl P can force a new synchronization of the Inventory T of the shelf with the SyncView Database using the Se Inventory button Close Cirl F4 THC B Ag A013973 MADD5 A A A014283 A Note The user can select the inventory list on and then copy with CTRL C and paste in any document with CTRL V OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 54 Operating amp Provisioning 6 4 4 Checking the Card Operation States There are 10 different states for each card or more precisely slots in the 5548C shelf as below EMPTY The card slot is empty This is not considered as an alarm Remedial action Nothing except inserting a card in the slot EXTRACTED The card has been extracted from its respective slot This is considered as an alarm Remedial action Reinserting the card in the slot or deleting the card with command shown in section 6 4 5 INIT The card firmware is being restarted Remedial action Wait for the completion of initialization DOWNLOAD The car
116. 0 dat TL15240T1 dat Mu Documents Mu Computer a File name TL148CS5U dat My Network Files of type Command description files v Cancel Places Open as read only 7 Then press OK OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 30 Operating amp Provisioning STEP ACTION 8 1 For prerequisites for local serial RS 232 connection refer to section 6 2 3 and for remote Ethernet connection refer to section 6 2 4 Sync Terminal Press the Connect button Terminal Edit Tools Window For Local RS232 connection Compatibility RMU ESM AGE Click on the tab named RS 232 and G 3600 OG 19200 select your computer s serial port it is needed to use COM1 or COM2 to access the OSA 5548C Other parameters are automatically configured Comma zjx For Remote Ethernet connection TCPAP AS 232 IP Address Pott Protocol K AE em en Before attempting to access the 5548C shelf the first time remotely it is required configure its network parameters via local RS 232 management Go into the first tab labeled TCP IP and enter the IP address configured in the shelf and the corresponding port 10 Then click OK When the connection has been correctly established a new window should appear on the right part of the SyncTerminal window interface When no connection can be established via TCP IP a message Connection failed
117. 1 Altitude 314 m Fixed Position Degree Min Fraction of minute Latitude N lb h qf Degree Min Fraction of minute Longitude E fo ap ar 4 og L d 10 Altitude Position of GPS Antenna location 6 6 3 3 Retrieving Visible and Tracked Satellites Using TL1 To retrieve the number of available visible and tracked satellites send the following command Input Syntax KRIRV EOPI GPS GL Example RTRV EQPT GPS MYCTAG OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 91 Operating amp Provisioning The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD opstate ssm PPS OFFSET pps offset ADM STATE adm state INDOOR indoor ELEVATION elevation FRCD frecd VISIBLE visible TRACKED tracked r To retrieve the list of Visible satellites send the following command Input Syntax RTRV EQPT VSAT aid ctag Example RTRV EQPT VSAT L MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sig date time M etag COMP LD aid SAT_ID sat_id ELEVATION elevation BEARING bearing SNR snr HEALTH health To retrieve the list of Tracked satellites send the following command Input Syntax RTRV EQPT TSAT aid ctag Example RIRV EQPT TSAT 1 MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M otag COMPLD aid SAT ID sat id r OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K
118. 10 3 Operation The PTP card receives its timing reference from the SGC and GPS groups Both types of cards must be present in the shelf for the TCC PTP to run properly If no GPS card is present if it has never been tracked the TOD Not detected alarm is raised If the timing reference provided by the GPS card is lost but the TCC PTP was previously locked to it the Loss of TOD alarm is raised If all the SGC boards fail or are extracted the PPS Loss alarm is raised OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 59 Product Overview 2 5 10 4 PTP Load sharing with the TCC PTP In a UNICAST based network the slaves in a given domain may loose the connection to their master because of a failure in the network or in the master itself If they are configured to use the UNICAST message negotiation that is if they have a list of master in their Acceptable Master Table they will try to switch to a redundant master in the same domain if available The new elected Grandmaster will then receive UNICAST message negotiation from many slaves and could possibly not being able to deal with all of them It is then good practice to share this additional set of slave across a given number of masters and to leave processing resources in case of a fault The following diagram describes the load sharing mechanism TCC PTP LOAD SHARING TCC PTP TCC PTP TCC PTP 1A 2A 3A L Ja J E E E EE E TEESE E S E E E 1 1 1 1 1 8
119. 10E 3 10E 2 e CRC 4 according to G 706 and according to user defined threshold 10E 4 10E 3 10E 2 BiPolar Violation BPV if code is AMI or Code Violation CV if code is HDB3 according to G 706 and according to user defined threshold 10E 4 10E 3 10E 2 e SSM failed when the SSM code is unknown after 10s MTIE TDEV and YM Performance Threshold BNC 50 Q female FREQ 1 to 4 Up to 8 providing 8x FREQ inputs 1 1 protected Up to 4 INput Cards INC providing 2 groups in 1 1 protection when all INput Cards INC are installed 2 048 5 or 10 MHz 50 ppm automatic detection e Sinusoidal or Square min 0 4 Vrms Sinus max 2 Vrms Sinus max 5 VDD Square 2 15dB 7504 10 Loss Of Signal LOS Out Of Limit OOL when f f gt 50ppm BNC 50 Q female GPS 1 amp GPS 2 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 4 Ports Configuration Antenna Specifications Maximum 2 providing 1x GPS inputs 1 1 protected when both GPS cards are installed Up to 2 GPS Cards providing 1 1 protection Active L1 antenna 1575 42 MHz Table 9 2 Input Specifications 9 3 Tracking amp Holdover Tracking amp Holdover Type Configuration Best performance Holdover Tracking and Holdover Card THC incorporating Direct Digital Synthesis DDS Up to 2 THC cards for 1 1 protection Exceeds G 811 reference with embedded GPS or
120. 2 048E 06 during 1s is higher or equal than the selected Threshold 6 5 8 Wait To Restore Time WTR WTR time is an interval of delay in the acceptance of an input once it has been restored This function is useful to avoid intermittent hysterysis switching affecting the 5548C clock stability WTR interval is selectable from Disabled to 12 minutes The following is an example with two input lines E1 a and E1 b set with a WTR time The E1 a line is set with the highest priority E1 a with 1st priority To the 5548C l E1 b with 2nd priority E1 a with 1st priority C To the 5548C EE HE R E1 b with 2nd priority Rom E1 a with 1st priority D To the 5548C E1 b with 2nd priority OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 1 Steady state Both E1 a amp b are currently working correctly The E1 a is selected by the 5548C as it has the highest priority 2 Sudden line failure Suddenly the E1 a line is broken for an unknown reason The 5548C has selected the E1 b line in consequence 3 Wait To Restore time After a while the E1 a line has been recovered But the 5548C waits for the WTR time to elapse before re establishing the line 6 80 E1 a with 1st priority d To the 5548C e E1 b with 2nd priority Note mar Operating amp Provisioning 4 Line restoring Once the WTR time has elapsed the 5548C reselects the E1 a line as 1 priority
121. 2 17 RS 232 Local COMM Port Connector Description esse eee ee eee 2 72 Table 2 18 Ext Alarm Inputs Connector Description rrrarvnrerurvnrernrvnvernrrnnnnerruennvernrvnnennennnenene 2 72 Table 2 19 Master amp Expansion Selection eee ee 2 74 Table 2 20 TCC NTP Ethernet COMM Port Connector Description arrrarrrnrrnnrrnnrrnnrrnnrrnnenner 2 81 Tapie 2 21 SSM LEVES eero e A E E OEE E eE S ERE OSEE 2 87 Table 4 1 Reference between OUC cards and Output tiles r rrrnrnnnrrnnrnnneranennnennrrnnnnnernnnennnnr 4 21 Table 4 2 SUB D 9 Pole pin description rrrnrrrarenareraneranerarnrernnennanennnevaneranenannnennnernunenunenunennnen 4 27 Table 4 3 Serial AT LINK Cable PIN assignment Local Comm e eee ee 4 36 Table 4 4 Installation Check LIS eee 4 38 Table 5 1 Power Card Turn up Status eee ee eee 5 5 Tabl e 5 2 MAC NN ee 5 6 Table 5 3 Input Card Turn up Status eee eee eee 5 7 Table 5 4 Input Card Turn up Status eee eee eee 5 8 Table 5 5 Tracking Holdover Card Turn up Status eee eee eee 5 10 Table 5 6 Signal Generator Card Turn up Status ee ee eee 5 11 Table 5 7 Output Card Turn up Status esse eee e 5 12 Table 6 1 TL1 Command Format Types rrrarrrnnrrranrrnnnrrnnrnranrnanrnnnnnnanrnnnnnnnnnnnanennnrnnunnnanennnnennnne 6 5 Table 6 2 TL1 Command Block Verbs sese eee ee 6 6 Table 6 3 Card Names amp Abbreviations within TL 6 11 Table 6 4 Ethernet Parameters arrrornarrnnrranrnnrnarnnnrn
122. 2 7 37 Commissioning 7 3 10 3 Testing NTP Output STEP 1 2 3 4 ACTION Server card Set up the server card network parameters refer to section 7 2 2 5 Change your computer time Use a program to synchronize the computer time to the NTP server card stratum 1 Yats 32 Verify the synchronization Procedure 7 33 NTP Output Test 7 3 10 4 Testing PTP Output STEP 1 2 ACTION Server card Set up the Ethernet parameters for PTP output IP address mask gateway Configure the same PTP domain in the TCC PTP Grandmaster and in the slave ie OSA 5320 Configure the TCC PTP addressing mode respectively as MIXED or UNICAS Configure the slave addressing mode respectively as MULTICAST or UNICAS Only for UNICAST Enter the PTP IP address of TCC PTP used in the Acceptable Master Table AMT of the slave ACCEPTABLE MASTER TABLE CONFIGURATION Unicast Delay Modes master s address IEEE EUI 64 port ID PTP Port priority priority request XXX XXX XXX XXX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX number 1 2 unicast Announce 1 149 133 40 191 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 65535 10 10 YES 2 149133 40 159 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 65535 90 90 YES 3 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 NO Verify that one master is visible in the slave PTP Status page and that the Master address corresponds to the one previously configured PTP OVER Masters Visible 1 Master Address 149 133 40 159 a T tnta Ci LOL Mp M L M ml Procedure 7 x P
123. 2 Ethernet Configuration sse eee ee e eee ee ee 7 5 Procedure 7 3 Verifying the Ethernet Configuration esse e eee ee ee e eee 7 6 Procedure 7 4 Ethernet Connection cccccceecceecceecceeceneeeneeeneceeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeeeseeteeeteeeseeeseeenaess 7 7 Procedure 7 5 NTP Connection sse ee eee eee 7 10 Procedure 7 6 Firmware Upgrade sss sese eee eee 7 12 Procedure 7 7 Setting the OSA 5548C SSU Name SID 7 13 Procedure 7 8 Setting the Date and Time eee ee 7 14 Procedure 7 9 Disabling Empty unused Slots sese eee 7 15 Procedure 7 10 E1 Input Line Configuration eee eee ee ee eee 7 16 Procedure 7 11 Frequency Input Line Configuration sss ee eee ee ee ee ee eee eceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeees 7 18 Procedure 7 12 Disabling an Unused Input Line sss sese eee ee eee 7 18 Procedure 7 13 Switching and Selection Mode Configuration sss sese eee e ee 7 19 Procedure 7 14 Input Line Priorities Configuration e esse e eee ee e 7 20 Procedure 7 15 E1 Output Signal Type Connguration css eee ee eee ee e 7 21 Procedure 7 16 Frequency Output Signal Configuration eee eee ee e e e ee 7 22 Procedure 7 17 NTP Output Signal Configuration sse eee ee e eee ee 7 22 Procedure 7 18 Enabling SSM Configuration sse eee e e eee e eee 7 23 Procedure 7 19 Forcing SSM Quality Level on Input Line sss see eee e ee eee e 7 24 Procedure 7 20 Sa bit Configuration on Input eee eee ee e e ee 7 26 Procedure 7 21 Sa bit configuration on Output LING
124. 26 Verifying the Shelf Operation Mode 7 3 6 LEDs Operation Test Procedure Below is a LAMP test procedure to be done physically on the shelf and via software STEP ACTION 1 Push the switch labeled LAMP TEST on the POWER A card and check that e The test lasts about 10 seconds e All LEDs have lit during all the test duration e The bicolor LEDs have been RED during 5 seconds and then GREEN during the remaining 5 seconds 2 Do the same observation after sending the following TL1 command OPR LEDS LTAG Procedure 7 27 LEDs Operation Test OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 31 Commissioning 7 3 7 Input Line Priority Configuration Testing Procedure This procedure tests if the priority configuration and selection works correctly STEP 1 ACTION Check the current priority setting with the following TL1 command RTRV PRLO 434 CTAC The response is formatted such as below SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMP LD IL 1l l 1 9 L 1 2 1 9 IL 1 3 1 39 IL 1 4 1 49 IL 2 1 Lv s9 1L 2 2 1 9 1L 2 3 1 9 LL 2 4 L s 9 GPS Lus9 Take note of the current priority configuration Disable one by one the input line starting from the highest priority to the lowest one with the following command ED EQPT IL IL 1 1 IL 1 2 IL 1 3 IL 1 4 IL 2 1 IL 2 2 IL 2 3 IL 2 4 GPS CTAG ADM_STATE DISABLED After each input line disabled check that the active THC card shows the line number correspondin
125. 4 Alarm and History Flushing OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 40 Commissioning 7 3 11 2 Last Verification If installation and commissioning have been successfully performed you should not see any alarms except those expected i e due to the pre configuration 7 3 11 3 End of Commissioning Check List In order to verify that all the basic points related to the commissioning have been executed please read the following table e o w te The Installation check list in section 4 8 has been duly followed o The serial and or remote communication has been successfully established see section 7 2 2 General configuration has been made with the shelf name the date and the time and empty slots disabled see section 7 2 4 Input lines have been configured ports attribution E1 configuration WTR see section 7 2 5 The o mode has been configured Automatic Manual and priorities see section 7 2 6 The output configuration pe been done E1 configuration options Frequency etc see section 7 2 7 If necessary the SSM configuration has been set see section 7 2 1 3 Both serial and Ethernet connections have been tested see sections 7 3 2 and 7 3 3 hj inventory of the shelf has been checked and eventually noted see section 7 3 4 The shelf operation mode has been checked see section 7 3 5 D The LEDs have been successfully tested with the LAMP TEST function see section 7
126. 47 Input Tile e For detailed Input Connection instructions refer to section 4 5 1 and for GPS antenna refer to section 4 5 1 4 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 75 Product Overview 2 5 18 Input Management amp Power Remote Panel The OSA 5548C SSU E200 can be optionally delivered with an Input Management amp Power Remote Panel when front connectors are required The remote panel is connected to the rear Power Input and Management tiles 533 mm ETSI or 483 mm 19 a om om 87mm BJOSCILLOQUARTZ mH OA Input Power A eae Power B GPS Management Antenna Note L The connectors on this panel are the same as on the Power Input and Management tiles Refer to previous sections for Pin Out description OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 76 Product Overview 2 5 19 OUTPUT Tiles The OSA 5548C SSU unit can be delivered with different types of output tile sets e Output tile with 20x Symmetrical outputs e Output tile with 20x Asymmetrical outputs e Output tile with 20x Asymmetrical outputs for Remote panel Each Output Tile has 2 Output Groups OG of 10 Outputs Lines OL OG 1 supplies OL 1 to 10 and OG 2 supplies OL 11 to 20 20x ASYMMETRICAL 20x SYMMETRICAL 20x IDC connectors OUTPUTS SYM O OG lt O lt OUT 1 10 SYM O O lt 3 8 FF 13 18 OD gt DO
127. 5 Send Command Window or Command Tree Menu A command tree list for each type of equipment appears automatically after user configuration To sort use the corresponding button under the list Commands List O Security 0 Communication Equipment 4 0 GPs ED EGPT GPS EDit EQuiPmenT GFS RTRY EQPT GPS ReTRieve EQuiPmenT GPS RTRYV EOPT GPSC ReTRieve EQuiFmenT GPS Card ED EQPT FPOS EDit EQuiPmenT Fixed Position RTRY EQPT FPOS ReTRieve EQuiPmenT Fixes POSition RTRY EQPT POS ReTRieve EQuiPmenT POSition RTRV EQPT TS4T ReTRieve EQuiPmenT Tracked S4Tellites RTRY EOPT VSAT ReTRieve EQuiPmentT Visible 547Tellites RTRY EQPT GPSTIME ReTRieve EQuiFmenT GPS TIME TCC ED EQPT TOC EDit EQuiPmenT TOC card configuration RTRY EQPT TOC ReTReive EQuiPmenT TOC card configuration RTRY EQPT TIkMY ReTRieve EQuiPmenT Tou IN ventory RTRV EQPT TOP ReTRieve EQuiPmenT Tou OPerational state ED EGPT CMOD EDit EQuiFmenT Client Mode RTRV EQPT CMOD ReTRieve EQuiPmenT Client MODe ED EQPT SUTH EDit EQuiPmenT AUTHentication RTRV EOPT AUTH ReTRieve EQuiPmenT AUTHentication ED EGPT KETY EDit EQuiPmenT KEY RTRY EQFT EEYS ReTRieve EQuiPmenT KEYS ED EGFT FTP EDit EQuiPmenT FTP System INIT SYS INITialize SYStem SET 5ID SET Source IDentifier RTRY HDR ReTRieve Heabet RTRV METYPE ReTRieve Network Element TYPE ED INW 5 5 EDit Inventory information of the SyStem RTRY INV SYS ReTRieve IMventory information of the SYStem ED DAT EDit DATe RTRV DAT ReTRieve D4Te and time RTRY
128. 50 Figure 6 7 5548C SSU Physical Type Information sse eee eee eee 6 51 Figure 6 8 Article Number amp Card Type Location sese ee eee 6 52 Figure 6 9 SyncView Inventor eee e eee ee ee 6 54 Figure 6 10 Physical Lamp OS ee 6 61 Figure 6 11 Input Connector Assignment sese eee eee e e 6 64 Figure 6 12 SyncView Input Configuration Window rrrrarrnnnrnnaranrnnnvarennnrrnanennnnnnnnennennnnnennnenn 6 69 Figure 6 13 SyncView Input Type configuration Window sese eee eee ee ee ee 6 72 Figure 6 14 SyncView WTR Ime sese eee e e ee 6 82 Figure 6 15 SyncView THC Details see eee 6 114 Figure 6 16 SyncView Priority Setting se eee eee ee eee e ee 6 117 Figure 6 17 Pass through Mode sese eee eee 6 119 Figure 6 18 SGC and OUC Operation sees 6 121 Figure 6 19 Output Cards and Tiles Location 0c eee 6 122 Figure 6 20 Default MTIE Threshold rrrnrrnrnnennnrrnannnanrnnnnrnnnrnnanennnrnnannnanennnnennnennanennnennnnennee 6 185 Figure 6 21 Default TDEV Threshold ranrnnnnnnnnnnnanennnnnnnnnnanrnnnnennnrnnnnnnanennannnanennnsnnnnennnnennee 6 186 Figure 6 22 Default Ym Threshold rarrranrrnnrrrnnrnnnrrnnnenrannnnnrnnnnrnnnrnnnsnnanennannnanennnsnnnsennnennnne 6 187 Figure 6 23 Firmware Download Overview sese ee e eee e 6 189 FET E1 HHL 7 36 Figure 7 2 Wave shape at a Frequency output port eee eee e 7 37 Figure 7 3 PTP set up testing vn 1 39 Figure 8 1 Input
129. 6 SA7 sa7 SA8 sa8 IDLE idle Example ED EQPT SGE El 1 MYCTAG gt CODE HDB3 CRC4 ON TS16 CAS SA4 SSM SA5 ON SA6 ON SA7 ON SA8 ON IDLE 255 Parameter Possible Default a This is the configuration E1 1 is Le configuration nr 1 and E1 2 the nr 2 CODE HDB3 AMI HDB3 E1 code CRC4 OFF ON CRC 4 generation TS16 CCS CAS Time Slot 16 structure ETT Sad bi ON the Sa Bi OFF ON SSM Sad bit ee OFF ON SSM 5a6 bit SSM Configure the TANT Sar bi arh IDLE 0 255 Idle code of Time Slots TS 1 to 15 and 17 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 131 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt SGC gt Details Time Slot 16 Code E1 1 Ts 16 E1 1 Code E1 2 Ts 16 E1 2 AMI CAS AMI CAS HDB3 8 ccs HDER CCS E1 codes Sa Bits for E1 1 Sa Bits for E1 2 Sad Sa4 Sa5 Sa Bits Idle Code CRC4 E1 1 Idle Code CRC4 E1 2 CRC 4 Idle Code Idle Code Generation mere ae Idle code e ok Canel Apply Refresh 4 4 E1 configuration nr 1 E1 configuration nr 2 Possipie Parameter name configurations Description e OFF one sei SAG TL OFF ON SSM Sa6 bit _ SSM Configure the Sa bit to carry SAT TOER ON SSM_ Sa7bit_ the SSM EE ETE ETA Idle code of Time Slots TS 1 to 15 and 17 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 132 Operating amp Provision
130. 6 Single Card Fuse Replacement eee eee ee ee ee 8 48 Procedure 8 7 Repair amp Return rrrarnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnnnannnennnernnernnennnnrnnnenunenunenunenunnnennnenneennnene 8 49 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 XVII List of Procedures This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 XVIII Chapter 1 Introduction Including About this Manual Reading Guide Certification OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Introduction 1 1 Introduction This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 1 2 Introduction 1 1 About this Manual This manual has been designed to provide basic and detailed information for the correct use and operation of the OSA 5548C SSU It summarizes the overall equipment concept and theory of operation describes the hardware itself and provides information related to installation operation and maintenance as well as a description of the TL1 commands available It is intended for the use of the following types of users e Systems Engineers An overview of the equipment concept and theory of operation as well as an ordering guide is provided in Chapter 2 e Installation Engineers Detailed technical information and procedures for correct installation operation configuration and commissioning as well
131. 8 6 1 1 International Oscilloquartz SA Customer Support amp Services 16 Rue de Br vards 2002 Neuch tel 2 SWITZERLAND Tel 41 32 722 5555 Fax 41 32 722 5578 e mail css oscilloquartz com 8 6 2 Sales For sales assistance contact the following 8 6 2 1 International Oscilloquartz SA Sales amp Marketing 16 Rue de Br vards 2002 Neuchatel 2 SWITZERLAND Tel 41 32 722 5555 Fax 41 32 722 5556 e mail osa oscilloquartz com OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 51 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 52 Chapter 9 Specifications Including Communication Input Specification Tracking amp Holdover Performance Measurement PM Power Supply Mechanical General OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Specifications 9 1 Specifications This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 2 9 1 Communication Local communication Serial connectors Labels amp location Baud rate Parity bit Stop bits Flow control Language Remote communication Remote connector Label amp location Language Protocol Communication ports Simultaneous sessions Specifications 2X RS 232C on 9 way D type connector male e LOCAL COMM on the front panel of t
132. 88 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters POINT3 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE 15M For TDEV TDEV 168 For YM YM 15M POINT4 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE 30M For TDEV TDEV 645 For YM YM 1H POINTS 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE 1H For TDEV TDEV 2568 For YM YM 2H POINT6 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE_3H For TDEV TDEV 10008 For YM YM_3H 6 13 Firmware Download 6 13 1 Overview The OSA 5548C SSU incorporates a FTP File Transfer Protocol client which allows upgrading all its cards remotely from a FTP server Firmware files download Local 5548C user Remote 5548C user Figure 6 23 Firmware Download Overview OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 189 Operating amp Provisioning The remote or the local user should configure the FTP server parameters in the 5548C SSU Then the user downloads the firmware files to the OSA 5548C SSU Once the download completed the firmware files are stored in the MAC card Thereafter the user can upgrade any card in the shelf by transferring the firmware from the MAC card to the intended card 6 13 2 Prerequisites 6 13 2 1 FTP Server An FTP server on the OSA 5548C network requires downloading files to the shelf IP address username and password access of that server are required 6 13 2 2 Firmware Files Before gaining FTP server access from within the 5548C the fi
133. 8C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 62 6 5 6 5 1 Operating amp Provisioning Input Line IL Properties amp INput Card ING Configurations Introduction The OSA 5548C has the capability to connect up to 4 Input lines among 8 input connectors 4 for E1 signal and 4 for Frequency There are also 2 connectors to connect up to two GPS antennas to get an additional PRS quality input line when GPS cards are locked on GPS signal The 5548C allows several customizable configurations for each IL and INC Input port s assignment To assign any port connector to an input line Enabling Disabling or Monitoring a line To enable a new line to disable a line or to monitor an input signal without allowing the OSA 5548C to select it Configuring a line as terminated or bridged To select the type of hardware connection E1 signal configuration To configure the E1 signal corresponding to the signal fed Adding a restore delay once a line is detected as valid To delay the premature selection of an input source that is in the process of recovery OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 63 6 5 2 Operating amp Provisioning Input connector to Input Line IL description The OSA 5548C allows configuration of up to 5 inputs from two groups of 4 inputs plus 1 input from any of the GPS input ports INC 1 A A1 INC 1 B A2 IL 1 1 1 1L 1 2 2
134. 9 N TTE 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 5 5 4 5 5 8 E ms n ETP Link see eee secondary PTP link Figure 2 37 LOAD SHARING TCC PTP OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 60 2 5 11 MAnagement Card MAC 2 5 11 1 Physical Layout AOxxxx STATUS I MST I rur ig EXP Alarm Cut Off pushbutton L oe w wy L MAnagement Card MAC A Note LED Status MST RMT EXP USC CR MJ MIN ACO Product Overview DESCRIPTION RED Solid The card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure RED Flashing Version error ORANGE Solid Card s firmware is being upgraded GREEN Solid Card system is working properly OFF Card is not working at all GREEN Solid Indicates that this is a MASTER shelf This LED is unused in the OSA 5548C SSU version GREEN Solid Indicates that this is a EXPANSION shelf YELLOW Solid Indicates that at least one user is logged RED Solid Indicates that there is at least one alarm with a CRITICAL severity ORANGE Solid Indicates that there is at least one alarm with a MAJOR severity YELLOW Solid Indicates that there is at least one alarm with a MINOR severity RED Solid Indicates that at least one alarm has been cut off Table 2 11 MAnagement Card MAC LED Description For detailed MAC LED status description refer to section 8 2 1 For ordering Information refer to 0 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual
135. A 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 67 Product Overview 2 5 14 Connector Tile Description The connector tiles have almost the same architecture such as shown in the figure below OUTPUTS ASYK e e LOCKING SCREWS Figure 2 42 Connector Tile Description LOCKING SCREWS 4 screws are used to fix the tile onto the shelf OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 68 Product Overview 2 5 15 POWER Connectors Tile Power supply connectors for POWER A amp B cards are located on two separate POWER connectors tiles A107 for POWER A and A101 for POWER B Each one includes two grounding studs VDC RETURN VDC BATT N okee HH 3 h POWER GROUND GND N 2 grounding studs GND Figure 2 43 Power Connector Tile A Note e For detailed Connection instructions refer to section 4 4 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 69 Product Overview 2 5 16 MANAGEMENT Tile The Management tile provides ports for Local and Remote management to link expansion shelves to connect Internal and External alarms and to supply 1 PPS It is located in position A106 on the rear of the shelf ALARM OUT GROUP 1 EXT ALARM INPUTS Output Alarm Group 1 Link to Expansion shelves ALARM OUT GROUP 2 Q 0 o L Q LS Q L o O L Q o 02000090000206006 00000004 000600069 00000000 0906006 Output Alarm Gro
136. A 5548C SSU capable to supply up to 10 NTP ports according to RFC 1305 When locked to GPS the OSA 5548C acts as a precise Stratum 1 server 2 3 6 Re timing The Retiming Unit system synchronises a traffic signal based upon the synchronisation signal from the OSA 5548C SSU Each channel in the RTU has a re timing buffer holding two traffic frames 2 3 7 Synchronization Status Messaging SSM In addition to the timing the E1 lines can carry Synchronization Status Messages SSM which is embedded information about the frequency quality level allowing any SSM compatible network element NE to select the best frequency quality according to the sync source The SSM status transfers synchronization quality from the active input or source toward E1 outputs The SSM byte is encoded on E1 signals The OSA 5548C SSU supports Synchronization Status Messaging SSM on input and output interfaces E1 2 048 Mbit s according to ITU T G 781 second generation SSM norms Here are the different SSM quality levels and states supported by the OSA 5548C SSU Level description Quality Level Abbreviation G 811 Primary Reference Clock G 812 Type or V SSU A G 812 Type IV 3 SSU B 6 813 Equipment Clock Option 14 SEC gt Do Not Use for synchronization 18 DNU gt SSM Failure 12 FALED gt SSM quality unknown UNKNOWN gt The OSA 5548C SSU extracts the SSM information for each E1 input signal The operator can assign the SSM value fo
137. AREER 5 3 5 3 Card Start up Sequences ssss sss sss ss sss ss sees eenn nne 5 5 5 3 1 PWR Power Cald cesena e r aE EE Aae EAEri 5 5 5 3 2 MAC MAnagement Card sese 5 6 e E ING INDU Tee 5 6 5 OPA OGP C 6 E E EEE 5 8 5 3 5 THC Tracking Holdover Card sese 5 9 5 3 6 SGC Signal Generator Card 5 11 3o OUG OUMU G2 0 EEE EEREN 5 12 OPERATING amp PROVISIONING nonnonssannnnnnnnsnunnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnennannnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnn 6 1 6 1 SETE EEE E E A A 6 3 62 MN vv444v45vr5474r7v47444 a E aa ai 6 3 6 2 1 AP 6 3 6 2 2 Establishing Communication with the 5548C SSU ee 6 12 6 2 3 Serial Port Communication eee ee ee ee e e eee 6 12 6 2 4 Ethernet Communication sese eee ee ee e e ee 6 17 6 2 5 Communication PONS uer eend 6 20 6 2 6 Using the SyncTerminal Software e e e 6 23 63 Security Manadement ssccssss sese ss sese ss esse sse ss sese seene 6 39 6 3 1 oh T 6 39 6 3 2 Default Username UID and Password PID sss 6 39 039 LON lt Te T 6 39 6 3 4 Logout the 5adBC cece ccccceeceee cece cece eeeeeeeseeeseeeesaeeseeessueeseeeaeeesaess 6 40 6 3 5 Password Modification cesses eee 6 41 6 3 6 User Account Management rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnenn 6 42 6 4 General Parameters and Information rannnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnn 6 49 6 4 1 Set the 5548C S Name eee 6 49 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 v
138. B ALL RESTART COLD WARM There are two type of restart COLD is a restart with factory default card s settings WARM is a restart which maintains the current card s settings Testing all the Cards LEDs There are two ways to test the 5548C SSU s cards LEDs described in the following two sections 6 4 8 1 Physical Lamp Test on the Shelf Physically there is a pushbutton on the POWER A slot A21 card labeled LAMP TEST Figure 6 10 Physical Lamp Test Once the LAMP TEST switch is pressed follow the LAMP TEST sequence in section 6 4 8 3 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 61 Operating amp Provisioning 6 4 8 2 Lamp Test Using Software The following TL1 command will have the same effect as pressing the LAMP TEST switch on the shelf Input Syntax JPR LEDS Z T Once the LAMP TEST command sent where it is possible to see the shelf physically follow the LAMP TEST sequence in section 6 4 8 3 that describes point by point what the shelf is supposed to do 6 4 8 3 Lamp Test Sequence Once the LAMP TEST switch has been pressed or the command OPR LEDS has been sent the 5548C will react as follow The lamp test takes approximately 10 seconds Seq DESCRIPTION 1 All LEDs are lit and bicolor LEDs in RED for 5 seconds 2 The bicolor LEDs are Green for 5 more seconds while monocolor LEDs remain lit 3 All LED are restored on their previous state Table 6 10 Lamp Test Sequence OSA 554
139. B I 1 1 I 1 1 I o o eo eo 1 o o 1 o o 1 o o 1 o o l o o i o o o o o o Q I o 0 1 o o 1 o o 1 o o 1 o 0 H o 25 o i 1 1 1 o 1 1 ALARM OUT GROUP 2 2 Figure 4 20 Alarms Management Tile Figure 4 19 Alarams Remote panel The OSA 5548C unit includes 10 input alarms These are used to remotely manage external units And two groups of NC Normally Closed amp NO Normally Opened relays contacts to remote alarms to third party devices OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 30 Equipment Installation 4 6 1 External Input Alarms The OSA 5548C SSU unit includes ten input alarms These are used to remotely report external unit s alarms EXT Alarm Inputs SUB D 25p Male EXT ALARM DESCRIPTION PIN Severity G Alarm 1 CRITICAL MINOR MINOR Alarm 10 Non Alarmed GROUND GND Not Connected 19 20 Figure 4 21 External Input Alarm Connector The OSA 5548C SSU will automatically generate event messages in case of defined alarm condition status When the contact between the pin IN and GND is closed or opened the OSA 5548C SSU will take this state as a remote alarm 4 6 1 1 Typical Application ALARM DETECTION OSA 5548C SSU Figure 4 22 External Input Alarm Application OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 31 Equipment Installation 4 6 1 2 Cabling Procedure STEP ACTION 1 Locate the connector
140. C cards in each of the OUC groups depending on protection requirements OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 28 Product Overview 2 4 9 2 Time Code Card NTP TCC NTP The TCC NTP card is a NTP server RFC1305 which provides a reliable and easy synchronization of Ethernet TCP IP network A TCC NTP card can be inserted in any of the OUC group which makes therefore the OSA 5548C TSG able to provide up to 10 NTP ports Its own base time and its algorithm guarantee a high level accuracy when the GPS card is tracked High security level 64 bits RSA MD5 encryption leap time protection high stability time base The OSA 5548C SSU offers the following possibilities of TCC NTP card management e from the 5548C management system while blocking access from individual NTP port The TCC NTP has autonomy to provide a stable output time code even when external synchronization is lost by using the THC cards as clock reference 2 4 9 3 Time Code Card PTP TCC PTP The TCC PTP card is a PTP server IEEE 1588 which provides a reliable and easy synchronization of Ethernet and TCP IP networks The TCC PTP card is a PTP master The card provides through the Ethernet connector SFP short time messages to slaves typically 8 to 64 per second Packets may be Sync Follow up Delay request and Delay response as specified by IEEE 1588v2 Accurate measurement and timestamping of these messages allow slaves to recover
141. CLASS 6 HLDVR_CLOCK_ CLASS 7 FREERUN CLOCK CLASS 52 6 9 6 4 TCC PTP state The status of the TCC PTP is returned by the front panel LEDS by TL1 answers to specific commands and by its active alarm list stored in the MAC card For a description of the front panel LEDs meaning see the physical layout chapter The TCC PTP card state can be requested by the RTRV EQPT PTPC STATE command TL1 Syntax RTRV EQPT PTPC STATE TID PTP 1 A PTP 10 B CTAG PORT 1 2 Example RTRV EQPT PTPC STATE PTP 1 A MYCTAG PORT 1 Answer TEST 1103 15 15 17 3532 M a COMPLD PIPC 2 A PORT 1 STATE MASTER IS TAI TRUE IS LOCKED TRUE PTP TIME 1300721333 U OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 149 Operating amp Provisioning The input reference state can also be requested by the command RTRV EQPT PTPC REF STATE TL1 Syntax RTRV EQPT PTPC PRIO TID PTP 1 A PTP 10 B CTAG REF 1 2 Example RTRV EQPT PTPC PRIO TID PTP 1 A MYCTAG REF 1 Answer EX TEST 11 02 15 15 17 32 M a COMPLD PTPC 2 A REF 1 1S TAI TRUBE CLOCK CLASS 6 TIME SOURCE GPS OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 150 Operating amp Provisioning 6 10 Synchronization Status Message SSM 6 10 1 Introduction In addition to the timing E1 lines can carry Synchronization Status Messages SSM which is information about the timing quality level The ITU T G 781 Second Generation SSM norms define the
142. DLT EQPT INC 1 B ctag Parameter name Possible configurations Description INC 1 A INC 2 B GPS A GPS B Select the card s slot you want to THC A THC B SGC A SGC B set as empty OUC 1 A OUC 10 B MAC A MAC B 6 4 5 2 Using SyncView Go to the Physical View gt right click on the empty slot shown in Black colour gt set empty OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 57 Operating amp Provisioning 6 4 6 Switching the Active Card within a Card Group To enable a switch between the currently active and the inactive stand by card e g from THC A to THC B e Physically on the shelf by removal of the active card from its slot e By software with the following TL1 command K Recommendation Switching ING GPS and THC should be done during maintenance window period or before putting the 5548C in service as the output signal can be afftected with small phase jump 6 4 6 1 Using TL1 Input Syntax SW DX aid ctag Example SW DX THC MYCTAG For retrieving the current active card the following command is required Many parameters will be returned with focus upon card active or standby status Input Syntax RTRV EOQPT OP aid ctag Example RTRV EQPT OP THC ctag The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M Ctlag COMPLD aid opstate OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 58 Operating amp Provisioning Pa
143. E Pr Output Group 2 15 16 1 8 19 a Output Group 1 wow 7m on Er sunne EEE EM Alarm Detection Group 1 Type er Output Group Configuration e E1 1 E1 Configuration nr 1 e E1 2 E1 Configuration nr 2 e FREQ Frequency 2 048MHz OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 134 Operating amp Provisioning 6 9 4 3 Output Line OL Configuration Squelch amp Tag In this section it is explained how to retrieve the current status for any of the 20 output lines from any OUC group A Note For OUC cards and Output Tile correspondence refer to section 6 9 1 2 For Output Group information refer to section 6 9 1 3 Using TL1 The following TL1 command is required to find the actual OUC group configuration Input Syntax RTRV EQPT OL aid ctag Example RTRV EQPT OL 3 15 MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMP LO aid opstate SQUELCH squelch TAG V My Tag up to 32 chars r To squelch an output line and or to edit a Tag the following TL1 command is required Input Syntax ED EQPT OL aid ctag SQUELCH squelch TAG tag Example OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 135 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Possible Default Output Line OL specified in the AID 10 20 format X Y X is the OUC group OK ALARM Y is the OL OPSTATE SHORTED SQUELCHED T
144. E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 18 Product Overview 2 2 3 4 The 5548C as a Time of Day Server An OSA 5548C SSU equipped with internal GPS cards and with a Time of Day card can be used as a Time of Day TOD server see Figure 2 17 Time of Day information comes in different formats depending on the TOD card type Popular TOD protocols are NTP RFC 1305 and PTP IEEE 1588 TOD cards are future product options Please consult factory for information about availability Internal 2 048 MHz amp GPS antenna Tracking amp Signal Output 2048 Mbit s GPS is signal f Holdover Generator Amplifiers Outputs Receiver GPS antenna vr Tracking amp Signal TOD TOD signal Holdover Generator Server Ports Receiver Figure 2 17 The 5548C as a Time of Day TOD server OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 19 Product Overview 2 3 Main Functions The OSCILLOQUARTZ 5548C Synchronization Supply Unit SSU equipment is a timing signal distributor It resides in 19 subrack or ETSI with various connectors Depending on its configuration it can be composed as a single channel or as fully redundant unit The equipment is locally RS 232 and remotely TCP IP manageable 2 3 1 Input reference selection The OSA 5548C SSU selects one of the input reference signals among up to 8 available input lines IL which can be assigned by software commands on any of the 16 input connectors 8x E1 and 8x Freque
145. EWPID Any ASCII string excluding aa password those characters that represent TL1 syntax of up to 10 characters OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 41 Operating amp Provisioning 6 3 5 2 Modifying an User s Password by an Administror The administrator can modify anuser password with the following command Input Syntax ED SECU PID aid ctag oldpid newpid Example ED SECU PID OSCILLOQUARTZ MYCTAG OSA HISNEWPWD AD UID OLDPID Fo a Po Current Password NEWPID Any ASCII string excluding New een Password those characters that represent TL1 syntax of up to 10 characters 6 3 6 User Account Management 6 3 6 1 Parameters The following parameters can be configured in every User account UID User name of the user account PID Password of the user account CID A list of up to 25 ports allowed for the user It can be RS 232 front and or rear and or Ethernet Ports UAP This parameter is related to the user privileges PAGE Password ageing interval It is the number of days after which the user receives a prompt indicating that it is necessary to change his password PCND This is an intervall signifying the number of days that a user can use the existing password before an update becomes mandatory PCNN This is the number of time before an user must change his password POINT When the user receives a prompt to change his password no old password can be rest
146. F ON SSM SA7 OFF ON SSM SA8 OFF ON SSM 2 Check the quality configured with the following command RTRV EQPT SGE El 1 E1 2 CTAG Check the value written after the SAX SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD H1 1 E1L 2 gt CODE HDB3 AMI CRC4 ON OFF TS16 CCS CAS SA4 OFF ON SSM SA5 OFF ON SSM SA6 OFF ON SSM SA7 OFF ON SSM SA8 OFF ON SSM IDLE 0 255 7 Select the E1 configuration option TYPE to the Output Group OG required ED EQPT OG 1 1 10 2 CTAG TYPE E1 1 E1 2 Retrieve the E1 configuration option with the following command RIRV EPI OG L LuAU ALT OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 26 Commissioning Check the value written after the TYPE SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD 1 1 10 2 TYPE 81_1 E1_2 7 Procedure 7 21 Sa bit configuration on Output Line 7 2 9 Restoring Factory Parameters Should you need to restore the factory default parameters the following procedure is required 7 Note When sending the following command the card s function will be stopped during a few seconds and will affect the synchronization distribution if it is not 1 1 protected A CAUTION Serious outage can result if the default setting is reverted on an active card as it will lost its current configuration STEP ACTION 1 Locate the card that you need to restore the factory settings 2 Send the following command accordingly INIT SYS INC 1 A INC 2 B GPS A GPS B THC A
147. GPS card System PRC Digital Digital Switch Switch Figure 2 8 GPS The simplest solution is to incorporate a GPS receiver card into the OSA 5548C SSU This is illustrated in Figure 2 8 The figure shows how the GPS satellite segment conveys time and synchronization information from the distant GPS System PRC to the GPS receiver card where the information is decoded The OSA 5548C SSU equipped with a GPS receiver card now acts as a virtual network PRC in the sense of ITU T Recommendation G 811 Often however telecommunication networks have their own physical PRC system and synchronization reference signals must be transported from the PRC to all SSUs in the network This is done via a sometimes complex synchronization distribution network Figure 2 9 to Figure 2 11 illustrate the transport mechanisms that are used Figure 2 9 shows the case of SDH and SONET Here the aggregate STM n or OC n signal acts as the synchronization carrier In the SSU site the SDH network element extracts the synchronization from the STM s signal and redirects it to the SSU OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 13 Product Overview Figure 2 9 Synchronization transfer in SDH amp SONET In PDH things are quite different as can be seen in Figure 2 10 Since in PDH signal mapping and demapping are perfectly transparent for the timing of the tributary signals E1 tributaries originating in a synchronous network element are
148. INFORMATION AND INVENTORY gt section using TL1 SN 1002 5548C Hyper Terminal File Edit Yiew Call Transfer Help MAC ACK 10 08 27 14 46 39 N CTAG COMPLD OSCILLOQUARTZ 2010 08 27 14 43 42 0 Connected 0 00 08 Auto detect 19200 8 N 1 Example To retrieve inventory used RTRV INV ALL CTAG Procedure 6 1 Serial Connection Xp Recommendation Osciloquartz highly recommends using SyncTerminal instead of other terminal emulators OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 16 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 3 3 Serial Connection with the SyncView PLUS software STEP ACTION 1 Connect a null modem cable to one of the two RS 232 ports labeled LOCAL COMM 2 Launch the SyncView PLUS software 3 Set the corresponding el communication parameters as Connect DEG shown below with the Port where the Null Modem cable is connected on the computer and click Connect User lf Use default Name IE Password j E L Procedure 6 2 Serial Connection with SyncView PLUS 6 2 4 Ethernet Communication The OSA 5548C can be managed via an Ethernet connection Such as a usual Ethernet network element you can define an IP address for the 5548C an IP subnet mask and two gateways The IP format is IPv4 with a format in dotted quad like 123 123 123 123 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 17 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 4 1 Eth
149. K October 2012 VI Front amp Rear View Drawings FRONT VIEW DRAWING Azi A22 A23 A24 A25 DZD Ali A28 A29 ASO A31 Ad Add Add Ado A36 A37 BC iie T 5548C Kr Kati Camme ree SLEE NN ug I J lo lo o le e le le le Al A2 AS A4 A5 AGB AT AB AQ A10 Alt A12 A13 Al4 A15 A16 AIT OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 VII REAR VIEW DRAWING A121 A122 A123 A124 A125 A126 A127 Front amp Rear View Drawings OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM 9000000000 9000000000 L 90000000009 fp 2552555552 H FA LP 252555552 i LH 2525555552 H I OUT 11 20 ASYM 900000 j 900000 EXPANSION DEN OUTPUTS ASYM 0 0 N O OG O OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM NA EG stk 4o J 2 4 Shaif amp powered ory sdundant 3 L A ov DENE Sources wits dene Hons bots Power OUT 11 20 SYM L I iasad before ainan iha shell MosciLLOQUARTZ BOSCILLOQUARTZ ooo0po0n0no0o000n000 00 a0000090000 8666988609 0 S 2 O AI 6090960804900 6 O GO lt GO lt Shel amp powered by redundant DO power Sources with Hazardous Energy Oisconnect bein Power Eowces before replacing he shaft Sl lt 9 GO lt p G ANTENNA Sl GO lt el a 0 8 A101 A102 A103 A104 A105 A106 A107 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K Oc
150. L 1 1 MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD aid opstate ssm INPUT input ADM STATE adm state TERM term CODE code WTR wtr FRCD fred OOF DETECT o00f detect CRC4 DETECT ercd detect BPV DETECT bpv detect SA4 sa4 SA5 sa5 SA6 sa6 SA7 sa7 SA8 sa8 FREQ freq TAG tag r To edit all configurations in one single line the following command is required Input Syntax ED EQPT IL aid ctag INPUT input ADM STATE adm state TERMINATION termination CODE code WIR wtr OOF DETECT o00f detect FRCD fred CRC4 DETECT erc4 detect BPV DETECT bpv detect SSM BIT ssm bit TAG tag Example ED EOQOPT IL 1 2 MYCTAG INPUT E1 2 ADM STATE ENABLED TERMINATION TERMINATED CODE HDB3 WTR 1 OOF DETECT ENABLED FRCD NONE CRC4_DETECT DISABLED BPV_DETECT DISABLED SSM_BIT SA4 TAG My Second El Input Line OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 66 Operating amp Provisioning name configurations parameters AID 1 1 2 4 ALL This is the input line abbreviation The first digit is the group number and the second digit is the input number 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 OPSTATE OK ALARM WTR OK There are different operational input line states OK The line is running correctly ALARM The line is in alarm WTR The line is being in wait to restore time mode SSM PRC SSU A This is the input line SSM quality SSU_B SEC DNU
151. L1 commands to the 5548C It enhances an emulator interface for sending TL1 commands to manage and configure the 5548C 6 2 6 2 Opening the SyncTerminal from SyncView PLUS The SyncTerminal is included in the SyncView PLUS software Use the connection procedure as shown in the SyncView PLUS user manual right click on the OSA 5548C SSU E200 icon and select SyncTerminal Ak Fie View NetworkElement Node Configuration Windows Help mvs HEER amp 1 LocalManagr ORX OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 23 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 6 3 Overview The SyncTerminal main window is divided in 4 principal parts e The top menu provides 4 menus of all main functions of the Sync Terminal e The shortcut menu presents rapid access to principal functions e The command tree contains all the TL1 commands available for the 5548C The user can re arrange then in alphabetical order e The main window is divided in two parts once you the 5548C is accessed Jane ank mjr Terminal Edit Tools Window Help Top menu AE D Shortcut menu Security 7 Communication Equipment E A GPS Ga TCC A System Fault 1 Performance 55m Download Commands tree Main or command windows Sort By Categories Alphabetically Ready Figure 6 2 SyncTerminal Main Window OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K Oc
152. LAN Com Port location on Remote panel OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 37 Equipment Installation 4 8 Installation Check List This table is designed to help you in verifying that all required tasks have been done before powering up the shelf as described in the chapter 4 Item Tasks 1 Unpack the shelf carton and inspect the material according to the order acknowledgement or the packing list 2 Confirm that all the intended cards and tiles are inserted correctly and tightened in the shelf 3 Confirm that the shelf s ears are adjusted according to the width required Confirm that the shelf is mounted in a rack with at least 1 RU 1 79 45mm of 4 clearance below the shelf 5 Confirm that the external input and or output Alarms connectors are cabled accordingly 10 Confirm that the remote LAN COMM and or local serial LOCAL COMM connector s are cabled Table 4 4 Installation Check List OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Confirm that the shelf is grounded from the grounding studs to a reliable earth point in the rack 6 Confirm that voltage and polarities on the two power cables are compliant 7 Confirm that the power cable is connected to both POWER A and POWER B connector tile Confirm that the input and or output connectors is cabled to the corresponding connector tiles O O DIO Oo DO Do Io Do D Rk 4 38 Turn up Procedure Chapter 5 Turn up Pro
153. List of Figures Page Figure 2 1 5548C SSU E200 Front View esse eee e 2 5 Figure 2 2 5548C SSU E200 Rear View see eee 2 6 Figure 2 3 5548C SSU E200 Simplified Block Diagram sese eee eee 2 7 Figure 2 4 Logical View of SyncView PLUS eee e eee 2 8 Figure 2 5 Physical View of SyncView PLUS eee e eee 2 8 Figure 2 6 Synchronization reference chain for SDH ITU T Rec G 803 rrrorrrrerernnrrnnnennnnn 2 10 Figure 2 7 Synchronization reference chain for SDH over OTN ITU T Rec G 8251 2 11 SI Es EEE EEE EE 2 13 Figure 2 9 Synchronization transfer in SDH amp SONET renornnnanennnrnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnrnnanennnennnnnnnnennnnen 2 14 Figure 2 10 Synchronization transfer in PDH eee eee eee 2 14 Figure 2 11 Synchronization transfer in WDM arrnrnrnnnnonnnrnranennnrnnannnanennnnnnnnennnnnnnnennannnanennnennn 2 15 Figure 2 12 The 55480 with internal GPS cardas sese 2 16 Figure 2 13 The 5548C with an external Cesium clock rrrnnrnnnrrrrnnnranernnnrnanennnrnnnnennannnnnennnnnn 2 16 Figure 2 14 The 5548C as Synchronization Supply Unit see ee e eee e eee 2 17 Figure 2 15 The 5548C configured as an Expansion Shelf rrrrnrarenanrnnnrnranennnrrnanennnennnnennnnne 2 17 Figure 2 16 The 5548C as an SSU Expansion Sne 2 18 Figure 2 17 The 5548C as a Time of Day TOD Server 2 19 Figure 2 18 System Description Diagram see eee eee 2 25 Figure 2 19 5548C SSU E200 Front Panel Layout ee
154. Logical View of 5548C S N 110 5548C SSU Release 1 40 Master Last saved state from Database File Configuration View Elements Using Syncterminal software Select the ED EQPT TCC command OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 9 ACTION Using Syncview software TCC NTP Details A36 State General Authentication 149 133 40 112 255 255 254 0 149 133 40 100 Enabled Ful Using Syncterminal software Example ED EQPT TCC TCC 1 A MYCTAG IPADDRESS 123 100 12 4 120 GATEWAY 123 100 124 100 DHCP_MODE ENABLE ETHER SDEF AU TO DUPLEX_MODE FULL Procedure 7 5 NTP Connection OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Cancel Apply Refresh Commissioning Commissioning 7 2 3 Firmware Upgrade Procedure When an shelf upgrade is required proceed as follow STEP ACTION Install the FIRMWARE on a FTP server which can be acceded by the OSA 5548C SSU Configure the FTP parameters with following command 1 2 SET DNLD CTAG ftp_server_ip address directory name user name password Example SET DNLD CTAG 149 133 41 123 MAC48C MYNAME MYPWD 3 Check the parameters with the following command RTRV DNLD CTAG 4 Download the firmware files from FTP to 5548C with the following command OPR DNLD CTAG The following answer should be shown during download process IP CTAG lt IP CTAG lt IP CTAG lt
155. MESC This is the delay in hour after which a severity of an active alarm is escalated to a higher level 0 means no escalation OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 163 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View 3 Elements gt MAC gt Alarm Open the Physical or Logical View Alarms Escalation A17 From DB EJ escalation Alarm Escalation i Set ON to enable the alarm escalation function and then configure a time between 6 and 48 hous 6 11 2 Retrieving Current Active Alarms with Software This section explains how to retrieve current active Alarms Reported by the shelf and the syntax 2 Note For retrieving all the alarms and events refer to section 6 11 4 There are many parameters in response of the TL1 command to retrieve the active alarms which are described below e Element on which the alarm status is requested AID The Cards Group s current active alarms as well as alarms from the entire shelf e Notification Code NTFCNCDE This is the alarm severity associated to the alarm Critical Major Minor or Non Alarmed e Condition Type CONDTYPE This is the type of the alarm condition which is written as an alarm abbreviation i e LOS for Loss Of Signal e Service Effect SRVEFF This parameter reports whether the service is affected SA or not NSA e Location LOCN This parameter indicates the location of alarm If the alarm concerns the card itself
156. MYCTAG MJ NSA The response is formatted such as below Output Syntax Sad date time M ctag COMPLD aid atag ntfcncde condtype srveff ocrdat ocrtm clratag clrdat clrtm conddescr name configurations parameters INC 1 INC 2 INC Cards needed to request the GPS THC SGC active alarms OUC 1 OUC 10 OUC MAC ALL NTFCNCDE CR MJ MN NA NULL Notification code associated with the alarm conditions being retrieved CONDTYPE CONDTYPE NULL Type of alarm condition SRVEFF SA NSA NULL Effect on service caused by the alarm NU Becton is reported NA le to the identified entity Performance Measurement a HS kung occurred OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 170 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters CLRTAG 0 65535 o 65535 NULL o ATAG of the clear message of the clear ATAG of the clear message EE rs 01 01 2099 12 vt Date when the triggering event 31 has been cleared ow 00 00 23 59 59 hm Time when the event Se been cleared ho nnan NULL Detailed text description of the trouble Limited to 64 characters enclosed within escaped quotes Not software configurable with the command RTRV ALM HIST Using Sync View Open the Event Viewer and look at the History tab For the occurrences which have not been acknowledged yet they are shown on the Active Window gt
157. Main features The THC card is designed to provide the following functions e Input selection based on o Input priority table o SSM quality level o manual selection e Jitter and Wander filtering using embedded MADDS Manual amp Automatic Direct Digital Synthesis system in association with a quartz or rubidium oscillator e Provides SSU Type 2 with rubidium or SSU A Type and V with quartz oscillator holdover capability e SSM management e Distributing signal to the SGC cards e Squelching outputs in case of non valid signal e 1 1 card protection e Remotely software also called firmware upgradeable 2 5 6 3 Operation The user can insert one or two THC cards in the THC group depending on protection requirements When two THC cards are installed the active one is the card which shows the currently SELECTED INPUT status on its digital LED display When powered on from a cold start the THC card requires time to warm up the internal oscillator The delay varies with oscillator type and card temperature Typical cold start warm up period is up to 30 minutes When the THC is ready and an input reference is qualified by the INC card s the THC enters a fast start mode synchronizing the internal clock phase to that of the input signal as quickly as possible Upon completion of the fast start mode the THC enters the normal mode The same sequence applies to card replacement where a stand by THC in the ad
158. N Connect the Remote panel to the ground Locate the connector tile corresponding to the group required to cable Select a connector which will be configured with the signal desired The output port configuration is done by software as described in section 6 9 Connect the ribbon cable supplied by Oscilloquartz on the tile s connector required Connect the other end of the ribbon cable on the Remote panel s output tile desired Check that cable is well tightened Procedure 4 9 Cabling the BNC Remote panel OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 25 Equipment Installation 4 5 2 5 Cabling SUB D 9 Output Port Remote Panel 20x SYMMETRICAL with SUB D 25 pins female 120 ohms OL 1 10 OL 11 20 1125 12 13 14122 9 20 15 21 8 7 7 1125 12 13 4 22 9 20 5 21 8 7 19 7 8 119 61 7 Output Group 1 8 117 4 14 91161 3 1 a Output Group 2 2 cO EEE EVJE SE EEE EL EN Output Tile 1 Output Tile 2 Output Tile 3 Output Tile 4 Output Tile 5 Output Conn OG 1 Output Conn OG2 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 26 SUB D 9 pole female Equipment Installation SE ee Ring out x Tip out x Shield Shield Shield PIN De C Ring out x 1 a Tip out
159. NATED CODE B8ZS AMI WTR 1 12 DISABLED FRCD PRC SSU A SSU B SEC DNU NONE OOF DETECTION DISDABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 CRCA DETECTION DISDABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 BPV DETECTION DISDABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 SA4 OFF ON SSM SAS OFF ON SSM SA6 OFF ON SSM SA7 OFF ON SSM SA8 OFF ON SSM FREQ the frequency fed TAG My Input Line Tag 7 Procedure 7 19 Forcing SSM Quality Level on Input Line OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 24 Commissioning 7 2 8 3 Generate a specific SSM quality on outputs and configuration of the Unknown SSM Quality Translation When the SSM quality on the input lines is unknown the 5548C is able to generate a specific SSM quality The 5548C has also the capability to generate a defined SSM quality The following procedure describes how to set these SSM configurations STEP ACTION To force FRCD the SSM Quality and to generate a specific SSM quality when the SSM is unknown UNK on the input lines use the following command 1 ED SSM CTAG UNK PRC SSU A SSU B SEC DNU NONE FRCD PRC SSU A SSU B SEC DNU NONE 2 Check the quality configured with the following command RIRV SSMi 7 CIAC Check the values written after the UNK and FRCD SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD HLDVR PRC SSU A SSU B SEC DNU NONE UNK PRC SSU A SSU B SEC DNU NONE FRCD PRC SSU A SSU B SEC DNU NONE 7 7 2 8 4 Sa bit configuration on Input Line To set the Sa bit uti
160. ONG TT 4 6 Figure 4 2 Mounting Remote PWR IN and MGMT Panel in the rack sese eee eee e ee 4 7 Figure 4 3 Cabling Remote Panel to OSA 5548C SSU 4 8 Figure 4 4 Mounting Remote Output Panel in the rack ee ee ee ee e eee 4 9 Figure 4 5 Power Tiles Location on rear 5548C SIde rrrrrrrrarerarrrrnrrrarernarrrnnrrnnrnnanennannnnnennnnn 4 11 Figure 4 6 Power Tiles Location on Remote Power Input and Management Panel 4 11 Figure 4 7 Fuses ANN 4 12 Figure 4 8 Grounding amp Power Connections on Power Tiles see ee eee e e eee eee 4 14 Figure 4 9 Grounding and power connection on PWR IN amp MGMT Remote panel 4 14 Figure 4 10 Input Tile location on the 5548C sher 4 15 Figure 4 11 Input Tile on the Remote Dane sse eee ee eee 4 15 Figure 4 12 Input and GPS Cards Location eee eee 4 16 Figure 4 13 Input Tile on 5548C shelte 4 17 Figure 4 14 Input Tile on Remote Panel sss eee ee eee 4 17 Figure 4 15 Output cards and tiles location see eee 4 20 Figure 4 16 Output Connectors PPS location slot A102 rarrranrnnnnrnnnnnranernnennanennnennnnennnnnnnnnn 4 28 Figure 4 17 Output Connectors PPS wecencvazcenatcnstenssecnaseoosweusseccnacageneuetencedonteacersSiuceseaneeaiuaecascate 4 28 Figure 4 18 Output PPS on Remote Panel esse eee 4 29 Figure 4 20 Alarms Management Tile esse eee 4 30 Figure 4 19 Alarams Remote pannel ccccccccsscecseeceeeeseeeceeeecseesusecc
161. OSCILLOQUARTZ OSA 5548C SSU E200 USER MANUAL for OSA SSU E200 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 What s new in this edition Update step 5 in Grounding amp Power Connection procedure in section 4 4 G Y Upgrade drawings for Adobe compatibility Y Add a warning note for output terminations in section 4 5 2 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Contents Table of Contents Page GE INTRODUCTION EE NE ia i 1 1 1 1 About this Manual ssssssssssssss esse esse sees essen ennenen enean eean nean eanne 1 3 1 1 1 COD VII GI NOICE Larsen eieee 1 3 12 Reading GUIdE e e E 1 4 ES Safety INSTUCNONS ssion aaa naaa aaau aani 1 5 14 Waranty TE VE ME NN SESER 1 8 tS ENN 1 9 2 PRODUC 0 611 2 lt Em pmsnsadense seede seirer 2 1 2 1 Tp elt eai e EEE 2 3 2 2 Main Applications sss sssssssssss esse esse esse esse sese ennenen ennenen enean nenen 2 9 2 2 1 Synchronous Network Technologies Requiring Synchronization 2 9 2 2 2 Synchronization Distribution Methods sees eee eee 2 13 LE E rac aennteset eg anesteen E gene enecanaes 2 16 2 3 Man FON e Ta 2 20 2 3 1 Input reference selection eee ee 2 20 252 ENN 2 20 2 3 3
162. October 2012 6 92 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters 0 12 FO VISIBLE a Number of available satellites TRACKED 0 12 O Number of tracked satellites AID 1 12 ALL Specify the Satellite number SAT_ID 32 Identification number of satellite 90 ELEVATION Dex Elevation angle of the satellite in degrees BEARING Polar Coordinate in degrees Signal noise ratio in dBHz Only available on tracked satellites HEALTH NO ALMANAC Satellite s health Satellite must UNHEALTHY be healthy to be tracked HEALTHY Using SyncView Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt GPS Input gt Details gt Satellites tab 2 GPS Details A4 amp A5 From DB ole General i Position Satellites Number of Visible Satellites 0 Number of Tracked Satellites 0 Elevation Bearing Snr Health Tracked 14 HEALTHY YES HEALTHY YES HEALTHY YES HEALTHY YES HEALTHY YES HEALTHY HEALTHY HEALTHY Parameter Possible Description name configurations ID 14 32 Identification number of satellite ELEVATION Elevation angle of the satellite in degrees BEARING 0 359 Polar Coordinate in degrees SNR Signal noise ratio in dBHz Only available on tracked satellites HEALTH NO ALMANAC Satellite s health Satellite must be healthy to be UNHEALTHY tracked HEALTHY TRACKED YES NO Whether satellite is tracked or not OSA 5548C
163. Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt SSM gt Then Select SSM Enabled or SSM Disabled according to your needs 6 10 2 2 Input signal with SSM Quality Forced When connecting an input which does not carry any SSM quality status it is possible to force the SSM quality level in order to be transmitted through the OSA 5548C SSU Example In the application of a PRC frequency input line i e 10MHz which cannot carry SSM messages it is possible to force SSM input quality level such as the PRC A Note Read section Input connector to Input Line IL description 6 5 to understand the concept of cross connection of input lines to physical input port and to retrieve the current configuration OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 152 Operating amp Provisioning Using TL1 The following command is required to check what the current status is Many parameters will be returned these pertinent instructions are highlighted in blue and boldface type below Input Syntax RTRV EQPT IL aid ctag Example RTRV EQPT IL 1 3 MYCTAG The response is formatted as shown below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD aid opstate ssm INPUT input ADM STATE adm state TERM term CODE code WTR wtr FRCD fred FREQ freq TAG tag 7 To force the SSM quality in the line insert the SSM quality into the parameter FRCD the other ones are just necessary to configure correct fr
164. P Configuration The ED EQPT PTPC PTP TL1 command can be used to configure the PTP parameters TL1 Syntax ED E0PI PIPC PIP IID SPIP LAu PIP B CTAG PORT 1 2 ADM STATE ENABLED DISABLED ADDR MODE UNICA ST MULTICAST MIXED DOMAIN 0 99 PROTOCOL UDP ETHERNET TWO STEP NO YES MASTER STATE ENABLED DISABLED SLAVE STATE ENABL ED DISABLED Example ED EOPT PIPC PIP TID tPipalL A PiP lo B MYCTAG PORT 1 ADM STATE ENABLED ADDR MODE MIXED DOMAIN 5 PRO TOCOL UDP MASTER STATE ENABLED SLAVE STATE DISABLED Parameters descriptions Default se Parameter name Possible configurations parameters Description Remarks Card position The PTP port may be administratively ADM STATE ENABLED DISABLED Enabled disabled In that case no PTP traffic will be generated In MIXED mode both UNICAST UNICAST and ADDR MODE MULTICAST MULTICAST packets are sent to through the Vet PTP port PTP domain as DOMAIN specified by IEEE 1588v2 PROTOCOL ETHERNET UDP UDP Transmission protocol Two step mode makes use of FollowUp messages It can be TWOSTEP NO YES NO used if the slave doesn t support the ONE STEP mode MASTER STATE ENABLED ENABLED Use ENABLED only SLAVE STATE DISABLED DISABLED Use DISABLED only OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 146 Operating amp Provisioning Retrieve the PTP configuration RTRV EQPT PTPC PTP Syntax RTRV EQPT PTPC PTP TID PTP 1 A PTP 10 B CTAG
165. PTION le GREEN Extinguished Initialization GREEN OFF OFF Boot 20s Flashing GREEN GREEN OFF Auto test 4 GREEN GREEN GREEN process 5 GREEN OFF OFF The LEDs light in sequence one after the other GREEN MST in GREEN Any of these if Establishing Flashing any alarm communication detected 7 GREEN MST in GREEN Any of these if OFF Ready to solid any alarm communicate detected with the 5548C Table 5 2 MAC Card Turn up Status A Note If the POWER B card is not inserted or without its fuse or if the shelf cannot retrieve its network parameters IP address and or MAC Address the STATUS LED flashes in red In almost all cases once the POWER B card or its fuse is inserted extract and reinsert the MAC in order to restart it 5 3 3 INC INput Card OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 5 6 Turn up Procedure AO O a 19 X 0000 E 52229992 INC RIT Tne RIR 1 7 INC KIG TH Eso scc RT ouc i ouc i ouc KTR I ouc ft mac ala lo 10 ID 10 19 IO lo l lo lo a o 10 10 Figure 5 3 Input Card Turn up Seq STATUS DESCRIPTION 1 RED tanp et The status LED should be in RED for a few seconds 2 GREEN GREEN on LED corresponding Different states can be shown a Input Line provisioned and depending on INC group and qualified status of the Input Line RED on LED corresponding to an Input Line not configured correctly or alarmed GREEN Fl
166. R be available for selection only once time with the TL1 command the WTR time elapsed IND NER 191 172 123 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 CTAG Warmup WARMUPSYNC THC The THC internal oscillator is No action needed The THC warming up The time depends on oscillator must warm up before the type of oscillator Quartz or going in fast start mode Rubidium Wrong PROGFLT CR THC The MADDS Manual amp Automatic Download the correct firmware in MADDS Direct Digital Synthesis system the MADDS with the command version embedded in the THC got a wrong ACT DNLD after verified that version compared to the release the firmware is in the MAC card version of the shelf YM Alarm PRFYM MJ INC 1 INC 2 The YM threshold has been Check and measure the stability GPS crossed over by the current of the signal in question Performance Measurement Table 8 12 Troubleshooting visible with Software OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 39 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 40 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 3 Cards amp Tiles Replacement or Addition 8 3 1 8 3 2 Overview The modular flexibility of the OSA 5548C SSU prevents major service availability malfunction the system increasing the OSA 5548C SSU reliability All cards and rear tiles can be replaced without affecting the other groups of card
167. RIOD Please read the below warning before doing any initialization AN Important Recommendation During input card initialization Timing signals passing through a card are interrupted and the card will not feed other cards To prevent service outage on the shelf during a firmware upgrade that causes INC initialization Oscilloquartz recommends that a redundant card be utilized to prevent shelf outage In example To initialize the INC 1 A verify that the INC 1 B protection 1 1 card is operational and switch service to that protection twin prior to update or initialization of the active INC 1 A The system will avoid loss of synchronization service in the following circumstances 1 The active THC will run in holdover if a lone INC is initializing 2 If only a single INC is installed in either INC 1 A or INC 1 B slots and either 2 048MHz or E1 signal is qualified by the INC the shelf will enter in passthrough mode during THC initialization 3 MAC card initialization does not affect shelf synchronization functions OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 60 6 4 8 Operating amp Provisioning Input Syntax INIT SYS aid ctag restart Example INIT SYS THC A MYCTAG WARM Parameter name Possible configurations Description AID INC 1 A INC 2 B GPS A GPS B Select the card s slot you want to THC A THC B SGC A SGC B set as empty OUC 1 A OUC 10 B MAC A MAC
168. S 232 Both connectors type Sub D 9p male labeled LOCAL comm are located on the front of the Power B card and on the Management Tile There is also one RJ 45 port for management via Ethernet The local interfaces operate on TL1 commands SyncView PLUS A CD ROM containing the SyncView PLUS management software is delivered with all OSA 5548C SSU By default the Sync View PLUS runs in Element Manager version which allows the user to easily configure and manage an OSA 5548C SSU via serial connection RS 232 Null Modem or via a peer to peer TCP IP connection A license can be ordered to enhance the SyncView PLUS Element Manager as an Element Manager PRO version which introduces Performance Measurements graphical user interface and storage capability for of up to 2000 alarms and events The SyncView PLUS software can also becoming a Network Manager version which operates as a Central Network Managing System Through the same software interface it allows managing all OSA 5548C SSU equipments in a network as well as others Oscilloquartz and third party equipments from any location via an Ethernet TCP IP network For full security and redundancy Oscilloquartz offers also the SyncView PLUS Network Manager Advanced version in a reliable 19 rack mountable server which enhances secure configurations such as mirroring RAID 5 disks and advanced SQL database Other features can be requested to match your security needs Figure 2 55 and Fig
169. SION A Document History 5548C User Manual English OSA K 25 10 2012 15 01 2007 DATE CORRECTIONS 15 01 2007 Creation 22 04 2008 Add connection description for remote panel SUB D Extract GPS Antenna installation information Extract TL1 commands and alarm lists 12 06 2008 Correction to mounting rack depth size Modify power supply labels Update output section descriptions 26 11 2008 Update address for OSA USA Update TCC NTP card description Change procedure for Critical Alarm Testing in the Commissioning chapter 09 04 2009 Add weights for Management and Remote panels Update EMC normes Update NTP card descriptions and ordering numbers 18 09 2009 Add and update all aspects of the TCC NTP card Add ordering number for new release SGC card 03 07 2010 Add TCC NTP card with NTP output on the front panel Add Ethernet speed management setting 09 09 2010 Add note for PPS offset in GPS module Delete address for OSA USA 16 11 2010 Update serial connection with Terminal Emulator procedure 25 10 2011 Add TCC PTP card 29 11 2011 Update TCC PTP drawing and descriptions 25 10 2012 Upgrade drawings for Adobe compatibility Add a warning note for output terminations Update step 5 in Grounding amp Power Connection procedure OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 V Document History This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision
170. SSM decoding and processing e Remotely software also called firmware upgradeable 2 5 3 3 Operation The user can insert in each INC Group e 1 INC which makes the shelf available for 4 input references without INC card protection e 2INCs which makes the shelf available for 4 input references with INC card protection When two INC cards are installed in the same group the active one is the card which shows status on any of its IN1 4 LEDs the stand by one has its IN1 4 LEDs extinguished When at least 1 INC is inserted in each INC group the 5548C is available for 8 Input references The 4 Input references of each INC group can be configured by software or via TL1 commands to any of the 8 related connectors on the Input tile The input connector types available for the INC group are e 2 groups of 4 E1 BNC 75 ohms connectors asymmetrical e 2 groups of 4 Frequency BNC 75 ohms connectors asymmetrical There is the possibility to install an adapter 120 75 Balun to get the symmetrical option It is possible to configure each input reference as ENABLE to make it available for selection by the 5548C when qualified by the INC MONITORED in order to measure its performances without allowing the 5548C to select it or DISABLE to disallow the 5548C to select it and to avoid reporting alarms about it In cooperation with the THC group the INC can also disqualify an input reference if it crosses a user defined Performance T
171. SSU enters holdover mode and maintains synchronization output signals which are of adequate quality for a limited period of time L leans RL utp Receiver Holdover SGC Amplifiers 2 048 MHz amp ry cee 2048 Mbit s Inputs 2048 Mbit s Outputs Internal Signal GPS Tracking amp Generator Output Amplifiers Receiver dilaati SGC Figure 2 14 The 5548C as Synchronization Supply Unit 2 2 3 3 The 5548C as an SSU Expansion Shelf Figure 2 15 shows the OSA 5548C SSU configured as an Expansion Shelf The Tracking amp Holdover function is missing since Expansion Shelves are used to increase the number of output ports of another 5548C used as an SSU or a PRC Up to 4 Expansion Shelves can be connected to the main 5548C by redundant link cables as shown in Figure 2 16 The Expansion Shelves are managed through the main 5548C via a management bus contained in the link cables The maximum distance between the main 5548C and the last Expansion Shelf is 30 m This maximum distance remains applicable when only one Expansion Shelf is connected Signal Input Card Generator EGC Output Amplifiers 2 048 MHz 2 048 MHz amp 2048 Mbit s Outputs Signal Input Card Generator EGC Output Amplifiers Figure 2 15 The 5548C configured as an Expansion Shelf OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 17 Product Overview Figure 2 16 The 5548C as an SSU Expansion Shelf OSA 5548C SSU
172. SUB D 9 pins RS 232C terminations A multimeter and an oscilloscope bandwidth of at least 30 MHz A flat screwdriver For remote Ethernet connection A LAN WAN Ethernet network A 100 Base T cable with RJ 45 terminations 10 Base T is also working A computer with Ethernet card embedded An IP address for the OSA 5548C SSU itself the Mask address of the LAN WAN the eventual Gateway IP addresses and mask addresses Optional It is also possible to use a cross connected 100 Base T cable with RJ 45 in order to make direct connection between your computer and the OSA 5548C SSU without passing through a LAN OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 73 Commissioning 7 2 Configuration amp Provisioning Procedures 7 2 1 Introduction 7 2 1 1 Overview This section describes the main procedures to make the OSA 5548C working as required 7 2 1 2 Requirements The user should have a basic knowledge of TL1 command format and rules such as described in chapter 6 The SyncTerminal should be used to send TL1 commands as the most efficient way to configure and provision the OSA 5548C SSU 7 2 2 Establishing Communication 7 2 2 1 Serial Connection amp Login STEP ACTION 1 Connect one serial cable end to the front or the rear LOCAL COMM Port 2 Connect the second serial cable end into the serial port of your computer 3 Start the SyncView software 4 Connect the 5548C via RS 232 using the default login and pass
173. TEP ACTION 4 While the operator types the TL1 command sync terminal will move its callout window to assist the command completion MAC ACK 05 06 01 14 18 02 S ReTRieVe ALark Retrieve active alarms for the specified equipment RTR Y ALHM TID INGC INC 1LINC 2 GPS THE SGC AOE NOLIC 1 OLC 10 MAC 16 L L CT AG RTRV ALM MAC AC K 05 06 01 14 18 02 G ReTRieVe AL ard Retrieve active alarms for the specified equipment RTRV ALM TID INC INC 1 INC 2 GPS THC 7 SGC 0UC OUC 1 0UC 10 MAC ALL RTRV ALM ol pe pel ee SIE mi ReTRieYVe AL ard Retrieve active alarms for the specified equipment RTRV ALM TID INC ANC 1INC 2 6PS THC SGC fOUCIOUC 1 QUC 10 MACALL CTAG RTRV ALM IINC MAL BLK U9 Ub UL 14 41 ud ReTRieYe bL arv Retrieve active alarms for the specified equipment RTR V ALM TID 1 TNCINC LINC 2 GPS THOSGOMMUCMOLIC 1 OLC 10 MAC ALL CTAG BTRV ALMIIINCIMYCTAG 5 Type the semicolon to terminate the line and then press the ENTER key to send the command OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 34 Operating amp Provisioning STEP ACTION 6 The 5548C should respond in the right of the window as follows SyncT erminal Connected on 149 133 41 49 8023 Terminal Edit Tools Window Help Bk 0 4 0 RIS Z sw Commands List 5548C TL1 Management Commands H 0 Security H 0 Communication H E Equipment MAC ACK 05 06 01 14 48
174. TL1 command RIRV COM 2STS 270720 2 Then if the configuration has been settled correctly you should be prompted with the following answer SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD Here are the parameters you have configured 3 If the OSA 5548C is already connected to an Ethernet network you can send a PING START gt RUN gt CMD gt write PING XXX XXX XXX xxx replacing the x with the IP address from any computer or device connected in the same network to query the connection Procedure 7 3 Verifying the Ethernet Configuration 7 2 2 4 Ethernet Connection STEP ACTION 1 Connect a 10 or 100 Base T cable with RJ 45 terminations into the connector labeled LAN COMM and the other end plugged into the Ethernet network LAN WAN 2 If not yet done connectyour computer to the same Ethernet Network and control that your IP address Subnet Mask address as well as the Gateway setting are correctly configured to work within the LAN 3 Run the SyncView software OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 6 Commissioning STEP ACTION 4 Connect the 5548C via TCP IP using the 77 Connect Jes IP configured in the shelf Remoting TCP IP R5232 IP Address Right click on the 5548C Symbol and select SyncTerminal Then the SyncTerminal shold be shown with the following sentence Connecting to XXX XXX XXX XXX 8000 Connected XXX XXX XXX XXX Is the IP address of the shelf Procedure 7 4 Ether
175. TMASK FEF FEF HHT GATEWAY ditt DHCP MODE ENABLED DISABLED ETHE R SDEF AUTO MANUAL ETHER SPEED 10 100 DUPLEX MODE HALF FUL IE Example ED EQPT TCC TCC 1 A MYCTAG IPADDRESS 123 100 124 120 GATEWAY 123 100 124 100 DH CP MODE ENABLE ETHER SDEF AUTO DUPLEX MODE FULL Default AD TCCAAWTCC3B 1 IPADRESS 000000 x 0t09 GATEWAY wrx x 0t09 S DHCP MODE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE ETHER_SPEED 10 100 DUPLEX MODE HALF FULL D Using SyncView Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt TCC gt Details TCC NIP Details A36 State General Authentication Lancel Apply Refresh OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 142 Operating amp Provisioning The next sections describe how to configure the TCC NTP TCC NTP Details A36 Jed State General Authentication FTP Inventory Up to 8 caracters lower case upper case and numbers 1 9 OF Cancel Apply Refresh NTP authentication adds a level of security to your NTP configuration You configure an NTP key string on each device The key is encrypted using a Message Digest 5 MD5 hashing algorithm and the encrypted key is passed in each NTP packet Before an NTP packet is processed the key is checked against the configured key on the receiving device Example configuration GPS antenna GPS antenna STRATUM 1 STRATUM 1 5548C TCC NTP
176. TP Output Test OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 38 Figure 7 3 PTP set up testing OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Commissioning OSA 5320 BZ ane 1 P T 7 39 Commissioning 7 3 11 Commissioning Completion 7 3 11 1 Alarm and History Flushing Prior to complete commissioning it is recommended to flush all logs related to commissioning procedure STEP 1 2 ACTION Check current Active alarms with the following command RTRV ALM ALL CTAG If no alarm is answered go to the next step if there is alarms like IMPROPER REMOVAL send the following command to the empty slots DLT EQPT INC 1 A INC 2 B GPS A GPS B THC A THC B SGC A SGC B OUC 1 A OUC 10 B MAC A MAC B CTAG If there is any other alarm refer to section 0 for troubleshooting And resend the command RTRV ALM ALL CTAG for verification Flush the Alarm History with this command INIET ALM HisStl CTaAG Check that history is empty with this command RIRV ALM HIST i C IAG 2 The answer should be such as follow SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD Flush the Automatic Message with this command INIT AO ALL CTAG Check that Automatic Messages are empty with this command RIRV A0O2 sr LAG The answer should be such as follow SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD fr r Procedure 7 3
177. TUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS O sT ORNT Obi OE Oei OE OS DOE OExP Or Or Or O Ot O Ousc O Orr O On OIN2 O1N2 O1x2 O12 O OSCILLATOR O OSCILLATOR OIS O1N3 O1x3 Otn3 O n O n4 Ons Ons O O SELECTED INPUT OUT i 10 QUT 1 10 OUT 1 10 OUT i 10 OUT 10 OUT 1 10 SELECTED INPUT Oi Oi Oni Oni OHOLOOVER O HOLDOYER L q OUT 11 20 OUT 11 20 UT 11 20 OUT 11 20 OUT f1 20 OUT 11 20 HIS OE1 OE OE1 OE Or Or Or Or O Or O JARTZ 1 DOSCILOQUARTZ NIA Ml OSCLLOQUARTZ Y Input section GPS Tracking amp Holdover Signal Output Management receiver section Generation section cardA section Figure 2 1 5548C SSU E200 Front View J Note The equipment can look different depending on the installed cards OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Product Overview Output tiles OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM POWER B EXPANSION ALARM QUT POWER A LINK A LINK B GROUP 1 r 0 0 EXT ALARM 2 og INPUTS o o L o ka o iz
178. U ITU T Jitter k kg LAN LED LOF LOS M m MAC MADDS MIB MJ Mm MML MN MST MTIE NA or N A Glossary European Telecommunications Standards Institutes EXPansion shelf EXTernal Equipement test protocol to ensure that contractual requirements are met Federal Communications Commission Facilities Data Link First In First Out File Transfer Protocol Giga used to express 1 000 000 000 GrouND termination point on equipment Global Positioning System Generic Requirements Graphical User Interface High Density Bipolar Order 3 Encoding Hertz 1 Hertz equal 1 cycle per second Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers INput INput Card Internet Protocol or In Progress in TL1 autonomous answer International Standards Organization International Telecommunications Union International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications service sector Short term non cumulative variations of the significant instants of a digital signal form their ideal positions in time expressed in seconds or in UI unit interval Kilo used to express 1000 Kilo Gramms 1 Ibs 0 45 kg Local Area Network Light Emitting Diode Loss Of Frame Loss Of Signal Mega used to express 1 000 000 Milli used to express 0 001 or meter MAnagement Card Manual amp Automatic Direct Digital Synthesis Management Information Base Major Alarm the medium severity level of alarm MilliMeters Man Machine Language M
179. V HDR ReTRieve HeaDeR RTRY NETYPE ReTRieve Network El ED DAT EDit DATe RTRY PTHRGH ReTRieVe Pass THR SET CCALIGN SET CC ALIGN RTRY CCALIGN ReTRieve CC ALIGN OPR LEDS OPeRate LEDS RTRY LEDS ReTRieve LEDS i ENCAP CMD ENCAPsulate CoMmant H E Fault H 0 Performance H 0 sM BS Sort By Categories Alphabetically Figure 6 5 SyncTerminal Main or Command Menu OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 27 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 6 7 SyncTerminal Connection Parameters The SyncTerminal must be configured before attempting to access any equipment It is necessary to configure the communication protocol i e TL1 MML etc the equipment commands type file i e 48CTL1SSU dat and the connection type Remote or Local a Note When running SyncTerminal from the SyncView PLUS software do not follow this procedure The software automatically sets the SyncTerminal to connect the 5548C The following procedure configures the SyncTerminal in order to access the OSA 5548C SSU A Note Please read section 6 2 1 and following before attempting to connect to the OSA 5548C SSU STEP ACTION 1 Launch the SyncTerminal software 2 Go in the Tools menu and select Option EJ Sync Terminal Window Help Lock Terminal Ctrl Alt L Ping current connection Ping specific address 7 Communication 7 Equipment 0 System 7 Fault m r 3 Click on the tab lab
180. XPANSION SHELF 3 EXPANSION SHELF 2 EXPANSION SHELF 1 _ MASTER SHELF Figure 2 46 Master amp Expansion Rotary Switch POS SELECTION DESCRIPTION MASTER In this position the 5548C is configured as a MASTER shelf This position is not utilized in the 5548C SSU 2 EXPANSION 1 In this position the shelf is configured as an EXPANSION shelf with address number 1 shelf with address number 2 shelf with address number 3 shelf with address number 4 developments Table 2 19 Master amp Expansion Selection A Note The Expansion shelves do not contain INC GPS THC and SGC cards Instead in the SGC slot position it is required to insert EGC cards OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 74 Product Overview 2 5 17 INPUT Tile 2 groups of 8 BNC connectors are available for 2 048 5 or 10 MHz and E1 are available for input references Each group is divided in two with 4 BNC connectors on the left for Frequency 2 048 5 or 10 MHz and 4 on the right for E1 Among these 16 BNC connectors 8 4 per INC group can be used to feed the 5548C with signal This tile is located in position A106 on the rear of the shelf E1 FREQUENCY Input Group 1 Input Group 2 1 E1 i 2 INC 1 A INC 1B INC 2 A INC 2 B er 1 E1 1 E1 1 s E 3 v o 4 E1 4 l D KIG GG G B se 5 2 FREQ 3 FREQ 3 7 FREQ 4 FREQ 4 g WOON GPS A GPS B Antenna GPS 1 Antenna GPS 2 2 gure 2
181. Z 01 ALARM INPUTS AI IS o O OG lols Es 6 a oe O Be A O amp OG POWER A 2 S of 40 60V DC 6 3A MosciLLOQUARTZ OUC f oudii Bi ouc i ouch par ooa CESR C EET CES SET ID Tel AG TG I OOA INC A INC INC L ER STR MIDTUN L INC INC J INC GAITA CONIA crp r l l l Figure 4 15 Output cards and tiles location D do D1L40 alado IG OUC OUC ESE Ear EITT KEENE ae 212 19110 19010 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 OUC_ ft OUCH mac I mA Ka KENT Equipment Installation OUC GROUP OUC A slot no OUC B slot no Output Tile 1 7 10 Table 4 1 Reference between OUC cards and Output tiles Outputs terminations If outputs have impedance mismatch output failure alarms could appear Make sure the output ports are terminated with their corresponding loads or squelched if not used to avoid these false output failure alarms The sections below present different available types of Output tiles with their procedure of connection Each tile provides twenty outputs signals either Symmetrical or Asymmetr
182. acement or AdditiOn ssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnner 8 41 8 3 1 SES ee a R 8 41 Do NENNE 8 41 9 3 3 C nne ctor Tile MSErION israse Ea EAA 8 44 8 4 HUIS SSAC CUCM ric accra cerca sce dee nnmnnn nnmnnn nna 8 45 8 4 1 HON 8 45 8 4 2 Conditions for Replacing the EUS eee ee e ee 8 45 FRE NTN 8 46 8 4 4 Fuse Replacement Procedure sese eee ee 8 47 OS FOG RAN 8 49 8 6 Oscilloquartz Contact Information rannnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnernnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 8 51 8 6 1 Fen ANE 8 51 OG UN 8 51 9 SPENN 9 1 9 1 mm 9 3 9 2 Input Specification rrxrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnernnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnenen 9 4 9 3 Tracking amp HOLTOVE savanne 9 5 9 4 Performance Measurement PM nannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennuennr 9 6 EE JG EE EE 9 6 9 5 1 EE SE NN 9 7 J2 PIP re cite eat sete apace erect eens eet ite boven ae 9 7 9 6 AIS sina tence anetcuatines eann E E E E 9 8 9 6 1 EN EEE EE 9 8 FiO Teh d T 1 9 8 9 6 3 Output Alarms Relays sese 9 9 POUR SUD DIY Las 9 9 9 8 MEAN 9 10 ST EE EE er ME 9 10 SHELF SPARES amp REPLACEMENT PARTS siensasticcahicctsssscrcmesitacscduismucmnsaunnnannwennwesnwentwusnssaceseicosians 1 TESTEN EET EEE E NS E A E NE EE S E EA dace UIE Dr HISTORY ee V FRONT VET PANNA VII REAR VIEW DANN VIII OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 X List of Figures
183. ad block payload block within resend it accordingly Invalid Data the command sent format DENY ECNA Command not The command sent is Check the command syntax and implemented not implemented resend it accordingly If the command is supposed to exist contact Oscilloquartz on script occurred after sending resend it accordingly the command illegal user have priviligege to SRON med send this command invalid resend it accordingly bai bd Requested The condition sent Retrieve the current condition condition already exists and check that it exists already exists accordingly Operating amp Provisioning DENY ISP Invalid syntax The syntax or Check the command syntax and or punctuation punctuation within the resend it accordingly command sent is not correct DENY INUP Non null There is a parameter Check the command syntax and unimplemente which should not be resend it accordingly d parameter located at the place it has been sent DENY PICC Privilege The user does not Contact the 5548C administrator illegal have priviligege to command send this command code code OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 8 Operating amp Provisioning Internal Communication Bus CAN Errors Codes S ES ear nne acon OO command is invalid resend it accordingly invalid resend it accordingly han SRTO Reply timeout Time until receiving Check the connection to the occurred an answer from the 5548C card
184. agement Commands Connecting to 149 133 41 49 8023 H E Security Connected H E Communication H E Equipment oscilloquartz s 48C MAC Telnet Server 2 67 System 2 ss INIT SYS INITialize SYStem SE DE oe te MAC ACK 05 06 01 12 00 57 N 7798 REPT ALM RTRY NETYPE ReTRieve Network Element TYPE TL 1 3 MN BPV SA 2005 06 01 12 00 57 NA ED DAT EDit DATe RTR PTHRGH ReTRieve Pass THRouGH f SET CCALIGN SET CC ALIGN MAC ACK 05 06 01 12 00 58 RTRY CCALIGN ReTRieve CC ALIGN A 7799 REPT ALM OPR LEDS OPeRate LEDS IL 1 3 CL BPV SA 2005 06 01 12 00 58 NAN RTRY LEDS ReTRieVe LEDS ENCAP CMD ENCAPsulate CoMmanD ReTRieYe HeaDeR H 0 Fault Retrieve command header 44 H 0 Performance RTRV HDR TID CTAG MESNA ee CQ 55M N 06 01 12 18 44 NA H 0 Download ea fj RTRV HDR Sort By Categories Alphabetically The command will appear in the right bottom part with its description just above in the balloon help window STEP ACTION 3 Copy the parameter as highlighted in boldface in the callout above the command area using the full colon character as a delimiter as shown in the example below Terese EP Se oe eae Belk eve Lear Ro the TL1 handling terms and Retrieve command header 44 oe RTRV HOR TIDJ CTAG patie abbreviations please refer to the section 6 2 1 RTRV HDR OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 33 Operating amp Provisioning S
185. ages The shelf can accept alarms from external equipment such as door or cooling system alarm contacts connected to the input alarm connector The SSU provides alarm outputs to any other device A description of all physical alarms for each card is located in section 8 2 1 and an alarm and event list can be found in Error Reference source not found The alarms are categorized in 3 levels Critical Major or Minor Other events are also shown as Non Alarmed condition The OSA 5548C SSU has also the capability to escalate the severity of an active alarm after a configurable delay 24 hours by default OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 88 Pre Installation Considerations Chapter 3 Pre Installation Considerations Including Gy Overview Site Survey ElectroMagnetic Interference EMI Prevention Rack Preparation 2 GPS Antenna Mounting Remote Communication o o Required Tools amp Material OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 3 7 Pre Installation Considerations This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 3 2 Pre Installation Considerations 3 1 Overview This chapter provides guidelines and requirements needed before ordering and installing the OSA 5548C SSU It is divided into the following sections Site survey section provides in
186. ages resulting from natural wear improper maintenance failure to observe the operating instructions excessive strain unsuited consumption material as well as improper environmental and mounting conditions are excluded from this warranty The warranty expires if the customer or a third party modifies or repairs the product without Oscilloquartz s prior written consent or if the customer does not take immediate steps to prevent the damage from becoming more serious likewise if insufficient time is provided for repair or replacement The customer will not be entitled to other warranty claims Oscilloquartz is not liable for consequential damage OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 1 8 1 5 Introduction Certification EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION Oscilloquartz equipment is tested according to well defined procedures Appropriate testing and inspection takes place at the component board equipment and system levels The company maintains in house cesium standards that are continuously compared to UTC Before any equipment is released it must satisfy the relevant tests and inspection schedules The equipment is then issued with a Certificate of Conformity that guarantees its conformance with the relevant performance criteria The OSA 5548C SSU is designed to be compliant to e ITU T e ETSI e EMC e CE A variety of Oscilloquartz products are certified world wide For details please refer to our web sit
187. aintenance Test OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 4 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 2 Troubleshooting The OSA 5548C SSU can report many alarms and event messages to alert the user about any problem The alarms can be seen on the cards LEDs or in detail with software such as SyncTerminal or SyncView PLUS This section guides the user to determine the cause of failure which might happen on the OSA 5548C SSU 8 2 1 Alarm Behavior Visible on Front LEDs 8 2 1 1 aan Card INC JE NE The card is working correctly No action needed RED The card is currently not working During the power up sequence the LED can remain red for a short while If the LED stays in this status longer it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair after a last unsuccessful firmware initialization tentative LE TT There is a firmware version error Download the correct firmware in the card with the command ACT DNLD after verified that the firmware is in the MAC card jr ORANGE A new card s firmware is being downloaded No action needed OFF Dead no power is supplied to the card Test the INC s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair GREEN The input line is correctly configured to No action needed the line is perfectly receive the signal assigned The signal is configured qualified The line is either ENABLED GREEN Flashing The line is in Wait to restore time and will be Wai
188. alarms are the following e Element on which the alarm status is requested AID The Cards Group s historic of alarms and events as well as historic of alarms and events from the entire shelf e Notification Code NTFCNCDE This is the alarm severity associated to the alarm Critical Major Minor or Non Applicable e Condition Type CONDTYPE This is the type of the alarm condition which is written as an alarm abbreviation i e LOS for Loss Of Signal e Service Effect SRVEFF This parameter inform if the service is affected SA or not NSA e Automatic message TAG ATAG Unique identifier of the set message It is an integer number called Autonomous message TAG ATAG e Occurrence Date OCRDATE This is the date when the event alarm occurred e Occurrence Time OCRTM This is the time when the event alarm occurred OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 169 Operating amp Provisioning e ATAG for the Cleared Alarm CLRATAG Once the alarm cleared the 5548C generates a unique identifier number called the Autonomous message TAG ATAG e Date of the Cleared Alarm CLRDAT This is the date when the alarm has been cleared e Time of the Cleared Alarm CLRTM This is the time when the alarm has been cleared e Condition Description CONDESCR This parameter describes the alarm condition Using TL1 Input Syntax RTRV ALM HIST ctag ntfencde condtype srveff Example RTRV ALM HIST
189. alit to restore lime Enter here the eae EE delay of WTR It rss Enabled nable or Disable the must be between 1 Disabled WTR function and 12 minutes OK H Cancel Apply Refresh Figure 6 14 SyncView WTR time OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 82 Operating amp Provisioning 6 6 GPS Configuration 6 6 1 6 6 2 Introduction Up to two GPS cards can be inserted in the OSA 5548C to get an additional PRS quality input line when GPS cards are locked on GPS signal The 5548C allows various properties on GPS input e GPS Card State To retrieve the GPS cards operation status e GPS Input Properties To retrieve the GPS Input properties configuration e GPS Position To retrieve the current GPS position e GPS Time To retrieve the GPS time GPS Card GPS Group State This section explains how to retrieve the state of the GPS group A Important Note The command response refers to the INC group status and not to individual GPS card status Input Syntax KRIRV EOPI GPSC fr Example RTRV EQPT GPSC MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD opstate SSM ssm PERF perf SYS MODE sys mode OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 83 Operating amp Provisioning name configurations parameters OPSTATE EMPTY There are different INC group states EXCTRACTED EMPTY The group slots are empty
190. ame and code to transmit the SSM Input Syntax ED EOPI ILs s dd ig PRCD rred Example ED EQPT IL 1 2 MYCTAG FRCD SSU_A Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters AID This is the input line abbreviation The first digit is the INC group number and the second digit is the input number 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 SSM PRC SSU A SSU B NONE This is the input line SSM quality SEG DNU NONE DISABLED SEC DNU NONE for the corresponding line e Not software configurable OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 153 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Forced SSM Quality on Input 1 A1 amp A2 AG RAL Z Sl x S Elements gt Inputs gt Input 1 8 GPS gt Force SSM Quality ITU T Option I ETS Then select the quality required to force on the specified Input EK KN KM KU 6 10 2 3 SSM Configuration The OSA 5548C SSU allows editing of various parameters to configure the SSM operation Unknown UNK quality The Unknown quality message UNK is the quality supplied when the system cannot recognize the SSM quality on inputs The factory default SSM quality is SEC Forced FRCD quality The OSA 5548C can be configured to force a SSM quality on its outputs Using TL1 To retrieve the current SSM configuration the following command is required RIBRV SoM rieta Then you should be
191. ameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters ON to activate the Performance Measurement process and OFF to disable it OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 179 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt Then select Perf Enabled or Perf Disabled 6 12 2 2 Initializing PM 7 Note As long as a PM set 3 hours of measurement is not terminated it can be reset To reset all the on going performance measurements on all the input lines the user can turn off the PM process and then turn on to restart a new one To reset the on going PM set on a specific input line the following TL1 command is required Input Syntax INI T PM 2ai0 cLag Example INIT PM IL 2 1 MYCTAG Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters AID IL 1 1 IL 2 4 GPS This parameter is the input line to be reset 6 12 3 Delays to Retrieve the 1 Result and Time Intervals for Updates There is no need to wait 3 hours to get a measurement result or a measurement update once the first result has been received The first measurements can be seen after the time specified in the tables below and then each time interval written in the column on the right of the below MTIE and TDEV tables OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 180 Operating amp Provisioning 6 12 3 1 Dela
192. ameter is the level on which you want the MAC card making a sound Using SyncView Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt ae Buzzer Config A17 0 MAC gt Buzzer Buzzer Configuration Select Alarm criteria required to make a sound 6 11 1 3 Editing Alarm CutOff ACO ACO is provided to suppress any audible office row alarms to allow operators to suppress alarms bells while the alarm is being addressed Subsequent alarms should reset the ACO latch operation The 5548C ACO operation is fully programmable on one or both of two groups Pressing ACO does not clear the alarm cause or condition Internal buzzer and relay output are disabled when ACO is activated To physically cutoff alarms To extinguish any alarm LED press the switch labeled ACO which is located on the bottom of the MAC Except any specific configuration as per shown in the next section deactivating an alarm turns off the three CR MJ and MN LEDs However the MAC cards continue to report the alarm message until the original alarm condition is cleared OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 161 Operating amp Provisioning To cutoff alarms using software Using TL1 The following TL1 command remotely performs the same function as pressing the ACO switch physically on the MAC card Input Syntax OPR ACO ALG fr Using SyncView Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt MAC gt Set Alarm Cutoff Cut
193. ample RTRV PM IL 1 2 MYCTAG MTIE 2 The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD aid kind date time pointl point2 point3 point4 point5 point6 r AD ees GPS parameters select for retrieving its PM results rae are eer g SET This is the PM set to retrieve 1 is the currently calculated result by default 2 is the previously stored and the 9 is the oldest one DATE 2004 01 01 2099 LP is the PM set date 12 31 TIME 00 00 00 23 59 59 This is the PM set time POINT1 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE_1S For TDEV TDEV_1S For YM YM_60S POINT2 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE 1M For TDEV TDEV_4S For YM YM 5408 POINT3 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE_15M For TDEV TDEV 168 For YM YM 15M POINT4 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE_30M For TDEV TDEV 648 For YM YM 1H POINTS 1E 9 1E0 mn For MTIE MTIE 1H For TDEV TDEV 2568 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 182 For YM YM 2H Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters POINT6 1E 9 1E0 For MTIE MTIE_3H For TDEV TDEV_1000S For YM YM 3H Not software selectable Using SyncView Open Performances 18 01 2007 at 11 22 34 19 01 2007 at 11 22 34 Vv Hi SEE I FE MEN EN H ae Eg ESTE LHET at A Note Refer to the SyncView manual for Performances Interface description and use OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual
194. an assign the SSM value for each individual input signal if the input signal is not an E1 signal or if it does not include the Synchronization Status Message The 5548C can read SSM on all the Sa bits according to the user configuration SSM Input Selection Based on the extracted Synchronization Status Message SSM Clock quality or user defined level the OSA 5548C SSU will automatically select the higher quality input reference signal In case two input signals include the same SSM Quality Level the priority table levels are used to override selection of two similar SSM quality reference signals Should all input signals include SSM byte corresponding to a lower value than the internal oscillator the OSA 5548C SSU will enter in holdover operation mode OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 87 Product Overview 2 3 SSM Outputs If activated the OSA 5548C SSU generates E1 output signals including Synchronization Status Message In normal operation the SSM output value corresponds to the reference input signal s SSM In holdover mode the SSM byte corresponds to the quality level of the internal oscillator 2 8 Alarms Thanks to its LEDs the OSA 5548C SSU indicates current alarms and status Detailed alarms and events are reported to local or remote software such as SyncTerminal or SyncView PLUS The MAC card is the one that gathers stores and distributes alarms and events information and mess
195. ant GNSS cards can be installed to condition and qualify the GNSS signal coming through the GNSS Inputs OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 26 Product Overview 2 4 7 E Tracking amp Holdover Cards THC The THC can be protected by inserting the protection card in the adjacent slot In case that all OSA 5548C SSU input signals are missing or in failure the THC will continue to generate a frequency based on the internal oscillator operating in holdover mode Two THC types are available e With internal Rubidium Oscillator for SSU Type 2 holdover capability e With internal Oven Controlled Oscillator OCXO for SSU Type I amp V holdover capability These above THC types can be mixed together This card selects one of the input reference signals according to different configurable criteria to track the local high performance oscillator in order to filter and attenuate the phase time jitter such as e User defined priority table e Input signal alarms detection e Input signal performance measurements e Synchronization Status Message SSM The THC output signal is forwarded to the Signal Generator Card and consequently to the Output Card in order to distribute precise synchronization signals to all network elements connected to the OSA 5548C SSU unit When both THC are removed or in alarm condition the 5548C enters in pass through operation mode 2 4 8 F Signal Generator Cards SGC SGC card pro
196. ard Start up Sequences When the system is powered up the LEDs of each card embedded in the OSA 5548C SSU should show the sequences described in this chapter R Recommendation Do not remove any card until all the cards have finished their own turn up sequence The THC performs the longest sequence A CAUTION Prior inserting any new card verify that currently inserted cards are well inserted in their respective slot and that they have their locking screws well tightened 5 3 1 PWR Power Card Use the AA 19 149 STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS Status Status STATUS status f Status eS CSS CET ORO raa STATUS DESCRIPTION Once the card is inserted the STATUS LED lights in GREEN If any LED lights in RED check the Voltage fed into POWER Connectors and its fuse refer to section 8 4 4 1 Table 5 1 Power Card Turn up Status OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 5 5 Turn up Procedure 5 3 2 MAC MAnagement Card A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37 z 0000 T Sls 4 A A4 A8 A9 A10 All A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 Figure 2 Management Card Turn up Seq STATUS MST RMT EXP USC Aam Eve ACO DESCRI
197. ard article nbr Fuse specification Fuse article nbr POWER A amp POWER B fuse PWR A A014122 batch of 10 pcs PWR B A014123 SA 250V A014164 Accessories number Printed user s manual A014632 990 500 033 Element Manager on CD ROM A014633 510 EMO A81 Cable RS 232 3meters A012740 957 520 901 TCC PTP Accessories number Duplex optical LC connector te Ethernet Optical SFP A016712 951 208 201 ransceiver Copper SFP transceiver Ea as Ethernet copper SFP A016713 951 208 202 ransceliver OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 3 Ordering Information This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 Glossary Glossary U 1 PPS 100 Base T ACO AID AIS AMI ANSI ATAG AWG B8ZS Bit b Bit s BITS BPV Bytes B BDFB CAN EQPT ESD ESF Micro used to express 0 000001 1 Pulse Per Second signal Ethernet Local Area Network 100 BaseT Ethernet has a transmission speed of 100 Mbps Alarm Cut Off Access IDentifier The AID in a TL1 message uniquely identifies the entity to be acted upon by the input message to the OSA 5548C SSU Alarm Indication Signal a code sent to downstream sites to indicate an upstream failure used to prevent unnecessary downstream alarms Alternate Mark Inversion code type belonging to DS1 signal American National Standards Institute Ameri
198. ards A amp B should show their STATUS LED as GREEN and solid after been very shortly RED 4 Focus on the MAC A card located in slot A17 During the start up sequence it should show the following 1 STATUS LED illuminates in solid GREEN STATUS LED flashes in GREEN 20s All LEDs light very shortly MST LED lights in solid GREEN RMT illuminates in solid GREEN shortly CR MJ and MN LEDs light in sequence one after the other T eS OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 5 3 Turn up Procedure STEP ACTION 7 MST LED Blinks in GREEN 8 Once the MAC MST LED has turned into GREEN solid the communication with the 5548C is possible 5 Except THC Cards all cards should show their STATUS LED in GREEN solid The THC cards remain with a RED STATUS LED until they are able to supply a proper sync clock to the rest of the shelf It is therefore recommended to allow the THC cards ending their warm up procedure which takes up to 30 minutes 6 Once all the cards are showing their STATUS LED in GREEN the 5548C is ready to be provisioned Detailed TL1 commands to provision the 5548C are described in the chapter 6 Advanced users can go to chapter 7 where they can find quick commissioning procedures with fewer details About warm start or restart of each card please refer to the next section Procedure 5 1 Power up OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 5 4 Turn up Procedure 5 3 C
199. are is DEAD being downloaded OK The group is running correctly ALARM The group is in alarm DEGRADED The firmware version is not the same as the rest of the shelf TESTERROR Invalid testing date DEAD The MAC group is not able to communicate This is the SSM state either enabled or disabled PRC SSU_A This is the SSM quality level supplied SSU_B SEC by the SGC This is also the SSM DNU FAILED J 9 4 DISABLED quality supplied by the 5548C OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 127 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters SYS MODE MST EXP INV MST 5548C system mode MST MASTER shelf EXP EXPANSION shelf INV Invalid This is the state of the E1 1 OK FAIL SQLCH OK configuration nr 1 of the E1 PTHRGH generated for OUCs This is the state of the E1 2 OK FAIL SQLCH OK configuration nr 2 of the E1 PTHRGH generated for OUCs This is the state of the E1 El EXP_A OK FAIL SQLCH OK generated for expansion shelf A PTHRGH LINK A TA is the state of the E1 E1_EXP_B gt FAIL SQLCH eng for expansion shelf B FREQ 1 OK FAIL SQLCH oe me IS the state of the Frequency PTHRGH ok nr 1 generated for OUCSs This is the state of the Frequency FREQ EXP A S FAIL SQLCH generated for expansion shelf A HRGH LINK A This is the state of the Frequency FREQ EXP D OK FAIL SQLCH OK generated for expansion shelf B PTHRGH LINK
200. are version error Download the correct firmware in the card with the command ACT DNLD after verified that the firmware is in the MAC card necessary or return the card for repair NTP SYNC Check the server availability check if the mode wait TOD UTC GPS or server failure GPS card is working fine already received Table 8 6 Time Code Card Troubleshooting visible LEDs OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 94 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 7 Note The following procedure is shown when a valid and well NTP server and RJ45 cable is connected to the related input connector Seq STATUS NTP Sync eet DESCRIPTION ERE e RED 1 GREEN RED GE GREEN Fe synchronization TOD UTC GPS received or valid NTP server available GREEN GREEN GREEN NTP worked properly Table 8 7 Time Code Card Turn up Status OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 22 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 2 1 8 MAnagement Card MAC um me pennan STATUS GREEN The card is working correctly No action needed GREEN Flashing The card is being initialized This status is normal at the start up If it remains permanent after 3 minutes follow this procedure 1 Plug out and reinsert the MAC card 2 Ifthe previous action did not recover the card return it for repair STATUS RED The card is defective During the power up sequence the LED can remain red for a short while If the LED stays
201. as equipment specifications and maintenance guidelines are provided in Chapters 3 through 9 e Maintenance Engineers Information on troubleshooting maintenance and equipment technical data is provided in Chapters 6 through 9 The Appendices provide guidelines for analyzing alarms amp events a reference list for TL 1 commands and spare part ordering information 1 1 1 Copyright Notice Copyright 2012 Oscilloquartz SA All Rights Reserved The Oscilloquartz product described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement The contents and information in this document are provided in connection with Oscilloquartz products No license expressed or implied by estoppels or otherwise to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document Except as provided in Oscilloquartz SA s Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products This document is exclusive property of Oscilloquartz SA and may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied reproduced modified translated reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form without prior consent in writing from Oscilloquartz SA Br vards 16 2002 Neuchatel 2 Switzerland Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this guide However Oscilloquartz SA makes no warranties with respect to this documentation and disclaims any implied warranties o
202. ashing on LED corresponding to an input with a Wait To Restore time currently elapsing ORANGE on LED corresponding to an Input Line currently set as Monitored OFF correspond to a disabled input or if all the LEDs are off it means that this INC card is the stand by one Table 5 3 Input Card Turn up Status OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 5 7 5 3 4 Turn up Procedure GPS GPS card as Cs Se d TG 149 19 1489 o L 0000 R E3eeee ES CET Cs polo EG alala 19 1 Om DIG VEE EEE EI Figure 5 4 GPS card Turn up Note The following procedure is shown when a valid and well mounted GPS antenna is connected to the related GPS input connector Seq STATUS a OCXO DESCRIPTION 1 RED RED RED l lnitializaton gt 2 GREEN ED OFF T up and B statellites research 5 min reception is OK Flashing 7200s reception is OK pre tracking phase has ended Table 5 4 Input Card Turn up Status OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 5 8 Turn up Procedure 5 3 5 THC Tracking Holdover Card A O A O o n 0000 16 25259999 RIS ING sec I soc I ouc I ouc I ouc Tt ouc Ti ouc Tou 1 mac alala 101910 DM DM D 1S 10101010 19 16 19 Figure 5 5 Tracking Holdover Card Turn up led STATUS HOLDOVER OSCILLATOR SELECTED DESCRIPTION INPUT RED until Extinguished E
203. at least one input reference is connected and configured correctly Verify the revertive mode if a line has been lost in non revertive mode it will not been reselected Control that no lines are being in Wait To Restore time mode Ifthe SSM mode is enabled control that the input reference DS1 got an higher quality level than the one configured for the holdover mode HOLDOVER RED Flashing FAST START before entering in normal No action needed Usually this status operation fast tracking mode is used to quickly remains approximately 1 minute reduce the frequency offset between internal 8 13 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting ES a R I 9 STT reference with to the bandwidth specified LED is extinguished OSCILLATOR RED OSCILLATOR FAILURE the system has detected a failure on the internal oscillator The active THC should have switched on the second one if 1 1 protected hence the THC card should be returned for repair after a last unsuccessful firmware initialization WARM UP the THC is in warm up condition No action needed during the oscillator s heating period after Power on operating temperature LED is extinguished Table 8 4 Tracking Holdover Card Troubleshooting visible LEDs 8 2 1 5 Signal Generator Card um sme been aon STATUS GREEN The card is working correctly No action needed The card is currently not working or no
204. ate of the total number 2 048E 06 during 1s is higher or equal than the Threshold selected With Frequency signal LOS Loss Of Signal e Signal level is lower than 200mV rms with sine wave e Signal level is lower than 0 6V OOL Out Of Limit e The frequency is not recognised by the system Relative Frequency Offset Af f gt 50ppm RED Flashing Performance Measurement failure MTIE Check the quality of the input line OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 7 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Description error TDEV error Ym Error MTIE and or connected Modify the Performance TDEV and or Ym beyond of the specified threshold if necessary mask The disabled and the unused lines have If it is required to use the line enable and their LED extinguished Only 4 LEDs can be configure it with the command ED EQPT illuminated on the active INC card The Te stand by INC card remains with all its input LEDs extinguished Table 8 1 Input Card Troubleshooting visible LEDs OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 8 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 2 1 2 GPS card GPS um mme vesener aon GREEN gt STATUS GREEN The card is working correctly No action needed RED The card is currently not working or not During the power up sequence the LED can delivering a qualified signal remain red for a while If the LED stays in this status longer it means that the card i
205. ation Verify the INC cards operation and configuration Verify the input lines configuration Verify the input ports cabling f Maintenance amp Troubleshooting paner eten OUT 1 10 RED Flashing No Frequency signal is received to be During the turn up procedure it is normal to f processed and distributed by the OUC card get such alarm until the shelf is able to provide a valid signal to the OUC cards However if this status remains longer follow this procedure Verify the SGC cards operation and configuration Verify the THC cards operation and configuration Verify the INC cards operation and configuration Verify the input lines configuration Verify the input ports cabling OFF The output line group is not configured as If the description does not correspond to the Frequency or no output tile is installed if the E1 behavior currently shown by the shelf follow LED is also OFF the next 1 Verify that output configuration is correct 2 Verify that Output Tile is present OUT 11 20 GREEN The function is working and the E1 signals are No action needed E1 distributed correctly RED An alarm has been detected on at least one of Verify that the output lines connected are the 10 outputs 11 to 20 not shorted if you have enabled this alarm detection Measure each output ports and check that the level and shape are correct If the card is protected 1 1 and the second card does not show any alarm it
206. ax ED EQPT GPS ctag INDOOR indoor Example ED EOPT GPS MYCTAG INDOOR ON OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 89 Operating amp Provisioning To retrieve the position set send the following command Input Syntax RTRV EQPT FPOS ctag Example RTRV EQPT FPOS MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M EE GT COMP LOD lat deg min frac_min long deg min frac_min alt r To edit the position send the following command Input Syntax ED EQPT FPOS ctag lat deg min frac min long deg min frac min alt Example ED EQPT FPOS ctag lat deg min frac min long deg min frac min alt Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters INDOOR ON OFF OFF Enable the GPS to track only one satellite instead of four In that case a fixed position must be programmed A Ss St Latitude 0 90 O Degrees 4 0 89 10 Minutes gt Hin FRAC MIN 10 9999 O Fractionofminue DEG 10 90 10 Degrees S MN 10 89 10 Minutes S FRAC MIN 1 0 9999 O Fractionofminue ALT 1999 18000 O Altitude in meters OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 90 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt GPS Input gt Details gt Position tab Indoor Mode activation Lok Latitude N 46 594919 Longitude E6 5480
207. ble used RED Flashing No connection to the antenna The GNSS When only the GNSS LED is flashing cable can be shorted or opened OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting me enan 1 Check that the GNSS antenna cable When both GNSS and XO LEDs are in RED is correctly connected to the flashing state this means that the input is antenna to the EMP arrestor and to ejected due to performance alarm the 5548C Check that the EMP capsule is not blown Measure the GNSS antenna cable on the antenna side and check that there is about 5 Volts 4 Check the GNSS antenna When both GNSS and XO are flashing ensure that the threshold set is lower than G 811 requirements as the GPS line is not filtered by the THCs at this point OFF The GNSS input is set as disable or the GNSS card is in stand by mode OCXO RED GNSS card s internal oscillator failure The The card should be returned to factory for system has detected a failure on the internal repair oscillator RED Flashing The GNSS card is in pre tracking sequence No action needed This state takes about 200s When both GNSS and XO are flashing When both GNSS and XO LEDs are in RED ensure that the threshold set is lower than flashing state this means that the input is G 811 requirements as the GNSS line is not ejected due to performance alarm filtered by the THC sat this point OFF The oscillator is operating c
208. can be applied to each of the Output Group OG as follow e 2 048MHz according to ITU T G 703 13 e E1 configuration nr 1 according to ITU T G 703 9 e E1 configuration nr 2 according to ITU T G 703 9 The E1 configuration nr 1 and nr 2 are customizable by software and allow the user to select the code type HDB3 or AMI enable CRC 4 configure the Time Slot 16 TS16 structure CCS CAS configure Sa bits configure the Idle code The next sections describe how to configure the 5548C to supply the Output Signal Required 6 9 4 1 Customization of E1 Configurations nr 1 and nr 2 AN Note Only one Sa bit can be configured as SSM AN Warning Do not set an idle code which has very few binary pulses 0x00 0x01 0x10 This configuration can introduce SGC and OUC output alarm OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 130 Operating amp Provisioning Using TL1 To retrieve current setting of the E1 configuration nr 1 and nr 2 use the following command Input Syntax RIRV EOPI SGE i s dd Eez Example RTRV EQPT SGE B1 1 MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMP LD aid CODE code CRC4 crc4 TS16 ts16 SA4 sa4 SA5 sa5 SA6 s a6 SA7 sa7 SA8 sa8 IDLE idle To set any of the two E1 configuration option use the command below Input Syntax ED EQPT SGE aid ctag CODE code CRC4 erc4 TS16 ts16 SA4 sa4 SA5 sa5 SA6 sa
209. can standards body that defines the characteristics and guidelines for telecommunications networks Autonomous Correlation TAG American Wire Gauge Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution Code type belonging to DS1 signal Binary digiT Bit per Second Building Integrated Timing Supply also called SSU TSG or SASE Bipolar Violation Two consecutives bits of the same polarity Sequence of 8 bits Battery Distribution Fuse Bay Controller Area Network Communication bus technology used for internal communication in the OSA 5548C SSU Composite Clock 64 8 kHz signal European Union regulatory community symbol CentiMeters 1 inch 2 54 cm Communication Critical Alarm the higher severity level of alarm Code Violation Correlation TAG Also called SF Super Frame A frame type belonging to the DS1 signal Abbreviation for decibel dB referenced to one milliwatt Direct Digital Synthesis Digital Service level 1 1 544 Mbit s signal also called T1 Don t Use for Synchronization Electro Magnetic Compatibility Electro Magnetic Interference Electro Magnetic Pulse The electromagnetic radiation from a nuclear explosion The resulting electric and magnetic fields may couple with electrical electronic systems to produce damaging current and voltage surges EQuiPmenT ElectroStatic Discharge Extended Super Frame A frame type belonging to the DS1 signal OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 ETSI IT
210. ce not found OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 42 Product Overview 2 5 5 2 Main Features The GPS card is designed to provide the following functions e GNSS signal tracking and processing from up to 24 satellites e Input signal distribution to the THC cards or to the SGC cards when the pass through function is enabled e Performance Measurement and reference disqualification when Performance Thresholds are defined e GNSS card 1 1 protection e Synchronization Status Messaging SSM quality according to the GNSS operation status e Manual position provisioning for location where condition of GNSS reception are bad such as urban canyon e UTC based and GNSS based time source e Remotely software also called firmware upgradeable 2 5 5 3 Operation The user can insert in the shelf e 1 GNSS which makes the shelf available for an input reference from one GNSS antenna e 2 GNSS which makes the shelf available for input reference from two GNSS antennas When two GNSS cards are installed one is active and the other is in stand by The GNSS antenna connectors are 2x BNC 50 ohms located on the Input Tile It is possible to configure each input reference as ENABLE to make it available for selection by the 5548C when qualified by the GNSS card MONITORED in order to measure its performances without allowing the 5548C to select it or DISABLE to disallow the 5548C to select it and to a
211. cedure Including Overview Power up Card Start up Sequences OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 5 1 Turn up Procedure This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 5 2 Turn up Procedure 5 1 Overview N Recommendation The chapter 4 entitled Equipment Installation must be carefully read prior to this chapter This chapter describes the power up procedure and the behaviors shown by each single card inserted in an already powered shelf It does not include the Downloading description Many different scenarios can be shown if the shelf has already been configured and provisioned This section is divided into the following sections e Power Up procedure section explains the instructions amp the precautions to Turn up the shelf as well as its behavior during this procedure e Cards Turn up sequence section describes the LEDs and behaviors during card start up process after insertion 5 2 Power up 7 Note The OSA 5548C SSU does not include a Power switch to switch it on It is controlled by the insertion removal of two fuses T 6 3A L 250V on the POWER A and POWER B card respectively or by the insertion removal of the two POWER cards At this point voltage amp polarity checks are complete STEP ACTION 1 Install the fuse into the POWER B card 2 Install the fuse into the POWER A card 3 Now both POWER c
212. cesses the reference signal from the Tracking Holdover Card THC and delivers 2 048MHz PPS and E1 signals to all of the output cards expansion shelves and PPS outputs The SGC should be protected by the introduction of a second card in the adjacent slot 2 4 9 G OUtput Section The OSA 5548C can distribute different type of Time amp Frequency Services from its OUC slots such as below e E1 2 048MHz e NTP e PTP e E1 retiming OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 27 Product Overview 2 4 9 1 OUtput Card OUC The OSA 5548C can be configured with up to 10 OUC groups Each one distributes twenty output signal references Each card can be protected by the insertion of a redundant card for a maximum of 200 output signals Protected or Unprotected The output connector tile provides 20 output ports divided in 2 groups of 10 outputs which can be configured in e 2 048MHz according to ITU T G 703 13 e E1 configuration nr 1 according to ITU T G 703 9 e E1 configuration nr 2 according to ITU T G 703 9 The E1 configuration nr 1 and nr 2 are customizable by software and allow the user to e select the code type HDB3 or AMI e enable CRC 4 e configure the Time Slot 16 TS16 structure CCS CAS e configure Sa bits e configure the Idle The OSA 5548C has also the capability to show a SHORTED alarm when it detects short circuit on any of an OUC s Output Lines The user can insert one or two OU
213. cribed task suggest other references or even just simplify an explanation AN Recommendation Recommendations advise the user on manufacturer tested methods and procedures proven valuable for correct use and optimum equipment results OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 1 4 Introduction 1 3 Safety Instructions IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS DO NOT DISCARD READ BEFORE OPERATING A GENERAL Exercise extreme care when handling any electronics equipment as it contains precision parts that can be damaged by improper handling Avoid touching connector pin surfaces Foreign matter deposited on contact surfaces can cause corrosion and eventually lead to degradation of performance In addition do not use abrasives to clean contact pin surfaces A ESD CONSIDERATION Each module contains semiconductor devices that can be damaged by electrostatic discharges It is advisable to take anti static precautions when handling electronic boards or static sensitive components Use an approved anti static bracelet in accordance with company practice A WATER AND MOISTURE Do not place containers with liquids such as coffee water sodas etc on this unit Do not operate this equipment in a wet environment A HEATING Do not install this product near heat sources such as radiators air ducts areas subject to direct intense sunlight or other products that produce heat OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision
214. cription name configurations parameters MAN INPUT IL 1 1 IL 2 4 GPS IL 1 1 When the MAN Manual mode is enabled this variable identifies the specific line to be select ACT_INPUT IL 1 1 IL 2 4 GPS IL 1 1 This is the line currently selected NONE by the 5548C Not configurable only upon command answer Using SyncView Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt THC gt Details Manual Input Mode OSA Clock Selection of O Auto ON OSA Manual input 6 Manual m ER Clock Orr when this mode Forced Haldav activated Cancel Aooly Rete h Switching mode Figure 6 15 SyncView THC Details OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 114 Operating amp Provisioning 6 8 3 Priorities Configuration A Note To retrieve current IL configuration refer to section 6 5 3 Read section Input connector to Input Line IL description to understand the concept of cross connection of input lines to physical input ports The OSA 5548C SSU can be fed with up to 9 inputs signal 2x 4 from the INC groups and 1 from the GPS group which can be configured with different priorities Example If the IL 1 1 is fed with a signal coming from a Primary Reference Source PRS and the IL 1 3 from an E1 leased line it is possible to configure the priority 1 for the IL 1 1 and a lower priority for the IL 1 3 A Note The priorities are only taken in consideration when
215. ction describes how to connect a 5548C extension shelf e Cabling communication ports section explains cabling to connect a local and or remote management system If any difficulties are encountered during the installation process contact your local OSCILLOQUARTZ representative or OSCILLOQUARTZ offices OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 3 Equipment Installation 4 2 Unpacking A CAUTION Check first that the packing does not have any signs of rough handling such as dents or scratches which might have occurred during transportation Also inspect the equipment carefully for possible damage broken knobs bent handles etc Should the equipment have suffered any damage immediately notify the carrier and retain the packing material for inspection AA Recommendation We recommend saving the packing material for use in case of return shipment Should you need to return the equipment please do not hesitate to contact OSCILLOQUARTZ for help in obtaining appropriate packing material A CAUTION When handling the OSA 5548C SSU unit or spare cards the operator must use grounded wrist straps Ad CAUTION Spare cards must be stored in anti static packaging Note S Compare the OSA 5548C SSU contents with the purchase order order acknowledgement In case of error contact your local OSCILLOQUARTZ representative or OSCILLOQUARTZ offices OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K Oct
216. ction 6 9 1 2 For Output Group information refer to section 6 9 1 3 Input Syntax RIRV EQOPT OUC s l e eE Example RTRV EQPT OUC 3 MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD aid opstate SHORTED shorted Parameter Possible Default bm Cote is the card group on which you want to retrieve or to edit the configuration OPSTATE EMPTY There are nine different OUC EXTRACTED INIT group states DOWNLOAD OK EMPTY The group slots are empty ALARM EXTRACTED The group has been DEGRADED extracted from its respective slots TESTERROR DEAD INIT The group is being restarted DOWNLOAD The group firmware is being downloaded OK The group is running correctly ALARM The group is in alarm DEGRADED The firmware version is not the same as the rest of the shelf TESTERROR Invalid testing date DEAD The MAC group is not able to communicate OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 129 6 9 4 Operating amp Provisioning When ON OUC group detects and generates an alarm if any of its output lines are shorted short circuit when no cards are active Output Signal Type and Configuration Different output signal types can be supplied by the OSA 5548C SSU through its OUC OUtput Card cards For the output signal type configuration e g 2 048MHz E1 the OSA 5548C SSU has to be configured by software 3 configuration types
217. cy Input Connector eee e ee e ee ee ee ee ee eeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeees 4 18 Procedure 4 5 Cabling an E1 Input Connector eee eee e ee e ee e 4 19 Procedure 4 6 Cabling a GPS Input Connector eee e e e e 4 19 Procedure 4 7 Cabling an E1 or Freq port from an Asym Output Tile with CEI connectors 4 22 Procedure 4 8 Cabling Output port from Output Tile with SUB D 25pins connectors 4 23 Procedure 4 9 Cabling the BNC Remote panel eee eee 4 25 Procedure 4 10 Cabling the SUB D Remote panel eee 4 27 Procedure 4 11 Cabling a PPS Output Connector xs ccc ee 4 29 Procedure 4 12 External Alarm Input Connection esse ee eee ee eee e e ee 4 32 Procedure 4 13 Output Alarm COnnection cccccceccceeeseeecneeeneeeseceseceeeteceseeeseeseeeseeenesseeteeeees 4 34 Procedure 5 1 POWwer Up rrrrnannnnrnannnnnnannnnrnarnasnnnennnnnnrnarnannnernannnrnuenunnnernasnnnenunnnnnennasnnennunnnnssneen 5 4 Procedure 6 1 Serial Connection sese eee eee 6 16 Procedure 6 2 Serial Connection with SyncView PLUS eee eee ee e 6 17 Procedure 6 3 Ethernet Connection sese ee eee ee eee 6 19 Procedure 6 4 Ethernet Connection with SyncView PLUS eee ee ee eee e 6 20 Procedure 6 5 SyncTerminal Communication Configuration and Set up sss eee eee ee ee ee ee e e 6 32 Procedure 6 6 Typing TL1 Commands rrrnnnnnnnnnanennnrnnnnnnanennnnnnanennnrnnanennennnanenanennanenanennnsennnennn 6 35 Procedure 7 1 Serial Connection sese eee eee 7 5 Procedure 7
218. d as in the example below the operator can press CTRL Cursor right to choose it and CTRL Cursor down to select it IS1 4 FREQ 1 FREQ 2 CC 1 CC 21 ADM STATE DISABLED MONITORED ENABLED TERMINATION TERMINATED BRIDGI K Km ED EQPT IL 21 1 MYCTAG Once selected the operator can press CT RL Cursor right to choose a setting in the list of suggestions Finding a string in the previous responses To find information among the previous responses the operator can press the keys CTRL F or select the item in the top menu called Edit erminal Connected on 149 133 ands isk Table 6 8 Keyboard Shortcuts for Typing TL1 Commands OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 36 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 6 10 Making TL1 Command Scripts It is possible to create a sequence of TL1 commands to avoid retyping the same sequence of commands Press the button below Sync Term val Terminal E Tools Window Help E amp DID l a al y5 I i The following window appears allowing to enter sequence of commands Script Editor Sel x This is the command editor to write the commands script Check this box to repeat the script continuously once launched To load a script press this button and browse the computer Press this button to save a script in any place on your computer Once the script is ready run it sm pressing the button ok C Auto Repe Load
219. d drawing numbers for each component Card Spares amp Replacements Article Ponerhcat TEH Poses famanne aman Input Card INC 4 inputs per card S Generator Card SGC no expansion shelf A014458 942 085 991 20 oee e a T L Blank Panels for unused INC GPS SGC OUC NTP PTP MAC batch of 20 Ba Pr GREN GPS SES ONTP P a T 982 080 304 51 Blank Panels for unused THC batch of 10 A014155 982 080 312 51 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 1 Ordering Information Article rae Terang aomas OB 20x MHz E1 output Tile with dual 20 pins flat cable connectors IDC for Remote BNC panel A014635 942 089 294 10 NTP Output Tile A015509 942 089 266 Blank Output tile A014166 982 080 312 51 Remote Panels Article i 100 on Ri8 able Tor Remate parei NTP cmnecion AEB19 85708010 20x 20x MHZ E1 output Tile with 20x CEI 1 0 2 3 asymetrical output Tile with 20x CEI 1 0 2 3 20x MHZ E1 output Tile with 20x CEI 1 0 2 3 asymetrical 20x MHz E1 output Tile with 10x SUB D 9 symetrical 2 outputs per SUB D A014921 942 060 872 Blank panel Blank panel for Remote Output Tile Remote Blank panel for Remote Output Tile Tile A014730 982 060 616 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 Ordering Information Fuse Parts amp Replacement The values and specifications for each card s fuse can be found in the following table Card type ts Card type ts C
220. d firmware is being downloaded Remedial action Waiting until the end of the download or aborting the download OK The card is ACTIVE and is working correctly Remedial action No action required STANDBY The card is in STAND BY and ready to protect the active card within the same group Remedial action Should you need to activate the card which shows this status please refer to section 6 4 5 2 in order to replace the active card with this one ALARM The card is in alarm Remedial action Check the current alarm with the command RTRV ALM and initiate corrective action accordingly DEGRADED The firmware version is different than the rest of the shelf Remedial action Upgrade the card firmware with the firmware stored in the MAC cards TESTERROR Invalid testing date The card has encountered a mismatching error about the date when it has been tested Remedial action Contact your Oscilloquartz Customer Support service DEAD The MAC is not able to communicate with the card Remedial action Restart the card software and contact the Oscilloquartz Customer Support service OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 55 Operating amp Provisioning The following command is required to obtain the current state from any card or slot Input Syntax RTRV EOQPT OP aid ctag Example RTRV EQPT OP INC 1 A MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD aid
221. d fixed telecommunication networks The OSA 5548C SSU is a timing signal regenerator distributor housed in a 6U subrack 19 or ETSI equipped with convenient front access plug in cards with optimized grouping of functionalities All cards may be duplicated for full system redundancy from the inputs to the user outputs by simple insertion of a second adjacent card for 1 1 functionality protection Duplicating the cards for full system redundancy does not impact on the maximum input or output capacity of the SSU dedicated section for redundant modules An additional security pass through function for extreme clock signal availability is also implemented making the unit truly failure proof Insert one or both of the available integrated GPS modules to transform your SSU into a Primary Reference Source fully compliant to G 811 standards Several types of connectors are available on the main shelf or through a Remote panel with easy plug in connections The equipment is locally accessible RS 232 using an intuitive graphical user interface and remotely manageable TCP IP via SyncView PLUS The OSA 5548C SSU has been designed on a truly flexible modular basis allowing multiple equipment configurations to meet all current and future synchronization requirements By simple insertion of modules the operator can upgrade any function of an initial configuration to a fully redundant one upgrading does not require powering off of the unit and doe
222. d the following command Input Syntax RTRV EQPT GNSS ctag Example RTRV EQPT GNSS MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M otag COMPLD opstate ssm PPS OFFSET pps offset ADM STATE adm state INDOOR indoor ELEVATION elevation FRCD fred VISIBLE visible TRACKED tracked r To edit all the parameters send the following command Input Syntax ED EQPT GNSS ctag GLN A GLN B CTAG PPS OFFSET pps offset INDOOR indoor ELEVATION elevation ANTENA STATE enable disable GNSS MODE GPSI amp GLONASS I amp SBAS Example ED EQPT GNSS GLN A MYCTAG PPS OFFSET 274 INDOOR OFF ELEVATION 15 ANTENA STATE ENABLE GNSS MODE GPS amp GLONASS Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters OPSTATE OK ALARM Depends on GPS Operation state PERFALARM state OK The system works correctly ALARM GPS reception in alarm PRFALARM Performance crosses the quality threshold PRC SSU A PRC when SSM quality supplied by the GPS SSU_B SEC locked DNU group DNU NONE when DISABLED unlocked PPS OFFSET 999 999 999999 O 1 PPS offset OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 100 Operating amp Provisioning ADM STATE ENABLED ENABLED Administrative state of the line MONITORED ENABLED the line can be DISABLED selected MONITORED the line is measured but ignored for selection DISABLED The line is deac
223. ding 10 groups in 1 1 protection e ITU T G 703 13 Nominal 75 O ASYM or 120 Q SYM Failed when the amplifier is detected as defective e Shorted when the output line impedance is too low Specifications Connector BNC 50 Q female Label amp location PPS 1 amp PPS 2 located on the Management tile PPS Width 20 us Rise time lt 30ns Level lt SV Impedance 500 Synchronization To UTC Universal Time Coordinate when at least one GPS cards is locked on GPS satellites Table 9 5 Output Specifications 9 5 1 NTP TCC NTP Connector 1x Ethernet TCP IP RJ 45 connector 10 or 100 Base T on NTP connector tiles Label NTP PORT Ports Up to 10 Configuration Up to 10 TCC NTP cards NTP RFC 1305 Version 3 SNTP RFC 4330 Version 4 Precision 25us when locked to GPS Management e HTTP e TL1 via common 5548C management system Encryption 64 bits RSA MD5 encryption TCP IP Configuration DHCP Fixed IP Table 9 6 NTP Specifications 9 5 2 PTP TCC PTP Connector SFP cage that can hosts both electrical and optical transceiver Label PTP PORT Ports 1 on front panel Configuration Up to 6 E60 or 20 E200 TCC PTP cards PTP IEEE 1588 v2 Precision 50ns when locked to GPS Management e SVP e TL1 via common 5548C management system TCP IP Configuration DHCP Fixed IP Table 9 7 PTP Specifications OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 7 9 6 Alarms 9 6 1 General Alar
224. ds are installed one is active and the other is in stand by The GPS antenna connectors are 2x BNC 50 ohms located on the Input Tile It is possible to configure each input reference as ENABLE to make it available for selection by the 5548C when qualified by the GPS card MONITORED in order to measure its performances without allowing the 5548C to select it or DISABLE to disallow the 5548C to select it and to avoid reporting alarms about it In cooperation with the THC group the GPS can also disqualify its input reference if it crosses a user defined Performance Threshold The GPS group delivers one input signal to the THC group It provides also a clock to the SGC group in case of Passthrough mode when both THC cards are removed or being in warm up or failure As soon as the GPS card is powered it starts researching and acquiring GPS satellites This sequence should last 5 minutes Then the GPS internal filtering system enters in pre tracking phase for 200s Thereafter the GPS card is able to provide its signal to the rest of the shelf OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 40 2 5 4 4 GPS Block Diagram Antenna GPS Engine Product Overview OCXO Internal Communication Bus Phase Measurement system 8kHz GPS Reference 48V lt gt lt gt Micro processor le gt gt gt gt gt 3V3
225. dundancy Each individual card can be protected one for one by inserting an adjacent protection card except for the Management Card The insertion of protection card does not require any type of configuration The newly inserted card will automatically get the configuration of the card already inserted in the same group 2 3 11 Firmware download The OSA 5548C SSU incorporates a FTP File Transfer Protocol client which allows upgrading every single card remotely When a card firmware is different than the whole shelf release the system automatically informs the user Then the user can easily upgrade the card in question in two clicks via the management software Thus the OSA 5548C SSU always insures that all cards firmware matches together and provide easy and comfortable release management 2 3 12 TL1 Protocol The OSA 5548C SSU uses the TL1 Transaction Language 1 protocol to communicate TL1 was defined in the 80 s by Bellcore now Telcordia and is the dominant management protocol for controlling telecommunications networks in North America China and other parts of the world The TL1 protocol consists of a set of ASCII messages or instructions that a terminal emulator the SyncTerminal and the SyncView PLUS use to handle the OSA 5548C SSU functions OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 24 Product Overview 2 4 System Description 2 4 1 Introduction The OSA 5548C SSU is divided in different
226. e Like the Input Lines the GPS input lines can be e Enabled to activate the selection and qualify the line e Monitored to allow the performance measurement of the line but ignoring it within the Input selection e Disabled to deactivate the line OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 84 Operating amp Provisioning Indoor In Urban Canyon locations the GPS can be set as Indoor mode to operate with only one GPS satellite tracked The user must set manually the GPS position latitude longitude and altitude when using the Indoor mode Elevation To avoid receiving bad GPS signal from reflection an elevation mask can be set to decrease the reception angle of the antenna S GPS Antenna Forced The GPS card can generate a user defined SSM quality for input selection in SSM mode When the Forced mode is not enabled the SSM quality supplied are the following e PRC when the GPS signal is tracked e DNU when the GPS signal is not tracked Visible Number of Satellites Vehicles available from the GPS antenna location Tracked Number of Satellites vehicles currently tracked by the GPS receiver at least 4 must be tracked to determine the GPS antenna position and one if the position is entered in Indoor mode The GPS receiver can track up to 12 Satellites vehicles at the same time 7 Note The properties are those of the active GPS card OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October
227. e at www oscilloquartz com COMPANY CERTIFICATION e Certified since 1987 by the Swiss Accreditation Service as an accredited laboratory for time and frequency e Certified ISO 9001 since 1994 and ISO 14001 since 2000 by The Swiss Association for Quality and Management Systems SQS OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 1 9 Introduction This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 1 10 Product Overview Chapter 2 Product Overview Including Introduction 2 Main Applications Main Functions System Description 2 System Components amp Operation Communication Synchronization Status Messaging SSM Alarms OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 1 Product Overview This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 2 2 1 Product Overview Introduction The OSA 5548C Synchronization Supply Unit SSU is the latest product of a range of similar devices designed for Telecom Network Synchronization complying with the highest standards The unit incorporates the latest technological innovations and features for the most demanding present and future network requirements The OSA 5548C SSU is the most compact and high performance unit available on the market today for the synchronization of mobile an
228. e card lights its STATUS LED GREEN and make a LAMP TEST to confirm Tighten the card locking screws Procedure 8 6 Single Card Fuse Replacement OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 48 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 5 Repair amp Return When you need to return a defective part for factory repair follow this procedure STEP 1 ACTION Gather the following information a full description of the trouble alarms behavior etc part or article number serial number firmware version Contact the Oscilloquartz technical support if you are not sure about the trouble Fill a RMA request form and send it to your Oscilloquartz representative We in turn will issue a RMA number ex 1001234 and inform you of a standard repair cost if applicable and an estimated repair time If not we will quote you the repair price after evaluation of the part Once you receive the RMA number you can then proceed in returning the faulty material to our premises stating the RMA number on your export documents 1 Place your packing slip delivery note inside the original parcel or contact Support if cartons are required and state Repair amp Return and the RMA given above The material must be returned in the original packaging or approved replacement packaging with ESD Electro Static Discharge protection for the warranty to be respected Shipment has to be made from your location to our fac
229. e delay etc are used for replacement The use of repaired fuses and the short circuiting of fuse holders must be avoided Whenever it is likely that the protection offered by fuses has been impaired the equipment must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 1 6 Introduction LX POWER CORD PROTECTION The customer supplied power cables connected to the 5548C should be routed or installed in such a manner to protect it from being walked on or pinched The unit should be powered down completely before connecting or disconnecting the power cable The power cord should be removed before moving the unit The power cord must be placed near an easily accessible unobstructed socket outlet A CLEANING Connected and running equipment can only be dusted using a soft dry cloth ONLY WITH AUTHORIZED PERMISSION OUT OF SERVICE amp UNPLUGGED equipment can be cleaned with a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution Do not use liquid cleaners aerosols abrasive pads scouring powders or solvents such as benzine or alcohol Ensure the surface cleaned is fully dry before reconnecting power AN SERVICING AND MODIFICATIONS To avoid dangerous electric shock do not perform any servicing or modifications other than what is recommended in this User Manual Do not attempt to gain access to areas of the unit where dangerous voltages are pr
230. e ee 2 31 Figure 2 20 Physical Card Description e sese eee 2 34 Figure 2 21 INput Card INCI 2 36 Figure 2 22 Input Card Block Diagram sss eee ee ee ee 2 38 Figure 229 SEN ve 2 39 Figure 2 24 GPS Card Block Diagram sse sese eee 2 41 Figure 2 20 GNSS Card GLN 2 42 Figure 2 26 GNSS Card Block Diagram sese eee eee 2 44 Figure 2 27 Tracking Holdover Card THC sese 2 45 Figure 2 28 Tracking Holdover Card Block Diagram sese ee eee eee 2 47 Figure 2 29 Signal Generator Card SGC s 2 48 Figure 2 30 Signal Generator Card Block Diagram eee e 2 50 Figure 2 31 OUtput Card QUC sse 2 51 Figure 2 32 Output Card Block Diagram se sese eee ee 2 53 Figure 2 33 Time Code Card NTP TCG NTP rrrrenonanonnnnnranenannnnannnanennnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnennennnanennnennn 2 54 Figure 2 34 Time Code Card NTP TCG NTP rrrranoranennnnnranennnnrnannnanennnnnnnnrnnannnnnennennnanennnennn 2 55 Figure 2 35 NTP Card Block Diagram sss sese eee ee eee 2 57 Figure 2 36 Time Code Card PTP TCC PTP rrranennnnnnanennnnrnanrnnnnnnanennnnnnanennnnnnanennanennnennnne 2 58 Figure 2 37 LOAD SHARING TCC PTP ronnnnannnnnnnnannnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnanennnnnnnnrennrnnanennnnenanennnsene 2 60 Figure 2 38 MAnagement Card MAC 2 61 Figure 2 39 MAnagement Card Block Diagram sese eee eee 2 63 Figure 2 40 Power Cards PWR sese eee 2 64 Figure 2 41 5548C SSU E200 Rear View eee ee ee 2 66 Figure 2 42 Co
231. e the input line selection mode Automatic Manual e The input line priorities to program the input selection to the user preferences e The Signal tracking and filtering performed by the MADDS Manual amp Automatic Direct Digital Synthesis system embedded in the THCs e The pass through mode 6 8 1 THC Group State AN Note The command response refers to the THC group status and not to individual THC card status The THC cards handle the input line switching signal processing and filtering For retrieving the current THC status use the following command Input Syntax RTRV EQPT THC ctag The response is formatted as below The following description will focus only on the THC configuration Other parameters concerning the switching are presented in the next sections Output Syntax siad date time M otag COMPLD opstate MAN INPUT man input MODE mode ACT INPUT act input SSM ssm SYS MODE sys mode r OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 111 Operating amp Provisioning name configurations parameters OPSTATE EMPTY OK There are different THC group states EXTRACTED EMPTY The group slots are empty INIT EXTRACTED The group has been extracted DOWNLOAD from their respective slots OK ALARM INIT The group is being restarted DEGRADED DOWNLOAD The group firmware is being TESTERROR downloaded DEAD OK The group is running correctly ALARM The group is in alarm DEGRADED
232. ection Ethernet Speed Duplex mode Using TL1 To retrieve current setting of the TCC NTP Input Syntax RIRV EOPT 1CC dd 0 SG Example RIRV EOPT ICC TOLA MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M otag COMP LOU aid IPADDRESSSXXX XXX XXX XXX NETMASK XXX XXX XXX XXX GATEWAY xxx XXX XXX xxx DHCP MODE ENABLED ETHER_SDEF MAN UAL ETHER SPEED 100 DUPLEX MODE FULL OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 140 Operating amp Provisioning The next sections describe how to configure the TCC NTP TCC NIP Details A 36 state General Authentication ETP Inventory Up to 8 caracters lower case upper case and numbers 1 9 Cancel Apply Refresh NTP authentication adds a level of security to your NTP configuration You configure an NTP key string on each device The key is encrypted using a Message Digest 5 MD5 hashing algorithm and the encrypted key is passed in each NTP packet Before an NTP packet is processed the key is checked against the configured key on the receiving device NE Ex GPS antenna Key 2 STRATUM 1 5548C TCC NTP STRATUM 1 5548C TCC NTP OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 141 Operating amp Provisioning To set any of the two E1 configuration option use the command below Input Syntax BD EOPLTHICC rs aid CTAG IPADDRESS fart frr NE
233. ective and should be returned for repair RED Flashing There is a firmware version error Download the correct firmware in the card with the command ACT DNLD after verified that the firmware is in the MAC card necessary or return the card for repair NTP SYNC Check the server availability check if the mode wait TOD UTC GPS or server failure GPS card is working fine already received Table 8 9 Time Code Card NTP Troubleshooting visible LEDs OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 96 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting J Note The following procedure is shown when a valid and well NTP server and RJ45 cable is connected to the related input connector Seq STATUS NTP Sync Ethernet DESCRIPTION Initialization RED flashing Initialization received or valid NTP server available GREEN RED GREEN No GPS TOD received check GPS card car GREEN GREEN GREEN NTP worked properly Table 8 10 Time Code Card NTPTurn up Status OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 27 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 10 Power Card an Description SE The card is working and the power is No action needed distributed correctly No power is detected Measure the voltage on the power The POWER card s fuse is failed connectors and verify that it is inside the specified range Measure the fuse located on the front panel of the MAC card and replace it if necessary If the ca
234. ectly ALARM The group is in alarm DEGRADED The firmware version is not the same as the rest of the shelf TESTERROR Invalid testing date DEAD The MAC group is not able to communicate OFF ON OFF Indicates if the SSM is ON or OFF PERF OFF ON ALARM ON Indicates if the PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT is activated deactivated or in alarm SYS MODE MST EXP INV MST 5548C system mode MST MASTER shelf EXP EXPANSION shelf INV Invalid OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 70 Operating amp Provisioning 6 5 4 Input Connector Assignment 6 5 4 1 Editing the Input Lines To assign an input line to any connector in the related group the following command can be sent J Note To retrieve current IL configuration refer to section 6 5 3 Read section Input connector to Input Line IL description to understand the concept of cross connection of input lines to physical input ports AA Recommendation We recommend using any of the Input Connectors number 1 E1_1 or FREQ 1 for Input Line IL 1 Input Connector 2 for IL 2 Input Connector 3 for IL3 and Input Connector 4 for IL 4 So the user knows what Input Line corresponds to what connector without the need to access the shelf with software for retrieving and knowing current Input configuration Using TL1 Input Syntax ED EQPT IL aid ctag INPUT input Example ED EQPT IL 1 3 MYCTAG INPUT E1 3 name configurations AID 1 1
235. ector Description 2 5 12 3 Main features The POWER cards are designed to provide the following functions e Distribute the power into all cards e Present main fuses on front panel e POWER A card has a switch for LED test e POWER B has serial RS 232C connector for local management e POWER B card stores the network parameters OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 65 Product Overview 2 5 13 Connectors Panel Layout A122 A123 A124 A125 OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM POWER B ALARM OUT POWER A NI KB GROUP 1 mq v L gt 2 0 EXT 0 2 2 2 ASMA 7 7N A N o o INPUTS lt S ao FR I J NA WA 23 ag J L J 25 25 a OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM 40 60V OC 6 3A 40 60V OC 6 3A IS OSCILLOQUARTZ K S 0000000000000 pe tE ALARM OUT 000000000000 BjosciLLOQUARTZ Za Ea GROUP 2 O 0 Ko PPS 2 v S helfis powered by redundant DC power S ources with Hazardous N energy Disconnectban
236. eesaeeeeseecseeseeseneeeseeeeses 4 30 Figure 4 21 External Input Alarm Connector eee eee ee ee ee ee 4 31 Figure 4 22 External Input Alarm Application ese e ee e ee ee e 4 31 Figure 4 23 Output Alarm Connection sse eee ee ee e ee 4 33 Figure 4 24 Output Alarm Application rrronrrnnornnrraneranennnrnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnennnevnnennnernnennsennennennneene 4 34 Figure 4 25 Local management Port location on the sher sese eee eee 4 35 Figure 4 26 Local management port location on Remote Panel sese eee eee 4 36 Figure 4 27 LAN Comm Port Location on 55480 shelte 4 37 Figure 4 28 LAN Com Port location on Remote anei see eee 4 37 Figure 5 1 Power Card Turn up sss sese eee 5 5 Figure 5 2 Management Card Turn up sss sese eee 5 6 FIGURE 9 0 Talep eT TUM Ne 5 7 Figure B GPS card TUM UD ee 5 8 Figure 5 5 Tracking Holdover Card Turn up sss eee ee ee 5 9 Figure 5 6 Signal Generator Card TUrn Up see eee eee 5 11 Figure ST lt Output Card TUM UD Lanes Nanana OREA aR ENR ERARA nEaN 5 12 Figure 6 1 Local Comm Port Connection eee ee 6 12 Figure 6 2 SyncTerminal Main Window sse eee ee eee e 6 24 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 XI List of Figures Figure 6 3 SyncTerminal Short Cut Menu sse eee ee e e e e 6 25 Figure 6 4 SyncTerminal Short Cut Menu sse eee ee ee eee 6 26 Figure 6 5 SyncTerminal Main or Command Menu sese ee ee ee ee e 6 27 Figure 6 6 SyncView PLUS time and date sss 6
237. elled Protocol OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 28 Operating amp Provisioning STEP ACTION Scripts N Display Select Shelf gt EE Use MML Protocol Select MML management commands for the selected Shelf DB Use TL1 Protocol Select TL1 management commands for the selected Shelf C Program Files Oscilloquartz SyncT erminal 2 al 4 Select the 5548C in the Select Shelf list Scripts S Display gt Protocol E selected Shelf Use TL1 Protocol Select TL1 management commands for the selected Shelf C Program FilesyO scilloquartzYSyneT erminal 2 Eg 5 Select TL1 and press the button with to browse the computer in order to find the corresponding data file dat OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 29 Operating amp Provisioning STEP ACTION 5 cripts 7 Display N Protocol T Select Shelf L Use MML Protocol Select MML management commands for the selected Shelf za Use TL1 Protocol Select TL1 management commands for the selected Shelf C Program Files Oscilloquartz SyncT ermin a i 6 Select the corresponding file which should be as shown below TL148CSSU dat and press the button Open Aiii Look in 3 SyncTeminal 215 oe jt mml33C dat ts El mml488 dat My Recent mml81c dat I apine mml5240 dat 3 Saa dat ses TL1524
238. ent vendor s name MODEL 5548C This is the equipment model s name NETYPE This is the equipment type 01000 99999 This is the software release of the shelf Table 6 9 5548C Type Information To get the serial number of the shelf the following command is required OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 51 Operating amp Provisioning Input Syntax RTRV INV SYS ctag The response should be Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD serial shelftype Range SCO Description SERIAL 100 4294967295 This is the equipment serial number SHELFTYPE SSU_L SSU_S OSA 5548C SSU type SSU_S OSA 5548C SSU E60 SSU_L OSA 5548C SSU E200 6 4 3 2 Inventory Physically Inspection Find the inventory of every single card at the following locations illustrated below Serial Number NN 0 00 64 Article Number S gt OSCILLOQUARTZ Card type Figure 6 8 Article Number amp Card Type Location OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 52 Operating amp Provisioning J Note The AOQxxxxx number located on the connector is not the card s article number reference Pleas refer to the AOxxxxx article number located on the bail handle Using TL1 With the following commands retrieve the inventory from either a single card a group of cards or from all installed cards simultaneously Inout Syntax RTRV INV aid ctag Exam
239. ernet Port Configuration 7 Note If the OSA 5548C has never been connected via Ethernet port you must configure the Ethernet parameters via a direct serial connection as detailed in the section 6 2 3 send the following TL1 command replacing the bold letter words with the setting required to configure ED COM SYS ctag IPADDRESS ipaddress NETMASK netmask GWLADDRESS gwladdress GWINETMASK gwlnetmask GW2ADDRESS gw2address GW2NETMASK gw2netmask ETHER SPEED 10 100 Example ED COM SYS MYCTAG IPADDRESS 149 133 41 25 NETMASK 255 255 255 254 GWLADDRESS 149 133 40 1 GWINETMASK 255 255 255 252 ETHER SPEED 100 To check the Ethernet parameters use the following TL1 command Input Syntax KIRV GOM 5SESs etad Table 6 4 Ethernet Parameters OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 18 STEP Operating amp Provisioning Ethernet Connection Note Prior to communicate remotely with the OSA 5548C SSU shelf it is required to set the Ethernet parameters IP Gateway and Subnet mask addresses using a direct serial port connection following section 6 2 4 1 ACTION Connect the 5548C SSU to the LAN with an Ethernet cable 100 Base T category 5 with RJ 45 connectors Refer to section 4 7 for more details Connect one Ethernet cable end into the RJ 45 connector as shown on the Figure 4 27 LAN Comm Port Location Test the connection with a PING to the shelf s IP Using
240. esent Refer servicing to qualified service personnel AN DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE e Refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions e When the power supply cord is damaged e If liquid has been spilled into the enclosure of the unit e fthe product does not function normally by following the instructions in the User s Manual Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require rework by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation e If the product has been damaged in any way e When the unit displays a negative distinct change in performance OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 1 7 Introduction 1 4 Warranty This Oscilloquartz product carries a warranty which commences from date of dispatch from factory Unless agreed otherwise or stipulated differently on the original acknowledgement of order the duration of the warranty is twenty four months It applies to demonstrably faulty material or poor workmanship but excludes batteries Oscilloquartz shall bear only the cost of repair or replacement in its own premises Should this not be possible for reasons beyond our control all additional costs are at customer expense Repairs under warranty carry either the balance of the original warranty or a six months warranty whichever is longer Dam
241. evision K October 2012 2 44 Product Overview 2 5 6 Tracking Holdover Card THC 2 5 6 1 Physical Layout LED OSCILLOQUARTZ Status 5548C SSU STATUS E ZS HOLDOVER lg osciLLATOR SELECTED INPUT Holdover Oscillator Selected Figure 2 27 Tracking Input Holdover Card THC DESCRIPTION e RED Solid The card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure Note that at the start up this status remains until the THC is able to provide a proper clock signal usually once the warm up sequence has ended e RED Flashing Version error e ORANGE Solid Card s firmware is being upgraded e GREEN Solid Card system is working properly e OFF Card is not working at all e RED Solid Holdover Freerun e RED Flashing Fast Start up e RED Solid Oscillator failure e RED Flashing Oscillator in Warm up The displayed number is the input line IL currently selected by the system 1 to 8 are IL from the INC group i e 1 IL 1 1 2 IL 1 2 Gis the GPS IL When the dot lit it means that at least one Input Line is qualified by the INC group The dash means that the THC is in holdover or in freerun mode Table 2 5 Tracking Holdover Card THC LED Description A Note e For detailed THC LED status description refer to section 8 2 1 e For ordering Information refer to 0 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 45 Product Overview 2 5 6 2
242. evision K October 2012 6 78 Termination Operating amp Provisioning ME Performances Input Alarm Detection 55M Bit NONE E OOF AMI url CRCA BPV E Out Of Frame CRC 4 BiPolar Violation g Wait to restore Time Alarm Type Out Of Frame DISABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Enabled Disabled Refresh Determine whether an Out Of Frame alarm should be detected and generated or not 10 4 10 3 or 10 2 means that the alarms are enabled with a specific threshold i e 10E 4 10E 3 or 10E 2 In that case an alarm is produced when false words rate of the total number 4000 during 1s is higher or equal than the selected Threshold Determine whether a CRC 4 alarm should be detected and generated or not 10 4 10 3 amp 10 2 enables the alarm detection threshold i e 10E 4 10E 3 or 10E 2 In that case an alarm is produced when false CRC 4 values rate of the total number 1000 during 1s is higher or equal than the selected Threshold 6 79 Operating amp Provisioning Determine whether a Bipolar Violation BPV alarm when using AMI code or Code Violation alarm when using HDB3 code should be detected and generated or not 10 4 10 3 amp 10 2 enables the alarm detection threshold i e 10E 4 10E 3 or 10E 2 In that case an alarm is produced when BPV or CV rate of the total number
243. f merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Oscilloquartz SA shall not be liable for any errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or the examples herein OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 1 3 Introduction Oscilloquartz SA may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice 1 2 Reading Guide Special icons attracting your attention precede important and or critical information in this document Hereafter are explanations of each icon AN CAUTION This symbol is extremely important and must not be neglected It precedes information or procedures regarding installation operation or maintenance Follow all steps or procedures as instructed to avoid any damage to equipment or serious personal injury LX ELECTRICAL SHOCK HARZARD This warning symbol is extremely important and must not be neglected It indicates that there are dangerous high voltages present inside the enclosure of this product and precedes important warnings to avoid any risk of fire or electrical shock that could lead to serious personal injury or loss of life Ad ESD CAUTION Electrostatic Discharge ESD must be avoided so as not to damage or destroy static sensitive components A Note A note symbol informs the reader that additional information on the related subject is provided in order to simplify a des
244. g to the line with the next lower priority than the one just disabled 1 to 8 on the THC corresponds to IL 1 1 to IL 1 4 and G corresponds to GPS Note If the new selected line has a WTR time configured wait until that the delays has elapsed or initialize the WTR with the following TL1 command before disabling the next input line INIT WTR 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 CTAG Enable the lines to restore them as per their initial configuration status ED EQPT IL IL 1 1 IL 1 2 IL 1 3 IL 1 4 GPS CTAG ADM STATE ENABLED Procedure 7 28 Input Line Priority Configuration Test OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 32 Commissioning 7 3 8 Redundant Card Stand by Test Procedure When there are two cards in the INC group in the GPS group or in the THC group one of the cards is in active mode and the second in stand by Follow the below procedure to test if the stand by card is working properly STEP ACTION Send the following TL1 command selecting the group you want to swap the cards SW DX INC 1 INC 2 GPS THC MAC CTAG Verify that you have received an autonomous message such as below 2 SID DATE TIME A ATAG REPT SW new active card previous active card 3 You should see on the shelf that the new active card is working like the same status as the previous active one Just allow sometime to the THC card to complete its stating sequence 4 Once the test done reconfigure the A card as the active one wit
245. group is being restarted DOWNLOAD The group firmware is being downloaded OK The group is running correctly ALARM The group is in alarm DEGRADED The firmware version is not the same as the rest of the shelf TESTERROR Invalid testing date DEAD The MAC group is not able to communicate When ON OUC group detects and generates an alarm if any of its output lines are shorted short circuit when no card is inserted Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Outouts gt Group 1 10 Details OUC Group 2 Details A13 amp A14 From DB OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Check the Shorted Checkbox to enable the Shorted alarm detection on all the 20 output lines related to the OUC group 6 139 Operating amp Provisioning 6 9 5 Time Code Card NTP TCC NTP State Depends on network configuration the NTP signal can be supplied by an NTP server or directly form the GPS card available in the 5548C Usually the TCC NTP card is plugged in one of the OUC OUtput Card group slot The NTP Output connector can be in front panel card access on the front tile set or on the output remote panel for E200 Each TCC NTP provides one NTP output This section describes how to configure the 5548C to supply the NTP signal First of all the general settings must be configured in correspondence to the network IP Address Net Mask Gateway DHCP mode Ethernet Speed Sel
246. h as Two independent E1 2 048MHz PPS OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 49 2 5 7 4 SGC Block Diagram 2048kHz THC A ingt input 2048kHz THC B p reference FREQ Interface selector Pass Throug PP 2 048 MHz 2 048MHz system STATUS Framer 1 detection E1 1 PPS GPS A Framer 2 Input E1 2 Interface PPS GPS B Micro Processor 3 3V 5Wp ae 5V 1W gt current limiter OSA 5548C Internal Bus Figure 2 30 Signal Generator Card Block Diagram OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 PPS E1 1 E1 2 2 048MHz Product Overview Output amplifier Output FREQ amplifier OUC 1 20 CODE 1_1 OUC 1 3 5 1 CODE 1 2 Output OUC 2 4 6 20 gt amplifier CODE 2 1 ouc 1 3 5 19 CODE 2 2 ouc 2 4 6 200 aoe To amplifier Bo Link B Output To amplifier Exp Link A 2 50 2 5 8 OUtput Card OUC 2 5 8 1 Figure 2 31 OUtput Card OUC Physical Layout LED Status OUT 1 10 E1 OUT 1 10 f OUT 11 20 E1 OUT 11 20 f Product Overview DESCRIPTION RED Solid The card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure RED Flashing Version error ORANGE Solid Card s firmware is being upgraded GREEN Solid Card system is working properly OFF Card is not working at all GREEN Solid E1 distributed properly to Output ports 1 to 10 RED Solid No E1 dis
247. h the same command SW DX INC 1 INC 2 GPS THC MAC CTAG Procedure 7 29 Redundant Card stand by Test OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 33 Commissioning 7 3 9 Testing Alarm Levels This section is the procedure to test each alarm level such as Minor Major and Critical 7 3 9 1 STEP 1 Minor Alarm MN ACTION Enable an input line to a port which is not connected with an input reference signal or set a wrong input signal type with the following command ED EQPT IL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 CTAG INPUT E1 1 E1 2 E1 3 E1 4 FREQ 1 FREQ 2 FREQ 3 FREQ 4 ADM STATE ENABLED It is also possible to remove or deactivate an input signal Check that the MAC card shows a Minor alarm MN Check that the minor alarm is reported after sending the following command RTRV ALM ALL CTAG Procedure 7 30 Minor Alarm MN Test 7 3 9 2 Major Alarm MJ STEP 1 2 3 ACTION Remove any card from its slot Check that the MAC card shows a Major alarm MJ Check that the major alarm is reported after sending the following command RTRV ALM ALL CTAG Procedure 7 31 Major Alarm MJ Test OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 34 Commissioning 7 3 9 3 Critical Alarm CR STEP ACTION Remove a protected pair of cards from its slot or leave a group of card e g INC empty 2 Check that the MAC card shows a Critical alarm CR 3 Check that
248. he POWER B card LOCAL COMM on the rear side of the shelf on the Management connectors tile 19200 kbs None 1 None TL1 1x Ethernet TCP IP RJ 45 connector 100 Base T LAN COMM on the Management tile or Remote panel TL1 Raw data or Telnet Up to 25 Up to 5 per each port and 32 max on all ports Table 9 1 Communication Specifications OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 3 Specifications 9 2 Input Specification E1 inputs Connector BNC 75 Q female Label E11to4 Ports Up to 4 providing 4x E1 inputs 1 1 protected when all Configuration E1 Supported Code Supported Frame Synchronization Status Messaging SSM Level Impedance Input failure criteria Frequency inputs Connector Label Ports Configuration Frequency Wave Level Return Loss Impedance Input failure criteria GPS Connector Label INput Cards INC are installed Up to 2 INput Cards INC providing 1 1 protection ITU T G 703 9 HDB3 and AMI user selectable e PCM30 PCM30C PCM31 SSM disabled PCM31C Fully supported nominal to 15dB in Terminated mode nominal to 35dB in Bridged mode 75 Q terminating mode 1000 Q bridging mode Loss Of Signal LOS 15dB in Terminated mode or 35dB in Bridged mode Alarm Indication Signal AIS Out Of Frame OOF according to G 706 and according to user defined threshold 10E 4
249. he code AMI HDB3 used in the E1 signal with following command ED EQPT IL input_line CTAG CODE AMI HDB3 Configure the Wait To Restore time WTR which is a configurable delay to make the 5548C waiting before selected a line recovered The delay can be disabled or configured between 1 and 12 minutes ED EQPT IL input_line CTAG WIR 1 12 DISABLED If necessary attribute a tag to the input line using the following command ED EOPT IL input line CTAG TAG V My Input Line Tag 8 Once the configuration finished you can check it with the following command RTRV EQPT IL input line CTAG Then the SyncTerminal should show the following message in one single line where you can check the bold blue parameters SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD input line O0K ENABLED DISABLED MONITORED PRC SSU A SSU B SEC DNU NONE DISABLED INPUT EBl connector ADM STATE ENABLED DISABLED MONITORED TERM TERMINATED BRIDGED CODE B8ZS AMI WTR 1 12 DISABLED FRCD PRC SSU A SSU B SEC DNU NONE OOF DETECTION DISDABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 CRC4 DETECTION DISDABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 BPV DETECTION DISDABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 SA4 OFF ON SSM SA5 OFF ON SSM SA6 OFF ON SSM SA7 OFF ON SSM SA8 OFF ON SSM FREQ 2 048M TAG My Input Line Tag On the active INC card of the corresponding group the LED related to the Input Line you configured should either flashes in Green due to Wait To Restore time or lights permanent
250. heSarbt SA8 JOFFONSSM ValueoftheSa8bt ___ _ _ _ SSM BIT SA4 SA5 SA6 SA7 SA4 Sa bit used to transmit the SSM SA8 NONE quality Not configurable with software Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt Input 1 8 gt SSM Bit Select the Sa bit which carries the SSM ek according to your network requirements TERMINATED 55M Bit OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 157 Operating amp Provisioning 6 11 Alarms amp Events Alarms amp events are transmitted independently by all the 5548C s cards to the MAC card which gathers manages them keep the history log manages the condition shows the current active alarms amp events The 5548C can also escalate the alarm severity to a higher level after a configurable delay In addition to the alarms which can be shown by each card LEDs physically the MAC shows alarm severity level Critical Major Minor with the 3 pairs of LEDs on its front panel and on its output alarm relays which are located on the Management connector tile and labeled ALARM OUT Group 1 and Group 2 When receiving alarms through software many details about each event and alarm are reported as listed below A Element in alarm Condition type and description Alarm description Transient events a transient state of the card Alarm severity Critical Major Minor Alarm escalation If the service is affected
251. helf No action needed The expansion shelf is being started No action needed the 5548C is starting as When MST amp RMT LEDs are Flashing starting as an expansion shelf together with the EXP the network If network parameters have not been found parameters have not been found in the insert the POWER B card or send it for repair POWER B card after a last plug in out manipulation expansion shelf the start up sequence the security management management shelf shelf OFF No critical alarm is currently active or the No action needed alarm has been cut off r shelf shelf alarm has been cut off r shelf shelf OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 24 GREEN Flashing Maintenance amp Troubleshooting se Saman OFF No minor alarm is currently active or the No action needed alarm has been cut off ACO RED At least one alarm has been cut off If you do not know which alarm has been cut off control the current active alarms No alarm is currently cut off No action needed Table 8 8 MAnangement Card Troubleshooting visible LEDs OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 25 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 2 1 9 Time Code Card TCC NTP se penes ation STATUS The card is currently not working or not During the power up sequence the LED can delivering a valid signal remain red for a short while If the LED stays in this status longer it means that the card is def
252. herefore to the second IL Later the failed IL recovers The 5548C remains on the current IL selection without switching to the recovered line and thus does not introduce any instability caused by the input line switching OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 116 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt Input 1 8 GPS gt Set Priority 1 has the most priority 9 has the least priority Conflict Input Priority n 1 Figure 6 16 SyncView Priority Setting 6 8 4 Manual amp Automatic Direct Digital Synthesis MADDS The MADDS is an embedded engine in the THC card which filters the signal received on the THC input e The MADDS can show different operating modes related to the THC status e TRACKED the MADDS and THC are correctly tracking the currently selected input signal e WARMUP this state is present while the internal THC oscillator is warming up i e after shelf power up or when inserting a new THC FAST this state should last approximately 1 minute This is shown when the MADDS is changing its bandwidth in order to track the selected signal more rapidly FREERUN This status is shown when the MADDS and the rest of THC have never tracked any input signal since the shelf power up e HOLDOVER This status is shown when the MADDS and the rest of the THCs no longer have any input signals on their inputs
253. hin these slip rate limits the wander on 2048 kbit s traffic signals must be kept below the so called Network Limits as specified in the new ITU T Rec G 823 This is achieved by two measures First all exchanges in a network are synchronized to a Primary Reference Clock PRC Secondly SSUs are deployed in exchange nodes in order to minimize the detrimental effects of loosing traceability to the PRC due to link or equipment failures An SSU which looses all PRC traceable reference input signals goes into holdover mode An SSU in holdover mode is capable of delivering a synchronization signal of near PRC quality for a few days 2 2 1 2 SDH Network Elements The quality of synchronization for SDH network elements has a direct influence on the wander introduced to 2048 kbit s traffic signals E1 that are transported over the SDH network VC 12 pointer adjustments create wander on the E1 signals This wander becomes apparent when the E1 signals are demultiplexed or dropped from the SDH signal In order to limit this effect the maximum acceptable wander for SDH signals and for signals synchronising SDH network elements must not exceed so called Network Limits as specified by ITU T Recommendations G 825 and G 823 A set of network planning rules must be followed in order be within the Network Limits in particular three rules about clock chains G 803 The first rule says that the synchronization signal should be regenerated by the insertion of SSU
254. his is the status of the output line ON the signal is squelched Double quoted tag with up to 32 characters alphabetic upper and lower case numeric and punctuation PMy Tag up to 32 chars This is the output line squelch condition ls ON OFF OFF the signal is supplied not software configurable OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 136 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Outputs gt Group 1 10 Details m k r T Outputs l ar By checking the box the Ke 5 JF corresponding output OUTPUT 2 T Line will be squelched si R so the signal will not be OUTPUT 2 P supplied GUTPUT2 15 OUTPUT 2 g OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 E OUTPUT 2 i OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 7 OUTPUT 2 _GUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 g OUTPUT 2 10 OUTPUT 2 1 I T t ah al E E wG E G we Peil un y o el y el E E ei SZ y w f f v d i E i p EO f Pi L k v S SE 4 oe NP d E Ar x F a A Nd Alarm Detection Group 1 Type OK OUTPUT 61 Setting an Output Tag OUTPUT 62 OUTPUT 6 3 e Right click on any Re line and click the EE A an mall b OUTPUT 6 6 Seen OUTPUT 67 i OUTPUT 6 8 e Then double click on OUTPUT 6 9 the line required and E ai OUTPUT 6 11 write the tag you OUTPUT 61 need
255. hreshold OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 37 Product Overview The INC card delivers up to 4 input signals to the THC group When at least one input has been configured as E1 or 2 048MHz among the 4 input references The INC group 1 provides also a clock to the SGC group in case of Passthrough mode when both THC cards are removed or being in warm up or failure 2 5 3 4 INC Block Diagram Figure 2 22 Input Card Block Diagram OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 38 Product Overview 2 5 4 GPS Card GPS 2 5 4 1 Physical View LED DESCRIPTION Status GREEN Solid Card system is working properly RED Solid Card system is currently not working properly or GPS card is in initialization phase RED Flashing Version error ORANGE Solid Card s firmware is being upgraded OFF Card is not working at all STATUS GPS GREEN Solid GPS signal reception is OK PPS input reference available RED Solid No or not enough GPS signal available PPS input reference not available RED Flashing No connection to GPS Antenna Either shorted or opened GPS antenna cable When both GPS and OCXO LEDs have this status the input is rejected due to a performance alarm Yellow The GPS input is OK but currently monitored OFF The GPS input is disabled or the GPS Card is in Stand by OCXO RED Solid Internal GPS s OCXO failure or Initialisation phase RED Flashing GPS pre trac
256. hronously and then transported over synchronous physical layer signals Multi Service Provisioning Platforms or MSPPs interconnect both synchronous and asynchronous networks by providing both synchronous ports such as E1 and STM n as well as asynchronous ports such as Ethernet In all cases where NGN network elements have synchronous ports synchronization of the same quality as in SDH and SONET networks is required SSUs are used in order to obtain this synchronization quality and in order to provide holdover protection In NGN the need for the distribution of Time of Day TOD information is also increasing This required GPS based TOD servers SSUs with internal GPS receiver functions can be used for this purpose OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 12 Product Overview 2 2 2 Synchronization Distribution Methods The OSA 5548C SSU is normally used as a node clock it is the central clock of a telecom building or site it distributes synchronization to all synchronization consuming equipment in the building The SSU therefore has a clock function and a signal distribution function i e many output ports The SSUs clock function needs to be locked to some PRC source such a s an atomic Cesium clock or a GPS receiver This section explains how PRC traceable synchronization reference signals are supplied to the input ports of the SSU gt GPS Satellite Seg ment OSA 5548C SSU with GPS card OSA 5548C SSU with
257. ialization RED Flashing No reference is fed to the SGC to generate Check the Fearn daca ae cards operation THC Frequency and or PPS signal and Fearn daca ae Dead no power is supplied to the card The SGC may be in trouble and should be returned for repair after a last unsuccessful firmware initialization OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 15 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 2 1 6 OUtput Card OUC um se vesener atom o STATUS GREEN The card is working correctly No action needed RED The card is currently not working or not delivering a valid signal During the power up sequence the LED can remain red for a short while If the LED stays in this status longer it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair RED Flashing There is a firmware version error Download the correct firmware in the card with the command ACT DNLD after verified that the firmware is in the MAC card ORANGE A new card s firmware is being downloaded No action needed C Dead no power is supplied to the card Test the OUC s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair E1 distributed correctly An alarm has been detected on at least one of Verify that the output lines connected are the 10 outputs 1 to 10 not shorted if you have enabled this alarm detection Measure each output ports and check that the level and shape are correct If the card is protected 1 1 and the
258. ical A Note The maximal cable length from the output port of the 5548C to another device depends on the cable used To calculate the maximal length use the following information the output signal level specification from the section 9 5 the manufacturer s cable loss per meter specifications at the frequency used i e 2 048MHz the minimum signal level allowed by the device to synchronise OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 21 Equipment Installation 4 5 2 2 Cabling Output Tile with 20x CEI 1 0 2 3 connectors 20x ASYMMETRICAL with CEI 1 0 2 3 75 ohms ACTION ON O d m 0 OUTPUTS ASYM 1 Locate the connector tile corresponding to the group required to cable 11 O OG lt GO lt N Select a connector which will be configured with the signal desired The output port configuration is done by software as described in section 6 9 O O lt lt 3 Use a 75 ohms coaxial cable with CEI 1 0 2 3 male connector O lt O O lt D Plug the connector and ensure that it is correctly fixed O 3 O a O s Procedure 4 7 Cabling an E1 or Freq port from an Asym Output Tile with CEI connectors OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 22 Equipment Installation 4 5 2 3 Cabling Output Tile with 20x SUB D 25 pins 20x SYMMETRICAL with SUB D 25 pins female 120 ohms OL 1 10 OL 11
259. ically close OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 21 Operating amp Provisioning Sessions With the ED PORT command the maximum number of simultaneous sessions can be set to a limit By default the number allowed is 3 and up to 5 simultaneous sessions can be set Retrieve the port parameters currently configured Input Syntax RTRV PORT aid ctag Observe an answer as in the example below Output Syntax sid date time M Ctag COMPLD aid type IDLEDELAY idledelay SESSIONS sessions Parameter Default Possible Description name Parameter configurations AID 1025 9999 This is the port number The default port RS FRONT number to access the shelf via RAW DATA RS REAR is 8000 and via TELNET it is 8023 RS FRONT is the RS 232 port on the POWER B RS REAR is the RS 232 port on the Management tile or Remote panel ht mo TELNET This parameter is the type of communication Set RAW for Raw data or Telnet biai T 60 NONE After the idle delay the session will be discontinued and will automatically disconnect the user The idle delay is in Minute s SESSIONS 3 0 5 This is the number of simultaneous sessions allowed for the related port Table 6 7 Communication Parameter Names OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 22 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 6 Using the SyncTerminal Software 6 2 6 1 Introduction Use the SyncTerminal software to send T
260. ignal received by the SGC GREEN Solid Frequency and PPS generated properly GREEN Flashing Pass through mode RED Solid Frequency and or PPS generation failure RED Flashing No clock signal received by the SGC Table 2 6 Signal Generator Card SGC LED Description 7 Note e For detailed SGC LED status description refer to section 8 2 1 e For ordering Information refer to 0 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 48 Product Overview 2 5 7 2 Main features The SGC card is designed to provide the following functions Generation of 2x E1 2 048MHz and 1 PPS signals Two E1 options with different code and frame HDB3 or AMI CRC 4 and CCS or CAS are user configurable allowing 2 different E1 format selectable on output connectors Distribution of signals to the OUC cards Receiving signal from the INC cards in case of pass through mode SSM generation 1 1 card protection Remotely software also called firmware upgradeable 2 5 7 3 Operation The user can insert one or two SGC cards in the SGC group depending on protection requirements When two SGC cards are installed both are active The SGC card receives a signal from the THC group or from INC when the 5548C is in pass through mode When no signal is detected it squelches its outputs to prevent any signal to the rest of the shelf The SGC generates all signals types for OUC NTP PTP cards Expansion shelves and PPS outputs suc
261. il 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 Contents 042 TENDEN 6 50 6 4 3 5548C Type Information and Inventor sss see ee ee eee 6 51 6 4 4 Checking the Card Operation States sese 6 55 6 4 5 Card Deleting for Empty Slot rrrrerernnornnreranrernnrrrnnennanennnennnnrnnnrnnanennnnnnnne 6 57 6 4 6 Switching the Active Card within a Card Group sss eee eee 6 58 6 4 7 Card Firmware Initialization roreronrrrorrrrarrrarrrrnrernnrnnanrrnnrnrarennnennannnnee 6 60 6 4 8 Testing all the Cards LEDS rrranornnrrnnrornnrnnanernnrrnnnrnnernnnnrnnnnnnanennnnnnnnenner 6 61 Input Line IL Properties amp INput Card INC Configurations 000000 6 63 6 5 1 T sise EEE EE E 6 63 6 5 2 Input connector to Input Line IL description rrrrarrrnnrrrarernnrrnnnennanennnr 6 64 6 5 3 Retrieving Current Input Configuration eee eee e e ee ee e e ee 6 65 6 5 4 Input Connector Assignment rrrranrnnnnrnanrnnannranernnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnenanennanennee 6 71 6 5 5 Enabling Disabling or Monitoring an Input Line sese sese eee ee e ee 6 73 6 5 6 Input Line Termination sss eee ee eee ee e ee e ee 6 74 65 7 E1 Input LIME CONTIQUIATION s iceeicceseiiecsncuerccsecnveceaanectcineevsnuecwsvacuadedcawencasncies 6 75 6 5 8 Wait To Restore Time WTR sese 6 80 GPS COME vore enn 6 83 6 6 1 VE OG IC 1 g EE tagespancesed G e sce aareepasauen 6 83 6 6 2 GPS Card GPS Group Sate eee 6 83 66093 PONNI 6 84 6 6 4 Re
262. in question has expired the command sent resend it accordingly error is not the same than download the initial error been detected in the card s EEPROM HR TL ERTE Event The configuration of Check the event configuration If configuration event contains an no error is found contact error error Oscilloquartz PRTL ERTE Test date error The test date ofthe Contact Oscilloquartz not correct error configuration ill ERTE CAN bus error There is an error Contact Oscillquartz DUS laud nani error Contact ainan error command error sent resend it accordingly OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 9 Operating amp Provisioning Firmware Upgrade Errors Codes PRTL RENE ke File s The eg could not Check the FTP server the FTP server PRTL CLST Connection to The connection to Check the FTP server FTP server lost the FTP server is connection lost ia DABU Download The user has aborted by the aborted the firmware user dowload w CDER CRC download The data Restart the download error downloaded is not conform to the initial data HR TL FDEP Firmware The firmware Restart the process or roll back Download downloaded has to the previous version Executed been partially Partially executed DENY FSDN FTP server The FTP server is Check the FTP server status down down and its connection OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 10 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 1 7 Card
263. ing 6 9 4 2 Configuring Output Group OG 7 Note For OUC cards and Output Tile relation refer to section 6 9 1 2 For Output Group information refer to section 6 9 1 3 Using TL1 To retrieve the configuration of one of the two OG from an OUC group use the following command Input Syntax RTRV EQPT OG aid ctag Example RTRV EQPT OG 3 1 MYCTAG The response will answer as shown below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMP LOD aid TYPE type To configure the OG with one of the three configurations 2 048MHz E1 configuration nr 1 or E1 configuration nr 2 use the following command Input Syntax ED EQPT OG aid ctag TYPE type Example ED EQPT OG 2 1 MYCTAG TYPE E1_ 2 The response will answer as shown below Output Syntax sid date time M etag COMP LD aid TYPE type OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 133 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Possible Default o This is the OG specified in the AID 1 1 10 2 format X Y X is the OUC group and Y the OG E1 1 E1_2 FREQ Configuration specified for the OG Using SyncView Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Outputs gt Group 1 10 Details Pah ke age era ee gn en i ax dad T h z a TT EE EVE r Pi j i _ Group Z Uetails IAT 3 d A141 Yn UB g OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT S 10 OUTPUT2 1 12 DT 4 M SMEN
264. ing amp Provisioning Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters INDOOR ON OFF OFF Enable the GPS to track only one satellite instead of four In that case a fixed position must be programmed ees 2 to ME Elevation mask in degrees TS below this mask are not Te into account _ _ SSU A NONE Forced SSM quality SSU B SEG DNG NONE VISIBLE O Number of available satellites TRACKED 0 Number of tracked satellites 6 6 3 1 PPS Offser and Elevation Mask Setting Using TL1 Input Syntax ED EQPT GPS ctag PPS OFFSET pps offset ELEVATION eLlevation Example ED EQPT GPS MYCTAG PPS OFFSET 274 ELEVATION 15 Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters PPS OFFSET 999 999 999 999 10 PPS offset ELEVATION 5 to 90 10 Elevation mask in degrees Satellites below this mask are not taken into account OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 87 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt GPS Input gt Details gt General tab GPS Details A4 amp A5 gt General Position Satellites PPS Offset Elevation mask Apply Fefresh OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 88 Operating amp Provisioning 6 6 3 2 Indoor Mode Using TL1 To enable or disable the Indoor mode send the following command Input Synt
265. inor Alarm the lower secverity level of alarm Master shelf Maximum Time Interval Error Non Available or Non Applicable Network Element Network Equipment Building Systems Not Connected Next Generation OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 T SASE SNMP SONET SSM SSU STU T1 TCC NTP TCP IP TDEV THC TID TSO TIE Tip amp Ring TL1 TNC SSU Glossary Non Volatile Random Access Memory Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator Out Of Limit alarm Oscilloquartz SA OUtput Card OUTput Phase Locked Loop Performances Measurement Parts Per Million Pulse Per Second Primary Reference Clock Primary Reference Source PoWeR Quality Level Quality Of Service Random Access Memory Return Authorization Number also called RMA Number required to return material for factory repair Rubidium REServed Request For Comment Registered Jack 45 8 pin connector for data transmission ReMoTe shelf Interface for communicating serially between computer and terminals Specification for electrical parameters of an interface only RS422 is compatible with V11 and X21 Stand alone Synchronisation Equipment Synchronization Digital Hierarchy Synchronous Equipment Clock Signal Generator Card Source IDentifier SONET Minimum Clock Simple Network Management Protocol Synchronous Optical NETwork Synchronization Status Message Synchronization Supply Unit also called SASE BITS
266. inputs The MAC is the communication interface for local and remote management allowing an operator to access information via local serial ports RS 232 and or the remote Ethernet TCP IP interfaces OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 30 Product Overview 2 5 System Components amp Operation 2 5 1 Overview The OSA 5548C Synchronization Supply Unit SSU has been developed on a modular basis plug in cards allowing the operator to upgrade the configuration of the equipment without normal operation interruption Each individual function can be equipped as single or dual card to introduce redundancy and protection As well as the cards the connector tiles are field replaceable and do not require a power cycle of the equipment A group of cards is always composed with an A card usually the left one and an optional B card usually the right one When no card is inserted in a slot a blank panel is required and the slot must be deactivated by software management interface In the INC GPS and THC groups one of the two cards is active and the second is in stand by to protect the active one In the SGC OUC and POWER groups both cards are active MAC NTP and PTP cards cannot be protected Power A Output section Power B a2 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 SAR A36 Ad foe A Br FONT ON lio loom tito TONN to TOLV TON loom lo loom to TON to lorem TON 1 A TA I
267. ioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt Input 1 8 gt Details Performances Input Line Performance Connector state Termination Input Alarm Detector Termination type an ee 3 Input alarm SSM Bit capi ch lel detection types Sa Bit E1 Code type T AMI HDB3 Wait to restore Time Wait To Restore 1 Enabled WTR Time 0 Bee cs Disse function OK Cancel Apply Refresh Figure 6 12 SyncView Input Configuration Window OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 69 Operating amp Provisioning 6 5 3 2 Retrieving General INput Card INC Group Status This section explains how to retrieve the configuration of each INC group A Important Note The command response refers to the INC group status and not to individual INC card status Input Syntax RTRV EQPT INC aid ctag Example RTRV EQPT INC 1 MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax Sid date time M ctag COMP LD aid opstate SSM ssm PERF perf SYS_MODE sys_mode name configurations parameters This is the INC group number OPSTATE EMPTY OK There are different INC group states EXCTRACTED EMPTY The group slots are empty INIT EXTRACTED The group has been DOWNLOAD extracted from their respective slots OK ALARM INIT The group is being restarted DEGRADED DOWNLOAD The group firmware is TESTERROR being downloaded DEAD OK The group is running corr
268. iority on the input line When two Input Lines IL are set with the same priority the system selects the IL in non reversive mode STEP ACTION 1 1 is the highest priority and 9 the lowest To set the priorities send the following TL1 command ED PRIO CTAG IL 1 1 1 9 IL 1 2 1 9 Piel SEE SEE GEER EE IL 2 3 14s9 1L 2 4 Lis9 GPO Las 8 2 Verify the priority setting with the following TL1 command RIRV PRIO CIAG 3 The response is formatted such as below SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD Wield ay bel 2 L LLa fiRl 42eleswe Lb Z l Ly lt 9 IL 22h se LE 2 L TL 2 15 LP GPS La4p 7 Procedure 7 14 Input Line Priorities Configuration A Note The line currently selected is shown on the digital display on the currently active THC card OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 20 Commissioning 7 2 7 Output Line Configuration 7 2 7 1 E1 Output Signal Type Configuration Two E1 configurations options can be applied to all Output Groups OG A Note One OG contains 10 Output Lines OL Each OUC groups provide 2 OG OL 1 to 10 and OL 11 to 20 for a total of 20 OL STEP ACTION Configure one of the two E1 options E1 1 or E1 2 with the following parameters e Code HDB3 or AMI e CRC 4 CRC4 ON or OFF e Time Slot 16 T516 CCS or CAS e Idle code IDLE 0 255 ED EQPT SGE E1 1 E1 2 CTAG CODE HDB3 AMI CRC4 OFF ON TS16 CCS CAS IDLE 0 255 2 Check the quality configu
269. is recommended to return this card for repair OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 18 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting paner eten OUT 11 20 RED Flashing No E1 signal is received to be processed and During the turn up procedure it is normal to E1 distributed by the OUC card get such alarm until the shelf is able to provide a valid signal to the OUC cards However if this status remains longer follow this procedure Verify the SGC cards operation and configuration Verify the THC cards operation and configuration Verify the INC cards operation and configuration Verify the input lines configuration Verify the input ports cabling OFF The output line group is not configured as E1 If the description does not correspond to the or no output tile is installed if the f LED is also behavior currently shown by the shelf follow OFF the next 1 Verify that output configuration is correct 2 Verify that Output Tile is present OUT 11 20 GREEN The function is working and the Frequency No action needed f signals are distributed correctly RED An alarm has been detected on at least one of 1 Verify that the output lines connected are the 10 outputs 11 to 20 not shorted if you have enabled this alarm detection Measure each output ports and check that the level and shape are correct If the card is protected 1 1 and the second card does not show any alarm it is recommended to return th
270. is card for repair OUT 11 20 RED Flashing No Frequency signal is received to be During the turn up procedure it is normal to OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 19 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Description processed and distributed by the OUC card get such alarm until the shelf is able to provide a valid signal to the OUC cards However if this status remains longer follow this procedure Verify the SGC cards operation and configuration Verify the THC cards operation and configuration Verify the INC cards operation and configuration Verify the input lines configuration Verify the input ports cabling The output line group is not configured as If the description does not correspond to the Frequency or no output tile is installed if the E1 behavior currently shown by the shelf follow LED is also OFF the next 1 Verify that output configuration is correct 2 Verify that Output Tile is present Table 8 5 OUtput Card Troubleshooting visible LEDs OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 90 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 2 1 7 Time Code Card TCC NTP se penes ation STATUS The card is currently not working or not During the power up sequence the LED can delivering a valid signal remain red for a short while If the LED stays in this status longer it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair RED Flashing There is a firmw
271. is the status of the commend sent The below parameters can be answered eCOMPLD The command has been sent and received correctly the response of the of the message can be shown in the MESSAGE eDENY An error occurred after sending the command The error code is shown in DENY ERROR and the description of the error is shown in MESSAGE Refer to the section 6 2 1 6 for DENY ERROR messages ePRTL The command has partially passed The error code is shown in DENY ERROR and the description of the error is shown in MESSAGE Refer to the section 6 2 1 6 for PRTL ERROR messages 6 2 1 6 DENY or PRTL Errors Command Sending Errors Flo na acon O check if it redoes the same esl SRTO Reply Time out Time until receiving Check the conection to the occurred an answer from the 5548C shelf has expired mill User not hade ee the 5548C active block within the command resend it accordingly the command sent resend it accordingly baud IDMS Missing data Data field missing Check the command syntax and field within the command resend it accordingly sent OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 7 Be oe ona ae TONY Data noiva the command sent resend it accordingly ee e command sent resend it accordingly ml ad Data range Data range error Check the command syntax and error within the command resend it accordingly sent _ IFM Invalid Invalid data format or Check the command syntax and Paylo
272. istration states of Enabled Disabled and Monitored on any input line A Note To retrieve current IL configuration refer to section 6 5 3 Read section Input connector to Input Line IL description to understand the concept of cross conection of input lines to physical input ports Using TL1 Input Syntax ED EQPT IL aid ctag ADM_STATE adm_state Example ED EQPT IL 1 3 MYCTAG ADM STATE ENABLED Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters AID This is the input line abbreviation The first digit is the group number and the second digit is the input number 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 ADM STATE DISABLED ENABLED This is the administrative state of the MONITORED line ENABLED DISABLED The input line is disabled and hence cannot be selected by the 5548C MONITORED The line is monitored but cannot be selected by the 5548C ENABLED The line is enabled and hence can be taken by the 5548C Using SyncView Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt Input 1 8 gt Enabled Disabled Monitored OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 73 Operating amp Provisioning 6 5 6 Input Line Termination It is important to set the input line termination before using its signal because it selects the corresponding input impedance Bridging Configuration for derived input connection 20dB The input impedance is 1k ohms In Example the E1
273. itionally to the above criterias when BPV or CV rate of the total number 2 048E 06 during 1s is higher or equal than the Threshold selected Note L To retrieve current IL configuration refer to section 6 5 3 Read section Input connector to Input Line IL description to understand the concept of cross connection of input lines to physical input ports Using TL1 The following command is required to retrieve the current configuration Input Syntax RTRV EQPT IL aid ctag Example RIRV EOPT IL L LiMYLTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sig date time M Ctac GOMPLD aid opstate ssm INPUT input ADM STATE adm state TERM te rm CODE code WTR wtr FRCD frcd OOF DETECT o00f detect CRC4 DETECT ercd detect BPV DETECT bpv detect SA4 sa4 SA5 sa5 SA6 5a6 SA7 sa7 SA8 sa8 FREQ freq TAG tag To edit the alarm detection configuration in one single line the following command is required Input Syntax OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 77 Operating amp Provisioning ED EQPT IL aid ctag 00F DETECT 00f detect CRC4 DETECT ercd detect BPV DETECT bpv detect Example ED EQPT IL 1 2 MYCTAG OOF_DETECT ENABLED CRC4 DETECT 10 2 BPV_DETECT DISABLED Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters AID 1 1 2 4 ALL This is the input line abbreviation The first digit is the group number and the second digit is the input numbe
274. itored to allow the performance measurement of the line but ignoring it within the Input selection e Disabled to deactivate the line OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 98 Operating amp Provisioning Indoor In Urban Canyon locations the GNSS can be set as Indoor mode to operate with only one GNSS satellite tracked The user must set manually the GNSS position latitude longitude and altitude when using the Indoor mode Elevation To avoid receiving bad GNSS signal from reflection an elevation mask can be set to decrease the reception angle of the antenna S GNSS Antenna Forced The GNSS card can generate a user defined SSM quality for input selection in SSM mode When the Forced mode is not enabled the SSM quality supplied are the following e PRC when the GNSS signal is tracked e DNU when the GNSS signal is not tracked Visible Number of Satellites Vehicles available from the GNSS antenna location Tracked Number of Satellites vehicles currently tracked by the GNSS receiver at least 4 must be tracked to determine the GNSS antenna position and one if the position is entered in Indoor mode The GNSS receiver can track up to 12 Satellites vehicles at the same time Note 7 The properties are those of the active GNSS card OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 99 Operating amp Provisioning Using TL1 To retrieve the current GNSS Properties sen
275. jacent slot becomes active initiating a short holdover cycle and the transitioning into fast start mode quickly aligning the input signal phase to the stand by THC oscillator and about one minute later completes the transition into normal mode The warm up mode is indicated by a flashing red OSCILLATOR LED The holdover mode is indicated as a solid RED indication fast start mode as the flashing GREEN indication and the normal mode as the solid GREEN indication of the holdover LED on the THC OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 46 Product Overview When all qualified input references are absent or unavailable the THC provides a source for synchronization output signals Known as holdover mode THC freerun mode occurs when THC is cold started and has not been aligned to any qualified input signals yet When in freerun mode the holdover LED is also solid red It is also possible to configure the THC by software or via TL1 commands according to various input reference selection modes such as e User defined priority table e Input signal alarms detection e Input signal performance measurements e Synchronization Status Message SSM The THC card integrates a system called MADDS Manual amp Automatic Direct Digital Synthesis This system processes and filters the signal selected as reference The MADDS is a module which has its own upgradeable software The
276. king sequence When both GPS and OCXO LEDs have this status the Figure 2 23 input is rejected due to a performance alarm GPS Card OFF When the GPS LED is GREEN solid the GPS GPS card delivers signal to the THC Or the GPS card is in stand by when the GPS LED Table 2 3 GPS Card GPS LED Description Note Ss e For detailed GPS LED status description refer to section 8 2 1 e For ordering Information refer to 0 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 39 Product Overview 2 5 4 2 Main features The GPS card is designed to provide the following functions e GPS signal tracking and processing from up to 12 satellites e Input signal distribution to the THC cards or to the SGC cards when the pass through function is enabled e Performance Measurement and reference disqualification when Performance Thresholds are defined e GPS card 1 1 protection e Synchronization Status Messaging SSM quality according to the GPS operation status e Manual position provisioning for location where condition of GPS reception are bad such as urban canyon e UTC based and GPS based time source e Remotely software also called firmware upgradeable 2 5 4 3 Operation The user can insert in the shelf e 1 GPS which makes the shelf available for an input reference from one GPS antenna e 2 GPS which makes the shelf available for input reference from two GPS antennas When two GPS car
277. le signal output outage Single card upgrade operations are recommended to avoid shelf synchronization service outages on the whole shelf Example if you need to install the firmware into the INC 1 A verify that the INC 1 B protection mate is installed to protect it as the A card will not be able to supply signal when it is being initialized A few exceptions can avoid the loss of synchronization service such as the following examples 1 If an INC card is unprotected and you have at least one THC installed in the shelf the THC will run in holdover during the firmware installation of the INC in question and continue to provide a good signal on the output 2 If you have only one THC card installed and at least one INC in the group 1 INC 1 A or INC 1 B the shelf will continue in pass through mode during THC download Note The MADDS is a component embedded in the THC cards which needs to be upgraded right after the THC card itself MADDS A is embedded in THC A and MADDS B in THC B 7 Note If it is required to do a roll back to the previous card version follow the next section OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 195 Operating amp Provisioning Using TL1 The following command is required to install new firmware in any card from the MAC card Input Syntax ACT DNID SA Example ACT DNLD MADDS B MYCTAG Parameter Possible configurations Description name AID INC 1 A INC 2 B
278. lized to to supply SSM to the 5548C use the following procedure STEP ACTION 1 To force an SSM quality level use the following command and choose the quality required among the different possibilities ED EOQPT IL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 CTAG SSM BIT SA4 SA5 SA6 SA7 SA8 NONE 2 Check the quality configured with the following command RTRV EQPT IL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 CTAG OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 25 Commissioning Check the value written after the FRCD SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD input line 0K ENABLED DISABLED MONITORED PRC SSU A SSU B SEC DNU NONE FAILED DISABLED INPUT FREQ connector ADM STATE ENABLED DISABLED MONITORED TERM TERMINATED CODE B8ZS AMI NITR 1 12 DISABLED FRCD PRC SSU A SSU B SEC DNU NONE OOP DETECTION DISDABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 CRCA DETECTION DISDABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 BPV DETECTION DISDABLED ENABLED 10 4 10 3 10 2 SA4 OFF ON SSM SA5 OFF ON SSM SA6 OFF ON SSM SA7 OFF ON SSM SA8 OFF ON SSM FREQ the frequency fed TAG My Input Line Tag r Procedure 7 20 Sa bit Configuration on Input 7 2 8 5 Sa bit configuration on Output Lines To set the Sa bit required to supply the SSM on output use the following procedure STEP ACTION Configure one of the Sa bit SA4 to SA8 as SSM in one of the two E1 i options E1 1 or E1 2 ED EQPT SGE El 1 E1 2 CTAG SA4 OFF ON SSM SA5 OFF ON SSM SA6 OF
279. low MTIE TAU MTIE S MTIE 1S 0 75E 6 MTIE 1M 2 0E 6 MTIE 15M 4 5E 6 MTIE 30M 5 0E 6 MTIE 1H 5 0E 6 MTIE 3H 5 0E 6 Table 6 19 Default MTIE Threshold 10 000 Sampling Time 10 Figure 6 20 Default MTIE Threshold OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 185 Operating amp Provisioning 6 12 6 2 Default TDEV Threshold According to ITU T G 812 clock input section 9 1 2 the default TDEV threshold mask configured in the OSA 5548C SSU is described in the table below TDEV TAU TDEV S TDEV 1S 0 34E 7 TDEV 4S 0 34E 7 TDEV 16S 0 34E 7 TDEV 64S 1 08E 7 TDEV 256S 1 70E 7 TDEV 1000S 1 70E 7 Table 6 20 Default TDEV Threshold TDEVIs Sampling Time Figure 6 21 Default TDEV Threshold OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 186 Operating amp Provisioning 6 12 6 3 Default Ym Threshold According to GR 1244 section R3 30 related to ST3 the default Ym threshold mask configured in the OSA 5548C SSU is described in the table below Ym time Ym Ym 60S 1 2E 5 12ppm Ym 540S 1 2E 5 12ppm Ym 15M 1
280. lternate Mark Inversion AMI is an encoding technique made by a synchronized clock and using bipolar pulses transmission of positive and negative pulses to represent a logic state 1 A logic state 0 is not represented by any symbol and a logic state 1 by alternated pulses Example of AMI encoding Bits format tl OO 0 O T Ilo IS encoded as 0 0 0 0 HDB3 High Density Bipolar Order 3 HDB3 is bipolar signal based on the AMI encoding with a violation code insertion each time there is more than 3 logic states 0 Data transmitted Encoded by HDB3 Alternate Mark Inversion AMI 0000 000V three 0 and a violation 0000 0000 BOOV BOOV Examples of HDB3 encoding Example 1 Binary codes combination 1000011 0 is encoded by HDB3 in 0 0 0 V 0 Exemple 2 Binary codes combination 10100 000110 0001100 000 0 is encoded in HDB3 in 0 000v0 B00v B00v070 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 75 Operating amp Provisioning Note Sas To retrieve current IL configuration refer to section 6 5 3 Read section Input connector to Input Line IL description to understand the concept of cross conection of input lines to physical input ports U sing TL1 Input Syntax ED EQPT IL aid ctag CODE code Example ED EQPT IL 1 3 MYCTAG CODE HDB3 Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters This is the input line abbreviation The fir
281. ly in Green 10 Procedure 7 10 E1 Input Line Configuration OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 16 L Commissioning Note Further details on alarm detection OOF CRC 4 BPV and CV configuration are described in section 6 5 7 2 7 2 5 2 Frequency Input Line Configuration STEP 1 2 ACTION Check the FREQ BNC connector where the line you want to configure is connected Configure the connector FREQ 1 to FREQ 4 required to attribute to any of the 4 possible input lines between 1 1 and 1 4 sending the following command ED EQPT IL input line CTAG INPUT FREQ connector Example ED EQPT IL 1 2 MYCTAG INPUT FREQ 1 Configure the administration state of the line Enabled to allow the 5548C to use it Disable to deactivate the line Monitored to allow the OSA 5548C to measure performance without using it ED EQPT IL input_line CTAG ADM STATE ENABLED DISABLED MONITORED Configure the Wait To Restore time WTR which is a configurable delay to make the 5548C waiting before selected a line recovered The delay can be disabled or configured between 1 and 12 minutes ED EQPT IL input_line CTAG WIR 1 12 DISABLED If necessary attribute a tag to the input line using the following command ED EOPT ILs sinput_line CIAG TAG My Input Line Tag Once the configuration finished you can check it with the following command RTRV EQPT IL
282. m es gt 465 1 mm 183 1 in gt 19 515 mm 202 8 in gt ETSI Left mount ear Right mount ear Figure 3 1 Dimensional View AN CAUTION Each OSA 5548C SSU must have at least 1 RU 4 5 cm of clearance below and above to assure sufficient cooling OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 3 5 Pre Installation Considerations 3 4 2 Power Input and Management Remote Panel The Power Input and Management Remote panel is an optional part which can be ordred with the 5548C to get connectors on the front It should be placed right above or under the OSA 5548C SSU as the length of Remote Panel s cable is 50cm Leave 1 RU of clearance between the Remote Panel and the 5548C shelf to ensure sufficient cooling 533 mm ETSI or 483 mm 19 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 36 Pre Installation Considerations 3 43 Remote Output Panel Preparation The BNC Remote panel can be installed anywhere in the same Rack of the shelf It provides up to 100 output connectors Leave 1 RU between the 5548C shelf and the Remote panel s waa at arm ela amm mt ETTE GE mena ce OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS S 9 OUTPUTS S o amp olo o o olo o o olo o o olo 6 6 amp POJO 9 6 6016 OO 9960 0960 OjO POJO SS EO 9 SIS S GOOOD OOOO OOOO OO o ojo o oo 0 OjO O o 0j OO ojo o o PR mil B 00444444444 OUT 11 20 533mm ETSI or 483mm 19
283. minal Sele La amp a 4A Connection Description S New Connection Enter a name and choose an icon for the connection Name Icon Disconn ected Auto detect Auto detect OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Operating amp Provisioning STEP ACTION Connection Description Enter name and choose an icon for the connector Mame SN 1002 55490 Icon Connect To es SM 1002 5548C Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial Country regione Connect using OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 14 Operating amp Provisioning STEP ACTION 3 Set the corresponding communication parameters as shown below COMT Properties Port Settings Bits per second 19200 vi Data bits E vi Parity None vi Stopbis 1 O ooo o Flow control Restore Defaults 4 At this stage it s necessary to log on Please create a txt file and insert ACT USER OSC LLOQUARTZ CTAG OSA Select send text File and select the file previously created SN 1002 5548C Hyper Terminal af Send File Receive File Capture Text Send Text File Capture to Printer Sends a text File to the remote system OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 15 Operating amp Provisioning STEP ACTION 5 You are now connected Use command in chapter TYPE
284. mote PWR IN and MGMT Panel in the rack A Note The Remote Panel can be adjusted in 19 or ETSI according to the rack type OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 7 Equipment Installation STEP ACTION Check the position in which to fit the shelf in the rack As the Remote Panel s cables have a length of 50cm do not install the Remote Panel further than 1RU 4 6 cm under or above the 5548C shelf Mount Remote Panel carefully onto the rack using four screws and their corresponding washers customer supplied Connect each Remote panel s cable to their corresponding connector on the rear side of the 5548C Procedure 4 2 Remote Panel Mounting Front side Remote Panel Cables 50cm OSA 5548C SSU OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 8 Equipment Installation 4 3 3 Remote Output Panel Mounting It is recommended to mount the Remote Panel once the OSA 5548C SSU is installed It is possible to mount the panel above or below the shelf leaving enough space at least 1 RU for cable and adequate convection cooling If a Remote PWR IN and MGMT anel is installed it is not required to leave 1RU between both Remote Panels S OUTPUTS OUTPUTS S OUTPUTS S OUTPUTS S OUTPUTS o o olo o o olo o 6 olo 6 6 olo 9 6 amp 9 3 0 OOJO E o o o E ojo ooo O SSI OEEO 99 SIS o oo POIO DEJO O ooo o o olo o oo O jO O 0o Eo ojo o o ojo 99 o
285. ms Representation Alarm levels Alarm amp Events log capacity Specifications On the front side of the shelf on every single card s front panel e Visible and audible receivable form a third part device in local with 10 input relays Alarm levels MN MJ CR transmittable remotely with 2x 3 relays NO Normally Opened and NC Normally Closed CRITICAL MAJOR e MINOR Non Alarm condition 254 items in a FIFO sequence Table 9 8 General Alarms Specifications 9 6 2 Input Alarms Input Alarm Relays Connector Label amp Location Alarms Severity e SUB D 25p male with 10x pairs of pins IN and GND EXT ALARM INPUTS located on the rear side on the Management connector tile Port 1 to 3 CR Critical Port 4 to 6 MJ Major Port 7 to 9 MN Minor Port 10 Non alarm condition Table 9 9 Input Alarms Specifications OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 8 Specifications 9 6 3 Output Alarms Relays Output Alarm Relays Connector 2 SUB D 9p female connectors providing 2 groups splitted in 3 rows of pins for CR Critical MJ Major and MN Minor alarm level status Each row is splitted in 3 pins such as NO Normally Opened C Common NC Normally Closed Label amp Location ALARM OUT GROUP 1 and ALARM OUT GROUP 2 located on the rear side on the Management connector tile DC Voltage Maximum 60 VDC
286. n of redundant card function and firmware version Firmware detection and upgrade upon redundant card insertion NGN ready for maximum flexibility Unique design for master or expansions shelves Upgrade for other interface options such as re timing RTU and time of day distribution NTP PTP e Ports for the addition of Expansion Shelves for increased number of outputs OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 4 Product Overview Power A Output section STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS FUSE A OUT 1 10 OUT 1 10 OUT i i0 OUT i 10 OUT 1 10 OUT 1 i0 OUT i iO OUT 1 10 OUT 1 10 OUT 1 10 OUT i 10 OUT 1 10 OUT 1 10 OUT 1 10 O ei OE1 OEi OE OE OE OE OEei OS OE OE1 OEi OE OE Or Or Or O Or O O Or Or Or Or Or Or Or out 11 20 our 11 20 OUT 11 20 out 11 20 out 11 20 our 11 20 ouT 11 20 out 11 20 our 11 20 our 11 20 out 11 20 our 11 20 out 11 20 ovt 11 20 O ei OE OEi OEi CIE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE Or Or O Or Or Or LAMP TEST POWER A E D G W POWER B E OSCILLOQUARTZ L Z LOQUAI i Z LOQUARTZ L LOQUARTZ LOQUARTZ L z LOQUI U Z LOQUARTZ ILLOQUARTZ L Z OSCILLOQUARTZ OSCILLOQUARTZ OSCILLO QUARTZ 55480 55480 SSU SSU STATUS STATUS STA
287. n sees Ea EEEE aaa 3 8 3 6 Remote CommunicatiOn n xrnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnnennn 3 8 3 7 Required Tools amp Material r annxrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnvennnnnennnnnvnnnnnnennnnnernnnnennnn 3 9 EQUIPMENT NETTLIN 4 1 4 1 GLT EE NR ON NE RE 4 3 4 2 Bs re gt RE EEE 4 4 4 3 Rack MOUNN 22 essensen 4 5 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 vi Contents 4 3 1 Mounting the Shelf in the Rack eee 4 5 4 3 2 Remote Power Input and Management Panel Mounting sss eee ee 4 7 4 3 3 Remote Output Panel Mounting sese ee eee ee e e ee e e 4 9 4 4 Grounding amp Power ConnectiOn s xxrannnxvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnvennnnnnnevnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnne 4 11 BS COMMCCUONS sr E 4 15 4 5 1 Input ANd GPS Connectors sese eee e e ee 4 15 252 Output COMMO CONS sirenes E eunrendensntedsiusensncmiademnnedins 4 20 4 6 MANS oo crc ta ee ec ele akc E eee ve epee eat eee enews eu eom A 4 30 4 6 1 ENN 4 31 4 6 2 Output Alarm Groups e eee ee eee ee 4 33 4 7 Cabling Communication POrtS rnrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnunevnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunerr 4 35 4 7 1 Local ONS COM EEE ER 4 35 4 7 2 Ethernet LAN Connection sees eee ee eee ee 4 37 4 8 Installation Check LiSt rannnnnnnnrnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennnnennnnennnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnn 4 38 TURT ENE NE 5 1 5 1 OLT EEE NE EE EE 5 3 5 2 BOW SO e oneei E Ar EAEE e
288. ncy Selection is based on e User defined priority table e Input signal alarms detection e Input signal performance measurements e Synchronization Status Message SSM 2 3 2 Jitter attenuation The selected input reference signal may be affected by phase variations known as jitter The OSA 5548C SSU can filter this jitter by tracking the internal oscillators on the selected input and distributing 2 048 Mbit s E1 a 2 048 MHz signals with a reduced level of jitter 2 3 0 Holdover Freerun mode When all input references are unavailable the OSA 5548C SSU generates output signals based on the high quality internal oscillator The end user can select the appropriate type of oscillator e Rubidium oscillator for enhanced SSU Type II holdover performance characteristic e OSA 8663 quartz oscillator for SSU A Type and V holdover performance characteristics 2 3 4 Signal distribution The OSA 5548C SSU equipment distributes up to 200 synchronization signals The 10 Output Card groups generate 2 048 Mbit s E1 or 2 048MHz Depending on the configuration output signals are unprotected or protected In the protected mode each output signal is generated by two independent cards one for one protection OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 20 Product Overview 2 3 5 Time Distribution Up to 10 TCC NTP cards can be installed in the OSA 5548C SSU Each takes the place of an OUC group and makes the OS
289. net Connection 7 2 2 5 NTP Connection Procedure STEP ACTION 1 Connect a 10 or 100 Base T cable with RJ 45 terminations into the connector labeled NTP and the other end plugged into the Ethernet network LAN WAN 2 If not yet done connectyour computer to the same Ethernet Network and control that your IP address Subnet Mask address as well as the Gateway setting are correctly configured to work within the LAN 3 Run the SyncView software or Syncterminal 4 Open the right windows Using SyncView software Click right mouse on the equipment and select physical or logical view OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 7 Commissioning STEP ACTION 100096 5548C 5 N 110 55480 550 Lx 149 133 41 1 TOE Tu Connecting to 149 133 41 194 8000 Connected OPT QuiPmenT TCC card configuration RTRV EQPT TINY ReTRieVe EQuiPmenT Tcu INVentory ED EQPT CMOD EDit EQuiPmenT Client MODe RTRV EQPT CMOD ReTRieve EQuiPmenT Client MODe 4 ED EQPT AUTH EDit EQuiPmenT AUTHentication 4 RTRY EQPT AUTH ReTRieVe EQuiPmenT AUTHentication 4 ED EQPT KEY EDit EQuiPmenT KEY 4 RTRV EQPT KEYS ReTRieve EQuiPmenT KEYS onfiguration SSU TSG Small Large IPADDRESS ED EQPT TCC OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 8 Commissioning 5 Using Syncview software logical view Click right mouse on the TCC area and select details
290. ng in stand by mode a regular once a year preventive maintenance is recommended 8 1 1 LEDs Test The following is a LAMP test procedure to be done physically on the shelf and or via software STEP ACTION 1 Push the switch labeled LAMP TEST on the POWER A card and check that 1 The test lasts about 10 seconds 2 All LEDs have lit during all the test duration 3 The bicolor LEDs have lit in RED during 5 seconds and then GREEN during the remaining 5 seconds 2 Repeat the lamp test after sending the following TL1 command OPR LEDS I i0IAG Procedure 8 1 LEDs Maintenance Test OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 3 8 1 2 Stand by Cards Test Maintenance amp Troubleshooting When the shelf has a complete card group e g INC 1 A amp INC 1 B which means that most of the time the slave card remains in stand by it is recommended to check it in order to ensure that it is still working correctly For that purpose use the following procedure STEP ACTION 1 Study the card configuration to check if it contains e 2x INC card in the same group e 2x GPS card e 2x THC card e 2x MAC card 2 If you get one or more of the above conditions you can swap the stand by card to become active with the following command SW DX INC 1 INC 2 GPS THC MAC CTAG 3 Check that the card which has became active is working like the previous one Allow for THC card settling time Procedure 8 2 Stand by Cards M
291. nnector Tile Description sse eee eee e eee 2 68 Figure 2 43 Power Connector Tile sse eee eee 2 69 Figure 2 44 Management Connectors Tile sese eee eee 2 70 Figure 2 45 Alarm Out Connectors rrnrrrnrrnranenanrrnanrnnnnnvanennnnnnanrnnnrnnanennannnanennnsnnanennannnnnennnsee 2 73 Figure 2 46 Master amp Expansion Rotary Switch eee 2 74 Fe TN ANER 2 15 Figure 2 48 100 Outputs Ports Remote Panel eee ee 2 17 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 xi List of Figures Figure 2 49 ASYM Output Connectors Tiles ee eee 2 78 Figure 2 50 SUB D Output Connectors Tiles ss eee eee 2 79 Figure 2 51 IDC Output Connectors Tiles sees 2 80 Figure 2 52 TCC NTP OGPUT UT 2 81 Figure 2 50 Remote BNC panel Front View see ee e eee ee e 2 82 Figure 2 51 Remote BNC panel Top View eee eee ee 2 82 Figure 2 55 SyncView PLUS Logical View example rrrrnnrrnnnrrrrnrrrrnnrrnnnrrvrnnrrrnnernnsrennnnen 2 84 Figure 2 56 SyncView PLUS Physical View example e e e e 2 85 Figure 2 57 SyncView PLUS Network Manager version Synchronization Network General View Og 10 1 EEE ENE EN 2 85 Figure 2 58 SyncTerminal example rrrnnnrrnnnrrrnnrrrnnnrrnnnvrnnnrnnanrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnen 2 86 FE 3 1 lt Dimensional Eek Se akr nede 3 5 Figure 3 2 Remote BNC panel Front View eee eee ee eee 3 7 Figure 3 3 Remote BNC panel Top View see ee eee 3 7 Foure 4 1 R RACK M
292. nnrnnnennnennnennnennsenusenusnnusnnnennn 6 186 Table 6 21 Default Ym Threshold sese 6 187 Table 6 22 Not retrievable with TL1 commands for evident security reason eee ee 6 191 Table 7 1 End of Commissioning Check LIST sese eee ee 7 42 Table 8 1 Input Card Troubleshooting visible LEDS e eee ee ee 8 8 Table 8 2 Tracking Holdover Card Troubleshooting visible LEDS e eee ee 8 10 Table 8 3 GNSS Card Troubleshooting visible LEDS rrrrrrrranernnrrnnrrnrarnvnnennennranennnnnnnnennanennee 8 12 Table 8 4 Tracking Holdover Card Troubleshooting visible LEDS e eee ee 8 14 Table 8 5 OUtput Card Troubleshooting visible LEDS rrrrrrnrrrnrrrnrerarerarerernnernrernnernnernnnenunenene 8 20 Table 8 6 Time Code Card Troubleshooting visible LEDS cccccecceecceeeceeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 21 Table 8 7 Time Code Card Turn up Status ccccccccccccccscesseeceeeseeeeseeeneeeeeseeeseeeseeseeeeseeaneegeees 8 22 Table 8 8 MAnangement Card Troubleshooting visible LEDS see eee e 8 25 Table 8 9 Time Code Card NTP Troubleshooting visible LEDS rrrrrrrorrrrarernrrvnernrarernnennnnennnne 8 26 Table 8 10 Time Code Card NTPTurn up Status sss eee eee eee 8 27 Table 8 11 Power Card Troubleshooting visible LEDS rrrrrrnrrrnrrrnnernneranennnnnennnernnernnernnnennnennnr 8 28 Table 8 12 Troubleshooting visible with Software sse e ee e ee 8 39 Table 9 1 Communication Specifications rrrrrrrnrerarerarevare
293. nrnannnnrnannnnnnannnnrnnennnnnnnnunnnnrnuenanenennnnnannnnen 6 18 Table 6 5 Default Communication Ports eee eee eee eee 6 20 Table 6 6 Ethernet Horts eee ee 6 20 Table 6 7 Communication Parameter Names eee ee ee eee 6 22 Table 6 8 Keyboard Shortcuts for Typing TL1 Commands rrararnnnnnanannanennnennnnnnanennnnnnnnennanennne 6 36 Table 6 9 5548C Type Information sse eee ee eee ee 6 51 Table 6 10 Lamp Test SeoguenCe see eee e ee 6 62 Table 6 11 Possible Input Configurations see eee ee e eee e 6 65 Table 6 12 Input Line Editing Setting cc ccccceccseeeceseceececaeeceeeeceeesaueesanesageeceeeseeseeseesaseensees 6 71 Table 6 13 Output GroupTL1 Abbreviations rrrrrnnrrnnrrnneranrraneranerannnannnarnnernnernneenunenunenunenunenn 6 124 Table 6 14 Output Line TL1 Abbreviations sese eee eee ee 6 124 Table 615 SSM amp Quality E 6 151 Table 6 16 Delays and Intervals to Retrieve MTIE PM Results eee 6 181 Table 6 17 Delays and Intervals to Retrieve TDEV PM Results rrnrrnarnnrrnnrnnrrnnrnannnernnennnnnn 6 181 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 XIV List of Tables Table 6 18 Delays to Retrieve Ym PM Results rrrrrarrnnrnnrrnnrnarrnrnnnrnnrnnennnnnernnnnnnennnnnennennnnenn 6 181 Table 6 19 Default MTIE Threshold rrarnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnernnennnenanennnennnnnernnennneennsenneennsennsene 6 185 Table 6 20 Default TDEV Threshold rrnnrrnnrnnnrnnnenanennnenanrnnrnnnnr
294. ns being retrieved CONDTYPE CONDTYPE NULL Type of alarm condition SRVEFF SA NSA NULL Effect on service caused by the alarm LOCN NEND FEND NULL Single location for which an alarm DIRN TRMT RCV BTH NA NULL Direction of the alarm condition relative to the identified entity TMPER NULL Accumulation time period for PM Performance Measurement parameters 31 occurred occurred CONDDESCR CONDDESCR NULL Detailed text description of the trouble Limited to 64 characters enclosed within escaped quotes AIDDET NULL Supplementary equipment identification used to identify the location of the reported OBSDBHVR NULL Observed behavior that resulted in this reported trouble Limited to 512 characters enclosed within escaped quotes EXPTDBHVR NULL Expected behavior whose deviation is described in observed behavior that resulted in this reported trouble Limited to 512 characters enclosed within escaped quotes to isolate the trouble TBLISLT NULL Significance of the isolation information provided by the card or element in question included in this message OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 174 Operating amp Provisioning 6 11 5 5 Message Encapsulated in Event EVT Report This message is spontaneously reported by the OSA 5548C SSU when an event occurs Output Syntax sid date time almcde ctag REPT EVT aid ntfcncde condtype srveff ocrdat ocrtm locn
295. o parts a request to the 5548C to get or set information and a response from the 5548C containing completion or status codes and requested or chained information e Autonomous events These are events alarms or otherwise that the 5548C emits indicating some change in its state The user executes TL1 requests via the SyncView PLUS or a command line interface CLI like the SyncTerminal software and receives notifications from the OSA 5548C SSU autonomous events The TL1 message is easy to understand each component of the message is easily identifiable Below is an example of an ED EQPT OL message which sets Output Line OG parameters such as the squelch state and tits tag ED EQPT OL TID 1 1 CTAG SQUELCH OFF TAG my tag A B C D E F G Command Staging block Payload block code block A The TL1 main command defines the function to be executed in the OSA 5548C SSU It is composed by different abbreviations like ED for Editing RTRV for Retrieving DLT for deleting in the form VERB MOD1 MOD2 More details about abbreviation are described in next sections B Target Identifier TID is required in all input commands but its value can be null In the 5548C the TID is represented between two brackets and T as it is an optional value C Access Identifier AID contains parameters that uniquely identify the entity within or associated to the OSA 5548C SSU In the above example it corresponds to the Output Group
296. o the rack ground Follow your company procedures for shield grounding The screws on all cable connectors must be correctly fastened to their corresponding connectors During 5548C operation there must be a card or blank panel installed in every slot and tile position The locking screws on every card and tile should be correctly tightened On GPS antenna BNC connector where no GPS antenna cable is connected to a BNC caps must be mounted on AN CAUTION Use only shielded cabling on all telecom signals wiring including input output management and Ethernet connections Ensure that connections are properly grounded 3 4 Rack Preparation 3 4 1 Shelf Preparation Consider the following size to install the OSA 5548C SSU E200 e Vertical rack size 26 6 cm 10 5 inches 6U e Depth rack size 24 60 cm 9 7 inches e Width rack size 53 3 cm 21 inches ETSI or 48 26 cm 19 0 inches 19 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 3 4 Pre Installation Considerations Consider 4 screws to tighten the shelf using the 2 holes in each the mounting ears 404 mm 20 98 in e ISH 533 mm 15 98 in gt ETSI G t gt 482 6 mm 19 0 in gt 19 ET ee s ee ee ee ee eee s s e e 240 mm 9 45 in x es v es x m v gt e e
297. ober 2012 4 4 Equipment Installation 4 3 Rack Mounting An installed OSA 5548C SSU E200 occupies the following space in the rack Also see Figure 4 1 e Vertical rack size 26 6 cm 10 5 inches 6U e Depth rack size 24 60 cm 9 7 inches e Width rack size 53 3 cm 21 inches ETSI or 48 26 cm 19 0 inches 19 Refer to picture Figure 3 1 for more details about dimension A CAUTION Each OSA 5548C SSU must have at least 1 RU 1 75in 4 5 mm below the shelf to allow for adequate convection cooling 4 3 1 Mounting the Shelf in the Rack STEP ACTION 1 Check the position in which to fit the shelf in the rack 2 Mount the OSA 5548C SSU carefully onto the rack rails from the front of the rack and fix it using four screws and their corresponding washers Procedure 4 1 Rack Mounting OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 5 Equipment Installation Remote Output Panel Remote IN PWR and MGMT Panel STATUS status status STATUS STATUS our 1 10 Ons Occ gt 4 holes to fix the 5548C into the rack POWER OUC BBIOSCILLOQUARTZ E OSCLLOQUARTZ 5548C 5548C TSG TSG s STATUS STATUS i status status status status o o o 0 o 0 o 0 o OnoLooveR O HOLDOVER Onst Oostum e 7 ou
298. off alarm configuration A Note Retrieve current configuration in section 6 11 1 1 On the MAC card s front panel there are two colomns of Alarm level LEDs labeled 1 amp 2 It is possible to cutoff the LEDs on first second both ranges or disabling the ACO none Using TL1 Input Syntax ED EQPT MAC ctag ACO aco Example ED EQPT MAC MYCTAG ACO 2 Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters ACO 1 2 BOTH NONE 1 This is the parameter to choose for applying the cutoff on the range 1 2 both ranges or none OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 162 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt MAC gt Alarm Cutoff Mac Alarm Cutoff Config O Select the colomn 1 2 or both 6 11 1 4 Alarm Escalation The OSA 5548C SSU has the capability to escalate the severity of an active alarm to a higher level after a defined time 24 hours by default Example After a delay of 24 hours an active alarm with a Minor MN severity will escalate to a Major MJ severity A Note Retrieve current configuration in section 6 11 1 1 Using TL1 To modify the escalation delay the following command is required Input Syntax ED EQPT MAC ctag ALMESC almesc Example ED EQPT MAC MYCTAG ALMESC 48 Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters AL
299. om empty slots we recommend disabling delete the empty slots STEP ACTION 1 Locate the empty slot s 2 Send the following command selecting the corresponding slot DLT EQPT INC 1 A INC 2 B GPS A GPS B THC A THC B SGC A SGC B 0UC 1 A OUC 10 B MAC A MAC B CTAG Verify then that no alarms are reported by the slots deleted sending the following command RTRV ALM INC INC 1 INC 2 GPS THC SGC O0UC OUC 1 OUC 10 MAC ALL CTAG Procedure 7 9 Disabling Empty unused Slots 125 Input Lines 7 2 5 1 E1 Input Line Configuration STEP ACTION 1 Check the E1 port where the input line IL you want to configure is connected 2 Configure the connector E1 1 to E1 4 required to attribute to any of the 4 possible input lines between 1 1 and 1 4 sending the following command ED EQPT IL input_line CTAG INPUT E1_connector Example ED EQPT IL 1 1 MYCTAG INPUT E1_1 3 Configure the administration state of the line Enabled to allow the 5548C to use it Disable to deactivate the line Monitored to allow the OSA 5548C to measure performance without using it ED EOPT IL input line CTAG ADM STATE ENABLED DISABLED MONITORED Configure the connection type made on the E1 connector Bridged or Terminated with the following command ED EOPT IL input line CTAG TERMINATION TERMINATED BRIDGED OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 15 Commissioning Configure t
300. om of its front panel Procedure 8 3 Card Addition or Replacement OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 43 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 3 3 Connector Tile Insertion The output tiles automatically configure the output when inserted STEP ACTION 1 Locate and verify the position in which to insert the tile 2 If a tile is already fixed unscrew it using a flathead screwdriver 3 Insert the tile slowly into the green printed connector card 4 Verify that the connection has been correctly installed 5 Tighten the four screws of the connector tile Procedure 8 4 Connector Tile Insertion Green printed connector card Back connector panel f j Q Li OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 44 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 4 Fuse Replacement 8 4 1 8 4 2 Introduction The power is distributed from the power connector tiles through the POWER A amp B cards which provide a first power security with the fuse positioned on the front panel Then the power is distributed to each single card in the shelf and then is distributed to each single card in the shelf which converts the shelf power to card power Each card has an independent on board fuse Conditions for Replacing the Fuse 8 4 2 1 POWER Card Fuse If the either POWER Cards LED is not lit Green despite correct power applied to the shelf check the front panel shelf fuse 8
301. opstate Parameter Possible configurations Description name AID INC 1 A INC 2 B GPS A The specified card GPS B THC A THC B SGC A SGC B OUGC 1 A OUC 10 B MAC A MAC B OPSTATE EMPTY EXCTRACTED INIT There are different states DOWNLOAD OK STANDBY EMPTY The card slot are empty ALARM DEGRADED EXTRACTED The card has been TESTERROR DEAD extracted from its respective slot INIT The card is being restarted DOWNLOAD The group firmware is being downloaded OK The card is ACTIVE and is working correctly STANDBY The card is in STAND BY and ready to protect the active card within the same group ALARM The group is in alarm DEGRADED The firmware version is not the same as the rest of the shelf TESTERROR Invalid testing date DEAD The MAC group is not able to communicate with the card or group OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 56 Operating amp Provisioning 6 4 5 Card Deleting for Empty Slot Previously empty slots that are populated automatically update the inventory list If a previously occupied card is removed from its slot the OSA 5548C SSU will set an alarm called IMPROPER REMOVAL To avoid such alarms you can set the corresponding slot to an empty state using the following command 7 Note It is not possible to DELETE or set an empty card state to an OCCUPIED slot 6 4 5 1 Using TL1 Input Syntax DLT EOQPT aid ctag Example
302. ored unless the POINT interval expires UOUT At the end of the UOU T interval the user account is disabled if the user has never been used to set up a session OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 42 Operating amp Provisioning LSTOI Normally used to set what is accessible to the user This parameter is required by Telcordia GR but not used with the 55480 7 Note The parameters in ITALIC are not implemented Oscilloquartz will introduce them upon customer specific security requirements 6 3 6 2 Create a New User Account To create a new user account the following command is required Input Syntax ENT USER SECU aid ctag pid cid uap PAGE page PCND pend PCNN pecnn POINT point UOUT uout LSTOI lLsto1 Example ENT USER SECU USERNAME MY CT AG PASSWORD 8000 amp 8023 amp RS FRONT amp RS REAR X PAGE 90 PCND 7 PCNN 5 name Parameter configurations AD 1 Login or Username UID Any ASCII string Password excluding those characters that represent TL1 syntax of up to 10 characters 0000 9999 RS A list of up to 25 ports or channels FRONT RS REAR When a session initiation request is Each port separated received the NE checks the CID of with a amp the session request against the CID as stoerd in the NE i e in the format of RS FRONT is the RS 232 port on the 8023 amp 8024 amp RS FRONT POWER B RS REAR is the RS 232 po
303. oring Factory Parameters sese eee eee ee ee eee 7 27 7 3 Test and Verification Procedure ccccccsssessessecseesseeceseeseenseeeeeseeseenseesensensonnees 7 28 1 3 1 SUEY CC ION PE E EN NE 1 28 7 3 2 Serial Connection Test Procedure sese eee 7 28 7 3 3 Ethernet Connection Test ProCedure ccccccccceeccseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseneesaeesens 7 29 7 3 4 Verifying Shelf Inventory eee eee e ee e 7 30 7 3 5 Verifying the Shelf Operation Mode see 7 31 7 3 6 LEDs Operation Test Procedure rrrurnnrnnnrnnnrnanennnenanenannnennnernnernnnenneennnen 7 31 7 3 7 Input Line Priority Configuration Testing Procedure sese eee e eee e 1 32 7 3 8 Redundant Card Stand by Test Procedure rrrarananarnaravnnnnvanernnnnvanennn 7 33 1309 VESUNG AIAN ICV EIS pes 1 34 7 3 10 Testing Output Pors eee eee eee 7 35 7 3 11 COMMISSIONING Completion sse eee ee ee e ee ee e 7 40 8 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING munnnnnevnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnvennnnnennnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnvennnn 8 1 8 1 IML PAIN CO aeiaai a i aai 8 3 8 1 1 LEDS TOS r E E enna 8 3 1 2 Stland Dy Cards VCS ectancosectdicaceccaceateustewpresiebacca e A EAEk 8 4 8 2 KOUNESTOO UNN 8 5 8 2 1 Alarm Behavior Visible on Front LEDS rrrrrrrronrvnnrnnnrnnnrnnrrnnrnnernnernnnrnnnr 8 5 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 IX Contents 8 2 2 Alarm Behavior Visible with Software sese eee eee 8 29 8 3 Cards amp Tiles Repl
304. orrectly The card No action needed can be in stand by if the GNSS LED is als OFF Table 8 3 GNSS Card Troubleshooting visible LEDs OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 12 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting EG 2 1 4 aa amp Holdover Card THC a The card is working correctly No action needed RED The card is currently not working or not During the power up sequence the LED can delivering a qualified signal remain red for a while depending on the internal oscillator If the LED stays in this status longer it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair RED Flashing The firmware version installed in the card does Download the correct firmware in the card not correspond or is outdated compared the with the command ACT DNLD after rest of the shelf version verified that the firmware is in the MAC card ORANGE A new card s firmware is being downloaded No action needed Noactionneeded 4 OFF Dead no power is supplied to the card Test the THC s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair HOLDOVER RED FREE RUN condition if after the warmup If this situation was expected no action are mode the OSA 5548C is not connected to needed otherwise follow the next input reference signal Check that the INC cards are plugged HOLDOVER condition when the OSA 5548C properly has lost all its input references Verify that the INC cards have no alarms Verify that
305. ower connector on each Power tiles using a screwdriver 6 The minimum conductor size of the power cord must be at least 2mm Connect primary power to the connectors on the POWER A tile and secondary power on the POWER B tile R Recommendation use a spade lug termination for each power wire 7 Measure voltages and polarities of the external power sources before connecting them to the OSA 5548C The voltages must be within the specified ranges 40 to 60VDC 8 To ensure that the power connections to the 5548C are correct use the following procedure 1 Disconnect the 48V wires from the POWER A amp B tiles and leave the Return battery connected 2 On the power tile use a Multimeter to measure the voltage between the following points TESTPOINT1 TESTPOINT2 VALUE OK POWERA POWERB o U POWERA POWERA o J CJ POWERA GROUND o J CJ POWERB POWERB o J CJ POWERB GROUND UW U 3 Reconnect the 48V wires on to the POWER A and B connectors 4 Measure the following points TEST POINT 1 TEST POINT 2 VALUE OK POWER A POWER A 40 to 60VDC POWER B POWER B 40 to 60VDC U 9 Replace the plastic protection on the power connector of both Power Tiles 10 T Please refer to chapter 5 for Turn Up Procedures Procedure 4 3 Grounding amp Power connection OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 13 Equipment Installa
306. p 2D oo A Zen cDxX es DJ Gas ax D 2A D z 9 T D O O OO a EXPANSION ALARM LAN LINK A LINK B INPUTS COMM OE h Q g ANTENNA E e j CJ i j LOCAL ALARM OUT COMM GROUP 1 40 60v GPS 1 GPS 2 1 1 o o Se K i o o o o C 6 3A Je Jo 0 o o o ALARM OUT PPS I PPS 2 GROUP 2 BJOSCILLOQUARTZ INPUT ILE Figure 4 11 Input Tile on the Remote Panel OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 15 A s C le gt 6 e e e 6 status T Talus statu us Tatu Tus 1 status 1 ul 10 MT ti wT tne wT i UT tt UT f 1 UT tet WT 1 10 T 1 10 E E fI f EI Wi t OG ft El E U out 11 20 ou 1 2 Our 11 20 oul 11 out 11 20 T 11 20 oul 11 out 11 f 1 pn 1 E 1 Ei EI t t t t t t t t r t R RU moc oaar 1010 lao alda O la 14919 lda Io a s dO O 140 Q ILLOQUAR ISCILLOQUAR gt 5 A A gt fa gt 6 S Figure 4 12 Input and GPS Cards Location o 0000 ROE ORION MOE N INC1 INC2 GPS The input connectors are processed by the 2 INC groups INC Group 1 and INC Group 2 The INC groups can qualify or monitor up to 8 input lines IL among the 16 input connectors available 2x 4 E1 and 2x 4 Freq
307. pe as well as E1 code and frame types according to the user needs Here are the points treated in this section e Basics on SGC and OUC cards operation to better understand how to proceed with the following points in this section e SGC group state and parameters e OUC group state and parameters e Output signal type configuration e Output Line state and output squelch configuration e Output E1 code amp frame configuration 6 9 1 The Basics of SGC amp OUC Operation 6 9 1 1 Operation To obtain clock signal on the output cards after the operation of input signal treatment and filtering the SGC Signal Generation Card cards generate all possible signal types supplied to the OUC OUtput card Signal cards the expansion shelves amp PPS 7 ee outputs as well as for 5548C options G such as TCC NTP and TCC PTP cards This is illustrated in the colored part of the following diagram gt Up to 3 slots inctionality Ethernet pert Up to 4 chained Slave or Expansion Shelves 2xPPS outputs Figure 6 18 SGC and OUC Operation OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 121 6 9 1 2 OUC Cards amp Output Tiles Relation On the shelf the cards and output tile connectors are configured as illustrated below OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM Operating amp Provisioning OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM
308. pically it is 3 to 5 times Password Obsolescence Intervall in days When a user receives a prompt to change the PID no old PID can be restored unless the intervall POINT expires since that old PID became obsolete Typically it is about 180 UID Aging Intervall in days At the end of this intervall the UID is disabled if during this intervall it has never been used to set up a session Typically it is between 45 and 90 NOT USED IN 5548C List of Object Identifiers These identifiers specify what is accessible to this UID The list may indicate channels commands It may be a range all objects none It is an application dependant requirement 6 47 Operating amp Provisioning 6 3 6 5 Delete an User Account To delete a user account the following command is required Input Syntax PLT USER SE UA Otag Example DLT USER SECU USERNAME MY CT AG Parameter Default Possible configurations Description name Parameter AD pf Login or Username UID 6 3 6 6 Disabling or Enabling an User Account To disable an existing user without deleting the user account the following command is required Input Syntax INH USER SECU 2 GL 99 Z uid Example INH USER SECU MYCTAG USERNAME To enable an existing user currently disabled the following command is required Input Syntax ALWN USER SECU sad ULA Example ALW USER SECU MYCTAG USERNAME Parameter Default Possible configurations
309. ple RTRV INV INC 1 A MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax Sake date time M otag COMPLD aid slot article serial clei eci hw sw test upgrade 7 Parameter Possible configurations Description name AID INC INC 1 INC 2 INC 1 A INC 2 Abbreviation of the card card B GPS GPS A GPS B THC THC group card type or all cards Refer A THC B SGC SGC A SGC B to the section 6 2 1 3 for more OUC OUC 1 0UC 10 OUC 1 details about abbreviations A OUC 10 B MAC MAC A MAC B ALL card corresponding card corresponding card TEST 2004 01 01 2099 12 31 Testing date UPGRADE 2004 01 01 2099 12 31 Last software upgrade date OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 53 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Right Click on the element icon and select Inventory I Inventory 5548C SSU E200 NER File Refresh INC 1 B A014015 cleilNCTSG j 0110 0100 INC 2 A A014015 cleilNCTSG j 0110 INC 2 B A014015 cleilNCTSG j 0110 0100 NNN N THC A A013973 clei THCTSG THC B A013973 cleiTHCTSG MADDS A A014283 cleiMADTSG MADDS B A014283 cleiMADTSG SGC A A014067 cleiSGCTSG SGC B A014067 cleiSGCTSG OUC 1 A A014036 cleiOUCTSG A014036 cleiOUCTSG A014036 cleiOUCTSG A014036 cleiOUCTSG A014036 cleiOUCTSG A014036 cleiOUCTSG A014036 cleiOUCTSG A014036 cleiOUCTSG A014036 107 cleiOUCTSG A014036 214 cleiOUCTSG 0110 0100 0110 0100 0110 0100 0110 0100 0110 010
310. prompted as below Sid date time M Ctag COMP LD HLDVR hdlvr UNK unk FRCD fred OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 154 Operating amp Provisioning To configure the SSM parameters this command is required Input Syntax ED SSM ctag UNK unk FRCD fred Example ED SSM MYCTAG UNK DUS Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations Parameter HLDVR SSU A SSU A This is the quality supplied when the THC runs in holdover The 5548C always supply a SSU A quality when it is running in holdover PRC SSU A This is the value supplied when TE B SEC DNU SO me system cannot recognize the i a me on the input FRCD PRC SSU_A NONE This is the override quality level SSU B SEC DNU and supersedes the input SSM NONE DISABLED level Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt SSM gt Details Unknown Map Select the SSM Quality to supply when the SSM on the specified is unknown SSM Details From DB Unknown Map Output Forced Select the SSM Quality to force on all E1 output lines OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 155 Operating amp Provisioning 6 10 2 4 Sa bit Configuration on Input Lines This section describes how to configure the Sa bit to receive SSM from the E1 input line IL The Sa bit selection depends to the E1 signal connected to the 5548C A Note Read section In
311. put Card A22 gt gt U OUC NTP PTP OUC 4 NTP 4 PTP 4 w O C O OUtput Card TCC NTP card A24 TCC PTP card N OUC NTP PTP OUC 5 NTP 5 PTP 5 gt A25 OUtput Card w O C O OUtput Card TCC NTP card A26 TCC PTP card gt 65 O C OUC NTP PTP OUC 6 NTP 6 PTP 6 A27 OUtput Card OUtput Card TCC NTP card A28 TCC PTP card OUC NTP PTP OUC 7 NTP 7 PTP 7 A29 OUtput Card w O C O OUtput Card TCC NTP card ASO TCC PTP card Ke a OUC 8 NTP 8 PTP 8 A31 OUtput Card B OUC A32 OUtput Card TCC NTP card A OUC NTP PTP TCC PTP card OUC 9 NTP 9 PTP 9 A33 OUtput Card OUtput Card TCC NTP card A34 TCC PTP card aN gt gt UV O C OUC NTP PTP OUC 10 NTP 10 PTP 10 A35 OUtput Card 65 O C O A36 Empty A37 Power B UU PWR B PWR A Master card amp B Slave card protection card OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 33 Product Overview Table 2 1 Card Locations 2 5 2 Card Description The overall physical layout is similar for all cards LOCATING TEETH DIN CONNECTOR SERIAL NUMBER FRONT PANEL CARD ABBREVIATION amp PART NUMBER BAIL HANDLE WJ LOCKING SCREWS Figure 2 20 Physical Card Description e Front panel This is the metallic panel where LEDs and some of the following components are on e Locking screws These 2 screw
312. put connector to Input Line IL description 6 5 to understand the concept of cross connection of input lines to physical input port and to retrieve the current configuration A Note To configure the Sa bit in the E1 signal supplied by the 5548C refer to section 6 9 4 1 and 6 9 4 2 Using TL1 To retrieve the current Sa bit configuration send the following command Input Syntax RTRV EQPT IL aid ctag Example RTRV EOPT IL 1 1 MICTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M tag COMPLD aid opstate ssm INPUT input ADM_STATE adm_state TERM term CODE code WIR wtr FRCD frcd OOF DETECT o00f detect CRC4_DETECT crc4_ detect BPV_DETECT bpv_detect SA4 sa4 SA5 sa5 SA6 sa6 SA7 sail7 SA8 sa8 FREQ freq TAG tag OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 156 Operating amp Provisioning To edit Sa configurations the following command is required Input Syntax ED EQPT IL aid ctag SSM BIT ssm bit Example ED EQPT IL 1 2 MYCTAG SSM_BIT SA4 name configurations parameters AID 1 1 2 4 ALL This is the input line abbreviation The first digit is the group number and the second digit is the input number 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 SSM PRC SSU A NONE This is the input line SSM quality SSU_B SEC DNU FAILED NONE DISABLED SA4 JOFFONSSM ValueoftheSa4bt SAR OFFON SSM JValueoftheSaSbit SAR JOFFON SSM ValueoftheSa6bt SA JOFFONSSM Valueoft
313. r Parameter Possible configurations Default Description name parameters FTP 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 IP address of the FTP or the FTP domain name server where the firmware files can be downloaded SRC_PATH This is the path where the folder is located from the root of the FTP server K H T FTP server kl FTP server Table 6 22 Not retrievable with TL1 commands for evident security reason OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 191 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Go to Configuration gt FTP Downloader iT ae m re laser isg Ej isen N L KA I a r I CMA NSA eh 4 olde e Network Introduce the FTP IP Address the path FTP Server Path to where the Firmware files are located in the server from the root the FTP User Name and Password and click OK OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 192 Operating amp Provisioning 6 13 3 2 Downloading Files from the FTP Server After setting up the FTP configuration in the OSA 5548C SSU the download of the firmware files from the FTP server to the MAC card can be executed A Note After download completes the files are stored in the MAC card however cards are not upgraded yet For card upgrading follow the next section R Recommendation Check that the Ethernet connection between the FTP server and the OSA 5548C SSU is correctly established prior to starting the file download
314. r This SUB D 25 pins male connector provides 10 input alarms capability to connect input alarms from a third party device to be stored and reported by the 5548C EXT ALARM DESCRIPTION PIN Severity INPUTS CRITICAL 0 CRITICAL Alarmed GROUND GND Not Connected Table 2 18 Ext Alarm Inputs Connector Description ALARM OUT Connectors OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 72 Product Overview These 2 SUB D 9 pins female connectors report alarms of the 5548C through Normally Opened NO and Normally Closed NC relay in order to forward current alarm severity to a third party device ALARM OUT GROUP 1 ALARM OUT GROUP 1 ALARM OUT GROUP 2 9 ALARM OUT GROUP 2 SEVERITY NO C NC gt CRITICAL 1 6 2 gt MAJOR 7 3 8 MINOR 4 9 5 Figure 2 45 Alarm Out Connectors OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 73 Product Overview 2 5 16 5 Master and Expansion Address Rotary Switch As the 5548C has the same hardware for MASTER or EXPANSION shelf functions this Rotary Switch controls configuration of the shelf as MASTER or EXPANSION shelf address using a flathead screwdriver AN Caution The configuration of the shelf with the rotary switch must be done before powering the shelf during the installation and commissioning procedure The configuration does not change when the shelf is powered EXPANSION SHELF 4 E
315. r 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 OOF DETECT DISABLED ENABLED Determine whether an Out Of ENABLED 10 4 10 Frame alarm should be detected 3 10 2 and generated or not 10 4 10 3 or 10 2 means that the alarms are enabled with a specific threshold i e 10E 4 10E 3 or 10E 2 In that case an alarm is produced when false words rate of the total number 4000 during 1s is higher or equal than the selected Threshold CRC4 DETECT DISABLED DISABLED Determine whether an CRC 4 ENABLED 10 4 10 alarm should be detected and 3 10 2 generated or not 10 4 10 3 amp 10 2 enables the alarm detection threshold i e 10E 4 10E 3 or 10E 2 In that case an alarm is produced when false CRC 4 values rate of the total number 1000 during 1s is higher or equal than the Threshold selected BPV_DETECT DISABLED DISABLED Determine whether a Bipolar ENABLED 10 4 10 Violation BPV alarm when using 3 10 2 AMI code or Code Violation alarm when using HDB3 code should be detected and generated or not 10 4 10 3 amp 10 2 enables the alarm detection threshold i e 10E 4 10E 3 or 10E 2 In that case an alarm is produced when BPV or CV rate of the total number 2 048E 06 during 1s is higher or equal than the Threshold selected Not configurable with software Using SyncView Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt Input 1 8 gt Details gt Input Alarm Detection OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual R
316. r 1 40 our 1 19 J an 1 10 anr 110 Onn owl lT osl os osl Ox Occ Ore Oce Occ Ouse OOc our 11 20 owr n our nf ovr 11 201 O Oxy On Os UT osl 00m C Oce Oce Orc O Onto 3 IO 19 191918 28 H He 181012 19189182 10 1 21212910 101910 19 19 1RU of clearance Remote Output Panel Rack Figure 4 1 Rack Mounting OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Equipment Installation 4 3 2 Remote Power Input and Management Panel Mounting It is recommended to mount the Remote Panel once the OSA 5548C SSU is installed It is possible to mount the panel above or below the shelf leaving enough space 1 RU for cable and adequate convection cooling 4 holes to fix the 5548C into the rack PUTS INEU i FREQ GROUP I 3 G STATUS Status STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS Status STATUS STATUS STATUS status f gg STATUS Use the type and style fus CEES CEE CERES CE CERES CoE a 1 Z 1D 10 14 19 149 O status status STATUS STATUS Status STATUS status status STATUS status Status STATUS status stalus oz E amp HOLDUVER R 0000 9 89909999 INC RITA Fine RY IY RTT fine scc I scc If ouc I ouc I ouc I ouc Ii ouc J ouc Jf mac JE R fe fp R Figure 4 2 Mounting Re
317. r each individual input signal if the input signal is not an E1 signal or if it does not include the Synchronization Status Message The 5548C can read SSM on all the Sa bits according to the user configuration Then based on the extracted Synchronization Status Message SSM Clock quality or user defined level the OSA 5548C SSU will automatically select the higher quality input reference signal In normal operation the SSM output value corresponds to the reference input signal s SSM In holdover mode the SSM byte corresponds to the quality level of the internal oscillator OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 21 Product Overview 2 3 8 Pass through In case of failure or extraction of internal oscillators THC cards the equipment will automatically activate its pass through Clock bypass function when at least one input signal 2 048MHz E1 or GPS is connected and qualified to the INC Group 1 It is an autonomous option of last resort in SSU input selection upon critical internal failure to prevent prolonged outage The selected input signal is directly connected to the Signal Generator Cards SGC allowing all Output Cards to generate synchronization signals The output signal quality will be in this pass through operating mode the same as the selected input signal no filtering and jitter attenuation A Note Upon switching to the pass through mode the output signal can be affected
318. rameter Possible configurations Description name INC 1 INC 2 GPS THC MAC The specified card OPSTATE EMPTY EXCTRACTED INIT OK There are different status DOWNLOAD OK STANDBY EMPTY The card slot are empty ALARM DEGRADED EXTRACTED The card has been TESTERROR DEAD extracted from its respective slot INIT The card is being restarted DOWNLOAD The group firmware is being downloaded OK The card is ACTIVE and is working correctly STANDBY The card is in STAND BY and ready to protect the active card within the same group ALARM The group is in alarm DEGRADED The firmware version is not the same as the rest of the shelf TESTERROR Invalid testing date DEAD The MAC group is not able to communicate 6 4 6 2 Using SyncView Go to the Physical View gt right click on a protected pair of card INC GPS THC gt Switch OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 59 Operating amp Provisioning 6 4 7 Card Firmware Initialization To re initialize the firmware embedded in one of the 5548C s card apply the TL1 command instructions below CAUTION This command is SERVICE AFFECTING and will require a consultation with a Customer Support amp Services CSS representative to assess the potential of outage and post operation effects For those who are unfamiliar with this command contact your local CSS for instructions and always perform this command in MAINTENANCE WINDOW PE
319. rarerarerarrnnernennnennnenanennnennsenusnnunnnennn 9 3 Table 9 2 Input SpecificationS rrrrrnnrrnnrrarerarrranerarrnnnrnnvnnnrnnnrrnnennnennnenusenuennuenneennsennsennsennsennnennn 9 5 Table 9 3 Tracking Holdover Specifications eee e ee e eee 9 5 Table 9 4 Performance Measurement PM Specifications ce e ee e 9 6 Table 95 Output SHSCIICAU ONS acissincerssvinccosantaaaninteascetentacdwssdauiawadsancidtaraiietadntndcspuacraaaimiaeinabenaest ns 9 7 Table 9 6 NTP SpecificatloNS vrede 9 7 Table ST PIP Telenn lennen 9 7 Table 9 8 General Alarms Specifications ccccceccsecceseceeeceeeteeeteeeteeeseeceeeceseeeueeeeeeseeteeeteeeeeeees 9 8 Table 9 9 Input Alarms Specifications eee e ee eee eee e ee 9 8 Table 9 10 Output Alarms Relays Specifications rarrrarerarerarrnnrrnnrrnnrrnnrnnnrnnnennnennnennnnnnennnennnennn 9 9 Table 9 11 Power Supply Specifications ee eee e e e e e 9 9 Table 9 12 Mechanical Specifications e eee e ee e 9 10 Table 9 13 General SpecificationsS rrrarerarrnnrrnnrrnnrrnnernneranenanennnrnavnnernnernnnennnennnenunnnennnennennnene 9 11 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 XV List of Procedures List of Procedures Page Procedure 4 1 Rack IVI OUI EE 4 5 Procedure 4 2 Remote Panel Mounting sss ee eee eee e eee ee 4 8 Procedure 4 3 Grounding amp Power connection rrrurnrurnanennrevnnevnnenanernnerarnnnennennnenunenunenunenenene 4 13 Procedure 4 4 Cabling a Frequen
320. ration The ED EQPT PTPC PRIO TL1 command allows configuring several parameters concerning the PTP clock quality TL1 Syntax ED EQPT PTPC PRIO TID PTP 1 A PTP 10 B CTAG REF 1 2 PRIO1 0 254 PRIO2 0 254 TRACKED CLOCK CLASS 0 254 HLDVR CLOCK CLASS 0 254 FREERUN CLOCK CLASS 0 254 Example ED EQPT PTPC PRIO PTP 1 A MYCTAG REF 1 PRIO1 127 PRIO2 127 TRACKED CLOCK CLASS 6 HLDVR CLOCK CLASS 7 FREERUN CLOCK CLASS 52 Parameters descriptions Default Possible configurations Description Remarks mi PTP 1 A PTP 10 B Cardpositon El snr 1 Used by the Best PRIO 1 0 254 Master Clock Algorithm for master election Used by the Best for master election Clock class value sent in the Announce Tr ED_CLOCK_ 0 254 messages when the shelf and the TCC PTP card are locked Clock class value sent in the Announce Mee 0 254 T messages when the shelf is in holdover OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 148 Operating amp Provisioning Clock class value sent in the Announce messages at startup or if the PTP card as never been locked FREERUN_CLOCK_ CLAA The Clock Quality configuration can be retrieved by the RTRV EQPT PTPC PRIO command TL1 Syntax RTRV EQPT PTPC PRIO TID PTP 1 A PTP 10 B CTAG REF 1 2 Example RTRV EQPT PTPC PRIO TID PTP 1 A MYCTAG REF 1 Answer TEST 11 03 15 15 17 32 M aCOMPLD PTPC 2 A REF 1 PRIO1 126 PRIO2 127 TRACKED CLOCK
321. ration in the command block or within ED EQPT MADDS a parameter name IL 2 1 Termination of a command RTRV PRO ctag Separation between blocks RTRV PRO ctag Separation between the variable and its SSM OFF value or parameter Text description VCONDESCRV Table 6 1 TL1 Command Format Types Verbs used in the TL1 command block OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 5 Operating amp Provisioning Abbreviation Description Cs Example ED Editing a function or parameter ED EQPT MAC OPR Operating a function or command OPR LEDS __ Table 6 2 TL1 Command Block Verbs 6 2 1 4 Autonomous Message An autonomous answer is sent by the OSA 5548C when something occurs in the shelf such as an event or an alarm Example of autonomous alarm message MAC ACK 118 29 01 00 36 43 XX 2784 REPT ALM SGC MI HOPT SA 2005 29 01 00 36 43 NA Output failure Alarm N Critical Alarm condition Major Alarm condition Minor Alarm condition A Non alarmed or cleared autonomous message CL or NA OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 6 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 1 5 Response message A response message is always sent back after sending a command to the OSA 5548C Example of response message SID DATE TIME M CTAG RESPONSE CODE DENY ERROR MESSAGE M M Indicates that it is a response message RESPONSE CODE This
322. rd doe not work after the fuse replacement return it for repair Table 8 11 Power Card Troubleshooting visible LEDs OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 28 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 2 2 Alarm Behavior Visible with Software Condition Cards in NE ane sen Case aaas as Active Input ACTINP N A THC The THC has selected another Check the previously selected Changed input as reference input Alarm Cut Off ACO N A MAC The alarm cut off has been No action needed if yopu are activated either physically with the enar the shelf check that all pushbutton on the MAC or LEDs have lit remotely with the TL1 command Alarm INC 1 INC 2 Alarm indication signal alarm Check the E1 signal in question Indication Signal Antenna MJ GPS A No connection to the GPS Check that the GPS antenna failure GPS B antenna The cable can be cable is correctly connected openend or shorted to the antenna to the EMP arrestor and to the 5548C Check that the EMP capsule Is not blown Measure the GPS antenna cable on the antenna side and check that there is about 5 Volts 4 Check the GPS antenna Bad Position PROGFLT N A All The card is inserted in the wrong Locate the card and move it to Slot the correct slot You can use the drawings situated at the end of this user manual OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 99 Condition Cards in Bipolar MN INC 1 INC
323. red with the following command RTRV EQPT SGE El 1 E1 2 CTAG 3 Check the value written in blue SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD E1 1 E1 2 CODE HDB3 AMI CRC4 ON 0FF TS16 CCS CAS SA4 OFF ON SSM SA5 OFF ON SSM SA6 OFF ON SSM SA7 OFF ON SSM SA8 OFF ON SSM IDLE 0 255 7 Select the E1 configuration option TYPE to the Output Group OG x required ED EQPT OG 1 1 10 2 CTAG TYPE E1 1 E1 2 5 Retrieve the E1 configuration option with the following command RTRV EQPT OG 1 1 10 2 CTAG 6 Check the value written after the TYPE SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD 1 1 10 2 TYPE E1_1 E1_2 7 Procedure 7 15 E1 Output Signal Type Configuration OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 21 Commissioning 7 2 2 Frequency Output Signal Configuration M Note One OG contains 10 Output Lines OL Each OUC groups provide 2 OG OL 1 to 10 and OL 11 to 20 for a total of 20 OL STEP ACTION 1 Set the Frequency configuration option TYPE to the Output Group OG required ED EQPT OG 1 1 10 2 CTAG TYPE FREQ 2 Retrieve the E1 configuration option with the following command RTRV EQPT OG 1 1 10 2 CTAG 3 Check the value written after the TYPE SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD 1 1 10 2 TYPE FREQ Procedure 7 16 Frequency Output Signal Configuration 7 2 7 3 NTP Output Signal Configuration STEP ACTION 1 If section 6 9 5 is properly done and section 8 2 1 7 succefully
324. right side A121 A122 A123 OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM POWER B 20 asm office battery B POWER B D ra us KZ TPUTS ASYM A124 OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 11 20 ASYM a 40 60V DC 6 3A BjosciLLOQUARTZ A101 A102 A103 Figure 4 5 Power Tiles Location on rear 5548C side POWER A office battery A INPUTS m O ANTENNA GPS 1 GPS 2 OQ OUT 1 10 SYM ve A104 N A125 A126 A127 OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 11 20 AS POWE R A office battery A POKER A INPUTS l Kl 2 1 3 O Oo 244 OUT 1 10 SYM ER e 2 LE BJOScILLOQUARTZ OUT 11 20 ASYM A105 POWER B office battery B ALARM DUT GROUP 1 Figure 4 6 Power Tiles Location on Remote Power Input and Management Panel OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 11 Equipment Installation AQ 19 W BE OSCILLOQUART MB OSCILLOQUARTZ 5548C 5548C SSU SSU Figure 4 7 Fuses Location he fuses of the shelf are located
325. rmance Measurement DBCHG Database Change SW Switching OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 177 Operating amp Provisioning 6 12 Performance Measurement PM 6 12 1 Overview 6 12 1 1 Introduction The OSA 5548C SSU is able to make performance measurements of signals fed into its input and therefore provides information about the signal quality The measurement system is embedded in the INC cards which compare the input signal against a reliable frequency reference produced by the signal filtered and processed by the active THC card The user can also define a performance threshold to disqualify and reject input signals that fail to meet this programmable threshold The OSA 5548C SSU measures and calculates performances in Ym fractional frequency TDEV Time DEViation and MTIE Maximum Time Interval Error 6 12 1 2 Requirement The performance measurements can be performed when the input line to be measured meets one of the following criteria e Enabled the line is activated to select an input reference e Monitored the input line is not enabled nor disabled just monitored in order to assess measure the signal The Performance Measurement must be enabled and should not be in alarm or disabled One of the input references must be enabled and selected qualified by the OSA 5548C SSU This active input is used as the Performance Measurement reference once it has been processed by
326. rmation provided by the card or element in question included in this message Using TL1 The following TL1 command is required to retrieve the current active alarms Input Syntax RTRV ALM aid ctag Example RTRV ALM THC MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMP LEO aid ntfencde condtype srveff ocrdat ocrtm locn dirn I tmper conddescr aiddet obsdbhvr exptdbhvr dgntype t blisit OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 165 Operating amp Provisioning name configurations parameters AID INC 1 INC 2 INC Cards from which the active alarms GPS THC SGC are requested OUC 1 OUC 10 OUC MAC ALL NTFCNCDE CR MJ MN NA NULL Notification code associated with the alarm conditions being retrieved CONDTYPE CONDTYPE NULL Type of alarm condition SRVEFF SA NSA NULL Effect on service caused by the alarm SA Service Affecting NSA on Service Affecting 12 31 occurred 00 00 00 23 59 59 Time when the triggering event occurred condition is reported NA relative to the identified entity TMPER NULL Accumulation time period for PM Performance Measurement parameters CONDDESCR CONDDESCR NULL Detailed text description of the ee trouble Limited to 64 characters enclosed within escaped quotes AIDDET NULL Supplementary equipment identification used to identify the location of the reported
327. rmware files are placed in a folder in the FTP root of the server The complete files contain 1 file per card type 4 files for the MAC cards and 1 catalog CATALOG CAT file 6 13 3 Firmware Download and Installation 6 13 3 1 FTP Parameters Configuration The first step in the download procedure is to configure the FTP client parameters in the OSA 5548C SSU The following parameters can be configured in the OSA 5548C SSU e IP Address FTP This is the external FTP server s IP address e Source Path SRC_PATH This is the path to the directory where the firmware files are located from the root of the external FTP server e User USER This is the user identification to access the external FTP server e Password PWD This is the password identification to access the external FTP server AN IMPORTANT The password must contain only uppercase characters A Z Spaces and numbers 1 9 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 190 Operating amp Provisioning Using TL1 To set the FTP server parameter in the OSA 5548C the following command is required Input Syntax SET DNLD ctag ftp src path user pwd Example SET DNLD MYCTAG 149 133 41 52 5548C V2 USER20 PWD99 To retrieve or to check the configuration use the following command Input Syntax RIERV DNLDYG leo The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD ftp src_path use
328. rnet 3 3V 71W p current limiter Figure 2 39 MAnagement Card Block Diagram OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 63 2 5 12 Product Overview POWER amp POWER B Cards 2 5 12 1 Physical Layout Power supply fuses are located on the front panel for easy access STATUS FUSEA T 6 3A L 250V Use the same type and Style fuse LAMP TEST d A OXxxx POWER A R osciuo var STATUS 4 Main FUSES of the Shelf b LAMP TEST push button LOCAL management RS 232 gt LAMP TEST push button Mosciuoouartz P D POWER A Card POWER B Card Figure 2 40 Power Cards PWR LED Status DESCRIPTION e RED Solid The POWER Card is not fed with POWER e GREEN Solid POWER supplied correctly Table 2 12 Power Card PWR LED Description 7 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Note e For detailed POWER card LED status description refer to section 8 2 1 e Specifications of the fuses are described in Appendix A 2 64 Product Overview 2 5 12 2 LOCAL COMM Port This is a RS 232 serial port SUB D 9p for local management purpose second one is located on the MANAGEMENT Connectors Tile above the card range see section 2 5 16 3 Both connectors can be used simultaneously PIN DESCRIPTION e In TL1 commands this port is named RS FRONT Table 2 13 RS 232 Local COMM Port Conn
329. rt on the Management tile or Remote Panel Password Aging Intervall in days At the end of this intervall the user receives a prompt that the existing password has to be replaced with a new one Password Aging Intervall in days At the end of this intervall the user receives a prompt that the existing password has to be replaced with a new one PCND 1 999 This is an intervall signifying the number of days that a user can use OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 43 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Default Possible Description name Parameter configurations the existing password before an update becomes mandatory It is typically 5 to 10 days PCNN 5 1 999 This is an integer signifying the number of times that an user can use the existing password before an update becomes mandatory Typically it is 3 to 5 times POINT 180 1 999 Password Obsolescence Intervall in days When a user receives a prompt to change the PID no old PID can be restored unless the intervall POINT expires since that old PID became obsolete Typically it is about 180 UOUT 1 999 UID Aging Intervall in days At the end of this intervall the UID is disabled if during this intervall it has never been used to set up a session Typically it is between 45 and 90 LSTOI IDENTIFIERS NOT USED IN 5548C List of Object Identifiers These identifiers specify what is accessible to this UID The list may indicate channel
330. run NTP output signal works properly Procedure 7 17 NTP Output Signal Configuration OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 22 Commissioning 7 2 8 SSM Configuration 7 2 8 1 Enabling SSM To switch on the SSM mode follow the next STEP ACTION 1 To switch the SSM on the following command is required SET SSM CTAG 0N 2 Verify if the SSM is enabled with the following TL1 command RTRV EQPT THC CTAG Check that it is written SSM ON SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD OK MODE AUTO MAN FHLDVR MAN INPUT IL 1 1 IL 2 4 ACT INPUT IL 1 1 1IL 2 4 SSM ON 7 Procedure 7 18 Enabling SSM Configuration OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 23 7 2 8 2 Commissioning Forcing a SSM Quality Level on an Input Line To force a quality on an available Input Line use the following procedure STEP 1 ACTION To force an SSM quality level use the following command and choose the quality required among the different possibilities ED EQPT IL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 CTAG FRCD PRC SSU_A SSU_B SEC DNU NONE Check the quality configured with the following command RTRV EQPT IL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 CTAG Check the value written after the FRCD SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD input line 0K ENABLED DISABLED MONITORED PRC SSU A SSU B SEC DNU NONE FAILED DISABLED INPUT FREQ connector ADM STATE ENABLED DISABLED MONITORED TERM TERMI
331. s 155 52 Mbit s and 622 08 Mbit s SDH based require the same type of synchronization as SDH max 20 SEC max 10 x max 20 SEC max 60 SEC max 20 SEC CJ J ee Figure 2 6 Synchronization reference chain for SDH ITU T Rec G 803 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 10 Product Overview 2 2 1 4 DWDM Networks The DWDM network technology standardized by the ITU T also known as Optical Transport Network OTN is based on a plesiochronous physical layer using a number of different wavelengths as transport channels The OTN is a flexible transport technology which allows many different types of client traffic signals to be transported wavelength channels A critical case is the transportation of SDH client signals SDH being based on synchronous STM N signals the OTN network must provide reasonable timing transparency for the transported client signal Since perfect timing transparency is not achievable the residual timing degradations jitter amp wander introduced by the OTN network must be taken care of in the SDH layer ITU T Rec 8251 contains guidelines in the form of a Synchronization Reference Chain According to this model the SDH timing must be regenerated by an SSU each time the SDH client signal leaves the OTN layer Furthermore each OTN island or OTN hop must not contain more than 10 OTN network elements and the number of SSUs introduced to fulfil the first rule is limi
332. s commands It may be a range all objects none It is an application dependant requirement OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 44 Operating amp Provisioning 6 3 6 3 Edit an User Account To edit a new user account the following command is required nput Syntax ED USER SECU AID CTAG newpid newpid cid uap PAGE page PCND pcnd PCNN penn POINT point UOUT uout LSTOI Lstol Example ED USER SECU USERNAME MY CT AG NEWUSERNAME NEWPASSWORD 8023 amp RS FRONT amp RS REAR X PAGE 90 Parameter Default Possible configurations Description name Parameter AD Login or Username UID NEWUID 1 New Username UID NEWPID Any ASCII string New Password PID excluding those characters that represent TL1 syntax of up to 10 characters CID 0000 9999 RS FRONT A list of up to 25 ports or channels RS REAR Each port When a session initiation request is separated with a amp received the NE checks the CID of the session request against the CID i e in the format of as stoerd in the NE 8023 amp 8024 amp RS FRONT RS FRONT is the RS 232 port on the POWER B RS REAR is the RS 232 port on the Management tile Password Aging Intervall in days At the end of this intervall the user receives a prompt that the existing password has to be replaced with a new one 30 999 Password Aging Intervall in days At the end of this intervall
333. s defective and should be returned for repair The firmware version installed in the card does Download the correct firmware in the card not correspond or is outdated compared the with the command ACT DNLD after rest of the shelf version verified that the firmware is in the MAC card ORANGE A new card s firmware is being downloaded No action needed OFF Dead no power is supplied to the card Test the THC s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair GPS GPS signal is received No action needed recovered once the time elapsed initialize it with the command INIT WTR The GPS input is being monitored No action needed Select the line enable to make it available for reference RED No or not enough GPS signal available PPS 1 Check that the GPS antenna has a input not available This state is present during clear view of the sky and respects about 5 min after powered on the card the conditions described in section 3 5 Check that a in line amplifier is mounted if the cable length is longer than 70 meters RED Flashing No connection to the antenna The GPS cable When only the GPS LED is flashing can be shorted or opened 1 Check that the GPS antenna cable is correctly connected to the antenna OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 9 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting em sme ennan When both GPS and OCXO LEDs are in RED to the EMP arrestor and to the flasing state
334. s Tiles OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 80 Product Overview 2 5 20 Time Code Card NTP Tile 1x NTP with RJ45 connector Figure 2 52 TCC NTP Output Tile 2 5 20 1 TCC NTP Ethernet Port This socket is a RJ 45 female type to connect Ethernet for remote management 1 38 EL i OE gt Ime 3 RH 6 IRA gt 8 INC ravie 2 2U l Wasta IP cmene UV c OTT Connector Description OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 81 Product Overview 2 5 21 100x BNC Outputs Ports Remote Panel The BNC Remote Panel provides up to 100x BNC 75ohms Output Ports ASYMM It can be installed anywhere in the same rack where the OSA 5548C SSU is mounted For each 10 outputs of an Output Group OG a ribbon cable connected from an Output Tile for Remote panel refer to Figure 2 49 to the corresponding Remote Panel output tile s connector is required Output Tile 1 Output Tile 2 Output Tile 3 Output Tile 4 Output Tile 5 ele DLO 9 9 5 174mm Output Conn OG 1 Output Conn OG2 533mm ETSI or 483mm 19 Figure 2 53 Remote BNC panel Front View 449mm Figure 2 54 Remote BNC panel Top View OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 82 2 6 2 6 1 Product Overview Communication The OSA 5548C SSU includes Remote and Local Management capability On the OSA 5548C SSU two serial ports allow the operator to access the system via R
335. s are necessary to tighten the card into the shelf It is important to tighten the card in order to avoid any instability e Bail handle The bail handle permits removal of the card from its slot by pushing down while extracting the card e Card abbreviation This is the abbreviation name of the card i e OUC for OUtput Card e Fuse This easily removable component protects the card against over voltage and or short circuit it is usually located near the DIN connector at the rear of the card OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 34 Product Overview AN Warning Do not remove the fuse without the agreement by an Oscilloquartz technical support person e DIN Connector This grey connector permits the card to be connected to the rest of the shelf It usually contains 96 pins except for the MAC cards which have 160 pins e Serial number The serial number of the card is written on the sticker stuck on the DIN connector On the same sticker there is the article number of the main board e Locating teeth The card locating teeth prevent card insertion into an incorrect slot The locating teeth are coded for specific slots AN Warning Do not modify the code of locating teeth OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 35 Product Overview 2 5 3 INput Card INC 2 5 3 1 Physical View LED DESCRIPTION Status GREEN Solid Card system is working properly RED Solid Card system
336. s in the chain of clocks There should never be more that 20 SDH Equipment clocks SEC between two SSUs or between the PRC and the first SSU In practice operators tend to insert one SSU every 10 to 15 SECs in order to have some margin in case the network grows The second rule says that there should not be more than 60 SECs in the entire synchronization chain The third and last rule says that there should not be more than 10 SSUs in the chain OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 9 Product Overview 2 2 1 3 ATM Switches Despite its asynchronous switching technique ATM switches need to properly time their physical layer signals The synchronization quality required by ATM network elements depends on the specifications for their physical layer signals The three most widely used physical layer signals in ATM are the so called SDH based physical layer ATM signals at the rates 51 84 Mbit s 155 52 Mbit s and 622 08 Mbit s Their timing characteristics are specified in ITU T Recommendations 1 432 2 and 1 432 3 These specifications require data rate accuracies of 1E 11 under normal operating conditions and 20E 6 under failure conditions This means that ATM network elements must take synchronization from a PRC complying with ITU T Rec G 811 Moreover jitter and wander of these ATM signals must comply with the Network Limits of ITU T Rec G 825 In other words ATM network elements with interfaces at 51 84 Mbit
337. s not require additional module configuration plug and play The new inserted module will automatically be configured and software downloaded no intervention needed from the operator The same feature is used in case of capacity extension The OSA 5548C SSU fully supports the Synchronization Status Message SSM features from inputs decoding to outputs SSM distribution for true synchronization signals validation to collocated or downward network elements OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 3 Product Overview At a glance some of the key features of the 5548C SSU including a number of unique functions are summarized below Up to 16 inputs selectable on input cards Automatic input frequency validation Plug in single or dual GPS receiver card Universal input output card design Innovative signal processing and distribution 20 user ports per card software selectable per group of 10 Up to 200 outputs protected 1 1 user selectable Modular connector tile sets for inputs outputs Fully redundant architecture with 1 1 protection Pass through functionality Remote download of firmware and software release Compact 6U ETSI 19 mountings Internal high stability Quartz crystal oscillator or Rubidium oscillator State of the art DDS technology TL1 commands with SyncTerminal and easy graphical pull down menus Performance measurements on all inputs User selectable SSM decoding and encoding Auto detectio
338. s or tiles Each slot has a specific number A1 to A37 a DIN connector and a locating tooth to avoid incorrect slot insertion The OSA 5548C is able to detect hot module insertion or extraction All cards are hot plug and play which means that you can add remove or replace a card at any time under power without disturbing the system Card Insertion 8 3 2 1 Before Replacing any Card If a card is alone in its group unprotected e g if there is the THC A but not the THC B if you replace the card with a new one it is necessary to reconfigure the replaced card once installed However if the group is fulfilled with its two possible cards protection 1 1 the remaining card will transfer its configuration to the newest installed The factory recommends that the following commands be executed and the response stored before removing an unprotected card to be used to restore configuration on replacement INC cards To store the parameters RTRV EQPT IL To restore the parameters ED EQPT IL For THC cards To store the parameters RTRV EQPT THC RTRV PRIO RTRV EQPT MADDS OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 41 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting To restore the parameters e ED EQPT THC e ED PRIO e ED MADDS For SGC cards To store the parameters e RIRV EQPT SGC To restore the parameters e ED EQPT SGC For OUC cards To store the parameters e RTRV EQPT OL e RIRV EQPT OG
339. s parameters WEEK 0 3182 a Week number since 6 January 1980 0 604799 Degrees OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 96 Operating amp Provisioning 6 7 GNSS Configuration 6 7 1 6 7 2 Introduction Up to two GNSS cards can be inserted in the OSA 5548C to get an additional PRS quality input line when GNSS cards are locked on GNSS signal The 5548C allows various properties on GNSS input e GNSS Card State To retrieve the GNSS cards operation status e GNSS Input Properties To retrieve the GNSS Input properties configuration e GNSS Position To retrieve the current GNSS position e GNSS Time To retrieve the GNSS time GNSS Card GNSS Group State This section explains how to retrieve the state of the GNSS group A Important Note The command response refers to the INC group status and not to individual GNSS card status Input Syntax RKIRV EOFTP GPS ss Example RITRV EOPI GPSC i MILTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD opstate SSM ssm PERF perf SYS_MODE sys_mode OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 97 Operating amp Provisioning name configurations parameters OPSTATE EMPTY There are different INC group states EXCTRACTED EMPTY The group slots are empty INIT EXTRACTED The group has been DOWNLOAD extracted from their respective slots OK ALARM INIT The group is being res
340. se messages The OSA 5548C SSU includes provisions for enhanced E1 interfaces with Synchronization Status Message detection and generation that e Select the best input line according to the SSM received e Allow the operator to force a defined quality level on an input without a SSM capable signal e Transmit the quality level received or defined on the 5548C s E1 2 048 Mbit s outputs Currently defined SSMs and quality levels are shown in the following table Quality SSM Primary Reference Gan rc O 811 PRC 0010 Clock SSU A Primary level SSU G 812 Type or V 0100 SSU B Second level SSU G 812 Type VI 1000 G 813 SDH Equipment SDH Equipment Clock Clock Option 1011 DNU Do Not Use mm When a SSM code was FAILED previously received and suddenly S not anymore SSM quality unknown Any SSM listed in the column on the right Table 6 15 SSM amp Quality Levels OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 151 Operating amp Provisioning 6 10 2 SSM Configuration In this section it is explained how to set the OSA 5548C to work with SSM A Note To retrieve current SSM quality supplied by the 5548C s E1 outputs refer to section 6 9 2 1 6 10 2 1 Turn SSM On or Off Using TL1 The following TL1 command will turn on the SSM function in the whole OSA 5548C SSU Input Syntax SkEl S Mir To turn off tne SSM simply send this below command Input Syntax stEI SSMIste ZLE Using Sync View
341. ses the TL1 Transaction Language 1 protocol to communicate TL1 was defined in the 80 s by Bellcore now Telcordia and is the dominant management protocol for controlling telecommunications networks in North America China and other parts of the world The TL1 protocol consists of a set of ASCII messages or instructions that a terminal emulator the SyncView PLUS use to handle the OSA 5548C SSU functions Among the TL1 commands implemented in the OSA 5548C SSU several are compliant with e Telcordia GR 199 CORE OTGR Operations Application Messages Memory Administration Messages e Telcordia GR 833 CORE Network Maintenance Network Element and Transport Surveillance Messages e TR NWT 835 Operations Application Messages Network Element and Network System Security Adminitration Messsages OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 3 Operating amp Provisioning The GR 831 standard specifies syntax semantics information structure and other rules for uniform construction of TL1 messages 6 2 1 2 TL1 Command Structure In TL1 the messages are sent by the user to perform functions to manage the OSA 5548C SSU or to observe faults and events emitted by the equipment In other words the TL1 messages are used to operate administer maintain and provision the OSA 5548C SSU There are two main types of standards defined TL1 messages e Command responses These are initiated by the user and provide tw
342. sponse is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMP LD lat deg min frac_min long deg min frac_min alt r OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 103 Operating amp Provisioning To edit the position send the following command Input Syntax ED EQPT FPOS ctag lat ded min frac min long deg min frac_min alt Example ED EQPT FPOS ctag lat deg min frac min long deg min frac min alt Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters INDOOR ON OFF OFF Enable the GPS to track only one satellite instead of four In that case a fixed position must be programmed LAT NS IN Latitude DEG 10 90 10 Degrees _ _ _ _ _ MN 10 89 10 Minutes S FRAC MIN 0 9999 O Fractionofminute DEG 10 90 10 Degrees S MN 10 89 10 Minutes S FRAC MIN 0 9999 O Fractionofminute ALT 999 18000 0 Altitude in meters OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 104 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt GPS Input gt Details gt Position tab Indoor Mode activation Latitude N 46 594919 Longitude E BS 548015 Altitude Fixed Position Degree Min Fraction of minute Degree Min Fraction of minute tongitude E vo Sp Sp 4 fo Altitude Position of GPS Antenna location 6 7 3 3 Retrieving Visible and Tracked Satellites
343. st digit is the group number and the second digit is the input number 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 CODE HDB3 AMI HDB3 Code type of the E1 signal Using SynManager Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Input 1 8 gt Details gt Code 6 5 7 2 Configuration of OOF CRC 4 BPV CV Alarm Detection The 5548C has the capability to detect different alarms related to E1 signal There is also the capability to set customized threshold for alarm detection The following thresholds can be selected for each type of alarm detection 10E 04 10E 03 and 10E 02 The alarms are e Out Of Frame OOF o When SSM is enabled and frame type is PCM31 o When 3 consecutive incorrect FAS words ITU T G 706 o If Threshold alarm is enabled additionally to the above criteria when false words rate of the total number 4000 during 1s is higher or equal than the Threshold selected e CRC 4 alarm OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 76 Operating amp Provisioning o When at least 915 CRC 4 values are false on a total of 1000 ITU T G 706 o If Threshold alarm is enabled additionally to the above criteria when false CRC 4 values rate of the total number 1000 during 1s is higher or equal than the Threshold selected e BiPolar Violation BPV when the code is AMI or Code Violation CV when the code is HDB3 o 1 or more BPV or CV detected during an interval of 1s o If Threshold alarm is enabled add
344. structions before installing the OSA 5548C SSU Rack preparation section presents the size of the shelf remote panels and power cable requirements GPS Antenna Mounting referral to separate installation guide describes how to mount and cable the GPS antennas in order to prepare the connection to the OSA 5548C Remote communication section describes the information required to configure the OSA 5548C SSU to be remotely manageable Required Tools and Material consists of a list presenting the basic tools and instruments necessary to install and configure the OSA 5548C SSU Note Installation amp cabling instructions are presented in chapter 4 3 2 Site Survey Plan the following prior installing the OSA 5548C A location as far as possible from any sources of electrical noise Power supply with dual 48 VDC with breakers Battery Distribution Fuse Bay BDFB maximum rating 10A Ground connection For environmental specifications please refer to the chapter 9 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 3 3 3 3 Pre Installation Considerations ElectroMagnetic Interference EMI Prevention Electromagnetic interferences EMI from any equipment can affect the normal operation of other equipments To prevent such interferences with other equipments the OSA 5548C must be installed as per described below All cables connected to the OSA 5548C should be shielded cables with drain wires connected t
345. system mode MST MASTER shelf EXP EXPANSION shelf INV Invalid N Re configurable this feature is not yet available OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 118 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Logical View and check the THC symbol state TRACKED the MADDS is correctly tracking the selected input signal HOLDOVER or FREERUN this status is shown when the THC MADDS have any input signals on their inputs when the MADDS is changing its bandwidth in order to track the selected signal rapidly ALARM this state is shown when a failure is detected L FAST this state should take approximately 1 minute This is shown 6 8 5 Pass through Mode The INC GROUP 1 and the GPS GROUP are able to supply a signal in case of either THC removal or failure This frequency is taken from the first available 2 048MHz or E1 input signal of the GROUP according to the Input Line number 1 as the highest priority to 4 as the lowest and then from GPS A and after GPS B Tracking amp Holdover Card THC Signal Generator Card SGC GPS Antennas Up to 10 slots on SSU E200 Pass through functionality 48 VDC A Wower distribution to all modules E Ee 48 VDC B Pow adistribution to all modules M nagement Card MAC fl 1 1 protection possible Pass through signal redirection
346. t Description name configurations parameters INC 1 INC 2 INC Cards from which the alarms GPS THC SGC conditions are requested OUC 1 OUC 10 OUC MAC ALL NTFCNCDE CR MJ MN NA NULL Notification code associated with the alarm conditions being retrieved condition is reported NA relative to the identified entity TMPER Accumulation time period for PM Performance Measurement parameters OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 168 Operating amp Provisioning name configurations parameters SRVEFF SA NSA Effect on service caused by the alarm SA Service Affecting NSA on Service Affecting OCRDAT 2004 01 01 2099 12 NULL Date when the triggering event Go occurred occurred hun VCONDDESGRV Detailed text description of the trouble Limited to 64 characters enclosed within escaped quotes Not software configurable 6 11 4 Alarm History 6 11 4 1 Overview The OSA 5548C SSU can store up to 256 alarms amp events in its memory for history log purposes Once the memory has reached this number of items it overwrites the old ones to store the new ones as a FIFO First alarm IN First alarm OUT system Should a greater number of historical alarms be required SyncView PLUS software is recommended which stores an unlimited number of alarms and events 6 11 4 2 Retrieving the Alarm History The parameters in the response of the TL1 command to retrieve the active
347. t During the power up sequence the LED can delivering a valid signal remain red for a short while If the LED stay in this status longer it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair after a last unsuccessful firmware initialization tentative RED Flashing There is a firmware version error Download the correct firmware in the card with the command ACT DNLD after verified that the firmware is in the MAC card STATUS ORANGE A new card s firmware is being downloaded No action needed OFF Dead no power is supplied to the card Test the SGC s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 14 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting um sm pesenpion an O EE HT eee GREEN The E1 signal function and distribution are No action needed working correctly GREEN Flashing The 5548C is in Pass through mode Check the THC cards operation states RED Alarm on at least one of the E1 signal The SGC may be in trouble and should be distributed by the SGC card returned for repair after a last unsuccessful firmware initialization ue and INC returned for repair after a last unsuccessful Nealon needed MM initialization distribution are working correctly RED Alarm on at least one of the Frequency and or The SGC may be in trouble and should be PPS signals distributed by the SGC card returned for repair after a last unsuccessful firmware init
348. t until the WTR time has elapsed or recovered once the time elapsed initialize it with the command INIT WTR OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 5 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting select it as an Input Reference RED The line is either ENABLED or MONITORED and at least one of the below criteria is detected Check the Input signal connected and if necessary configure IL parameters with the command ED EOPT IL With E1 signal LOS Loss Of Signal The signal is lower than 15dB with terminated connection The signal is lower than 35dB with a bridged connection AIS Alarm Indication Signal OOF Out Of Frame SSM is enabled and frame type is PCM31 3 consecutive incorrect FAS words ITU T G 706 If Threshold alarm is enabled o When false words rate of the total number 4000 during 1s is higher or equal than the Threshold selected CRC 4 e 915 CRC 4 values or more are false OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Description beD ahe scription on a total of 1000 ITU T G 706 e If Threshold alarm is enabled o When false CRC 4 values rate of the total number 1000 during 1s is higher or equal than the Threshold selected BPV Bipolar Violation with AMI Code or CV Code Violation with HDB3 e 1 or more BPV or CV detected during an interval of 1s e If Threshold alarm is enabled o When BPV or CV r
349. tarted DEGRADED DOWNLOAD The group firmware is TESTERROR being downloaded DEAD OK The group is running correctly ALARM The group is in alarm DEGRADED The firmware version is not the same as the rest of the shelf TESTERROR Invalid testing date DEAD The MAC group is not able to communicate OFF ON Indicates if the SSM is ON or OFF PERF OFF ON ALARM ON Indicates if the PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT is activated deactivated or in alarm SYS MODE MST EXP INV MST 5548C system mode MST MASTER shelf EXP EXPANSION shelf INV Invalid 6 7 3 GNSS Input Properties Various parameters can be configured and shown in the GNSS according such as PPS Offset The user can set the GNSS antenna cable propagation delay between GNSS antenna and GNSS receiver 3 92ns per meter for LMR 400 cable in order to trig the PPS phase as close as possible to the UTC time E g for 60m 10m of LMR 400 cable the PPS offset would be 70 x 3 92 274 ns Add 10ns when a GNSS in line amplifier is mounted along the cable 7 Note The offset must be negative when setting the PPS delay from the Antenna e g 274 ns as it is an anticipation of the GNSS receiver clock of the time received on the GNSS antenna Changing the PPS offset affecst the PPS output only The GNSS card indicates an alarm during a few seconds Administrative State Like the Input Lines the GNSS input lines can be e Enabled to activate the selection and qualify the line e Mon
350. ted to a maximum of 10 Annan a xn n lt 10 max nx 10 OTN NEs max 20 SEC Figure 2 7 Synchronization reference chain for SDH over OTN ITU T Rec G 8251 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 11 Product Overview 2 2 1 5 Mobile Networks GSM and UMTS networks Consist of a Radio Access Network and a Core Network The Core Network consists mainly of switches and routers dedicated to mobile traffic called Mobile Switching Centers MSC and Serving GPRS Service Nodes SGSN respectively Base Stations are connected to the MSCs and SGSNs via another type of network element called Base Station Controller BSC in GSM and Radio Network Controller RNC in UMTS MSC SGSN BSC and RNS have exactly the same synchronization needs as ordinary digital telephony switches see above This means that their synchronization must be traceable to a PRC compliant with ITU T Rec G 811 Sites containing any of these types of network elements are equipped with SSUs in order to provide holdover protection in case of failures causing the loss of PRC traceability 2 2 1 6 Next Generation Networks In Next Generation Networks NGN traffic generated by all service types consist of IP packets or less frequently ATM cells IP routers forward IP packets asynchronously Nevertheless large IP routers usually feature among other port types synchronous SDH and SONET ports This means that packets are routed async
351. tentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 3 10 Equipment Installation Chapter 4 Equipment Installation Including Overview Unpacking Rack Mounting Grounding amp Power Connection Connections Cabling Communication Ports Installation Check List OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 1 Equipment Installation This page has been intentionally left blank OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 2 Equipment Installation 4 1 Overview N Recommendation The Pre Installation Considerations chapter must be carefully read prior to this chapter A Note Turn up and configuration procedures are described in chapter 6 of this document This chapter covers detailed installation instructions for the OSA 5548C SSU It is divided into the following sections e Unpacking section describes the precautions and instructions required to unpacking and inspecting the OSA 5548C SSU and its associated material e Rack mounting section presents the size and information for mounting the rack e Grounding and power connection section explains how to connect the power and ground to the OSA 5548C SSU e Connections section describes how to cable the Input and Output connections e Alarms section describes how to connect the remote and local alarm cables and a typical application e Local Remote connections se
352. the Red LED should be extinguished Procedure 7 12 Disabling an Unused Input Line OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 18 Commissioning 7 2 6 Input Line Switching Selection amp Priorities 7 2 6 1 Switching and Selection Mode Configuration STEP ACTION Establish and plan how to configure the selection mode between the k input lines when one is rejected or failed e Switching mode over the input line Automatic by default Manual only one specific input line Forced Holdover 2 Configure the switching mode with the following command BHD EOPT THC GLT MODE AUTO MAN FHLDVR MAN INPUT IL 1 1 IL 1 2 IL 1 3 IL 1 4 IL 2 1 IL 2 2 IL 2 3 IL 2 4 GPS Configure the parameter MAN_INPUT with the input line you want only if you selected the Manual mode MAN 4 Verify the parameters settled with the below TL1 command RTRV EQPT THC CTAG 5 The response is formatted such as below SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD OK MODE AUTO MAN FHLDVR MAN INPUT IL 1 1 IL 1 2 IL 1 3 IL 1 4 IL 2 1 IL 2 2 1IL 2 3 IL 2 4 GPS ACT INPUT IL 1 1 IL 1 2 IL 1 3 IL 1 4 IL 2 1 IL 2 2 IL 2 3 IL 2 4 GPS SSM OFF ON SYS MODE MST r Procedure 7 13 Switching and Selection Mode Configuration OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 19 Commissioning 7 2 6 2 Input Line Priorities Configuration When the selection mode has been set as AUTOMATIC this configuration is required to set the pr
353. the master clock with a nanosecond resolution TCC PTP cards can be inserted in any OUC slot which therefore allows the OSA 5548C SSU E200 to host up to 20 PTP ports When the 5548C GPS card is tracked the PTP master can provide time information with 50ns Furthermore the 5548C holdover capabilities assured by the THC module make possible achieving a comparable level of accuracy when the GPS card switches into unlocked state In the 5548C the TCC PTP cards are managed indirectly through the MAC module A Note The IEE 1588 v2 standard provides the synchronization through an Ethernet network For more information concerning the IEEE norms please visit http standards ieee org OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 29 Product Overview 2 4 10 H Expansion Shelves Expansion Shelves are required when it is necessary to get more than 200 outputs An expansion can allow up to 200 additional outputs Up to 4 expansion shelves can be connected to the main shelf with redundant links making the 5548C providing up to 1000 output ports 2 4 11 Power Supply The OSA 5548C is equipped with two DC power supply inputs Each OSA 5548C SSU card includes its own power supply converter connected to both power supply inputs The power supply voltage range is 40 Vdc to 60 Vdc 2 4 12 J MAnagament Cards MAC The MAC gathers and reports all alarms and events from all cards in addition to external alarm
354. the parameters and functions available to manage the user security and rights to access the OSA 5548C SSU management system Prior to sending any command to the 5548C it is required to log into the 5548C management system with a username UID and password PID When attempting to log the shelf at the first time it is necessary to use the default username and password It is also possible to create different user rights according to restriction required to supply to operators However at least one user account with full rights is obligatory Default Username UID and Password PID At the first attempt it is required to use the default username and password which are the following UID OSCILLOQUARTZ PID OSA K Recommendation Oscilloquartz recommends creation of a user account and removal of the default for security Securely record all new account creations Login to the 5548C The following TL1 command is required to log into the shelf Input Syntax ACT USER aid ctag pid Example ACT USER OSCILLOQUARTZ MYCTAG XXX The response should be Output Syntax sid date time M Gtag COMP LD aid last_time attempts OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 39 Operating amp Provisioning Parameter Default Parameter Possible Description name configurations OSCILLOQUARTZ Login or Username UID OSA Any ASCII string User password excluding those characters that
355. the satellite in degrees BEARING Polar Coordinate in degrees gr T available on tracked satellites HEALTH NO ALMANAC Satellite s health Satellite must ee UNHEALTHY a be healthy to be tracked HEALTHY Using SyncView Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt GPS Input gt Details gt Satellites tab General Position Satellites Number of Visible Satellites 0 Number of Tracked Satellites 0 P amg iah Tes Parameter Possible Description EE configurations Identification number of satellite Eeoae Elevation angle of the satellite in degrees BEARING 0 359 Polar Coordinate in degrees md EE rn noise ratio in dBHz Only available on EE rn satellites NO ALMANAC Satellite s health Satellite must be healthy to be UNHEALTHY tracked HEALTHY TRACKED YES NO Whether satellite is tracked or not OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 107 Operating amp Provisioning 6 7 4 Retrieving GNSS Position Once the GNSS card has tracked 4 satellites or 1 in Indoor mode it can show the antenna position Using TL1 Input Syntax RTRV EQPT POS ctag Example RTRV EQPT POS MYCTAG The response is formatted as below Output Syntax sig date time M ctlag COMP LD ME EN Parameter Possible Default name configurations parameters NS N Latitude DEG 10 80 TT Degrees Mg Te EN Fraction of minute Toe Jew fe tongue 0 0 10
356. the switching mode is configured as AUTOMATIC and in case of SSM enabled when more than one E1 input lines have the same quality level For retrieving the current priority configuration send the following command Input Syntax RTRV PRIO ctag The answer is formatted as below Output Syntax sid date time M ctag COMPLD LL ie ea 1 1 Pa ae eas TL 1 4 11 1 4 IL 2 1 il 2 1 1IL 2 2 il 2 2 L 2 3 1i1 2 3 IL 2 4 1il 2 4 GPS gps r For editing the priorities send the following command Input Syntax ED PRIO s la Ib las aell Ihme Jelle IL l IL 1 4 il l1 4 IL 2 1 il 2 1 IL 2 2 il 2 2 IL 2 3 il 2 3 IL 2 4 1il 2 4 GPS 9gps OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 115 Example Operating amp Provisioning ED PRIO MYCTAG IL 1 1 1 IL 1 2 2 IL 1 3 3 IL 1 4 4 IL 2 1 5 IL 2 2 6 IL 2 3 7 IL 2 4 8 GPS 9 name EN GE Eo 1 1 Her hs C o IL13 11 9 13 1 has the most priority 9 has the least Taa 19 4 Pion 1 Priority of input 1 of INC group M t 1 9 18 22 11 9 16 24 11 9 18 GPS 1 9 19 i A Note Two or more input lines can have the same priority according to ITU T G 781 5 10 When it is the case the switching mode is non revertive Example of Scenario 1 oo pi ll a e Two input lines IL having the same priority are qualified by the 5548C One of these two IL is currently selected by the 5548C This selected IL suddenly fails The 5548C switches t
357. the user receives a prompt that the existing password has to be replaced with a new one 1 999 This is an intervall signifying the number of days that a user can use the existing password before an update becomes mandatory It is typically 5 to 10 days 1 999 This ts an integer signifying the number of times that an user can use the existing password before an update becomes mandatory Typically it is 3 to 5 times UAP PAGE PCNN i Parameter Default Possible configurations Description name Parameter OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 45 Operating amp Provisioning 180 1 999 Password Obsolescence Intervall in days When a user receives a prompt to change the PID no old PID can be restored unless the intervall POINT expires since that old PID became obsolete Typically it is about 180 1 999 UID Aging Intervall in days At the end of this intervall the UID is disabled if during this intervall it has never been used to set up a session Typically it is between 45 and 90 POINT IDENTIFIERS NOT USED IN 5548C List of Object Identifiers These identifiers specify what is accessible to this UID The list may indicate channels commands It may be a range all objects none It is an application dependant requirement 6 3 6 4 Retrieve User Account Parameters To retrieve user account parameters the following command is required Input Syntax RTRV USER a1d ctag
358. this means that the input is 5548C ejected due to performance alarm Check that the EMP capsule is not blown Measure the GPS antenna cable on the antenna side and check that there is about 5 Volts 4 Check the GPS antenna When both GPS and OCXO are flashing ensure that the threshold set is lower than G 811 requirements as the GPS line is not filtered by the THCs at this point OFF The GPS input is set as disable or the GPS If it is required to use the line enable it card is in stand by mode RED OCXO GPS card s internal oscillator failure The The card should be returned to factory for system has detected a failure on the internal repair oscillator RED Flashing The GPS card is in pre tracking sequence No action needed This state takes about 200s When both GPS and OCXO are flashing ensure that the threshold set is lower than G 811 requirements as the GPS line is not filtered by the THCsat this point OFF The oscillator is operating correctly The card No action needed can be in stand by if the GPS LED is als OFF When both GPS and OCXO LEDs are in RED flasing state this means that the input is ejected due to performance alarm Table 8 2 Tracking Holdover Card Troubleshooting visible LEDs OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 10 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 2 1 3 GNSS card GLN um swe penan atom STATUS GREEN The card is working correctly No action needed
359. tion SyncTerminal assists with the TL1 commands and auto completes the commands as the user types them e All 5548C TL1 commands are provided in a tree like menu or sorted by alphabetical order e Quickly repeats past commands very efficiently without retyping them e Sends user preprogrammed TL1 commands scripts e Test an Ethernet connection with an embedded PING function e Ergonomical and customizable window interface e Command and response logging e Interfaces to many Oscilloquartz products with MML or TL1 SyncTerminal Connected on 149 133 41 52 8023 Joe Terminal Edit Tools Window Help 26 08 0 0 TD ATOeoa vw Commands List Connected on 149 133 41 52 8023 A 5548C TL1 Management Commands Connecting to 149 133 41 52 8023 0 69 Security Connected 7 Communication Equipment oscilloquartz s 48C MAC Te ED EQPT IL Edit Equipment IL s RTRY EQPT IL Retrieve Equipment IL RTRY EQPT INC ReTRieve EQuiPmenT INput Card INIT WTR INITialize WTR ED EQPT THC EDit EQuiPmenT THC RTRY EOPT THC ReTRieve EQuiPmenT THC RTRV EQPT THC gt C T AG ED PRIO EDit PRIOrities RTRY PRIO ReTRieve PRIOrities my5548c 05 06 30 14 45 09 ED EQPT MADDS EDit EQuiPmenT MADDS N CT AG COMPLD RTRV EOPT MADDS ReTRieve EQuiPmenT MADDS Ok ORITY A SWITCHING NONREV MODE AUTO MAN INPUT IL 1 ED EQPT SGC EDit EQuiPmenT SGC s RTRY EQPT SGC ReTRieve EQuiPmenT SGC ED EQPT OL EDit EQuiPmenT OL AG INPUT DS1 1 DS1 2 DS1 3 DS1 4 FREQ 1 FREQ 2
360. tion VDC RETURN OV VDC BATT 48V deee JE 10 60v p Q amp S POWER GROUND GND 2 grounding studs GND Figure 4 8 Grounding amp Power Connections on Power Tiles VDC RETURN OV VDC BATT 48V A Note Screw the studs to ensure grounding Figure 4 9 Grounding and power connection on PWR IN amp MGMT Remote panel OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 14 Equipment Installation 4 5 Connections 4 5 1 Input and GPS Connectors There is 2 groups of INC INC1 slots A1 and A2 and INC2 slots A3 and A4 and a group of GPS slots A4 and A5 on the bottom range of the OSA 5548C SSU The input tile is located on the rear of the OSA 5548C SSU position A106 and on the Remote PWR IN and MGMT Panel OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM QUT 11 20 ASYM POWER B E ISION ALARM POWER A a n 2 alo OUTPUTS ASYM 1 ae FREQ a Z H OUT 1 10 SYM 1 40 60V OC 6 3A OSCILLOQUARTZ 40 60V DC 6 3A BoscILLOQUARTZ 12 O
361. tion ET VDC ALARM MANAGEMENT MAC Figure 4 24 Output Alarm Application 4 6 2 2 Cabling Procedure A CAUTION Before cabling please read and follow the specifications in section 9 6 STEP ACTION 1 Locate the connector ALARM OUT GROUP 1 or 2 on the Management tile See Figure 4 20 2 Select the SUB D 9 pins connector required 3 Connect a SUB D 9 pins male wired with respect to the Figure 4 23 4 Tighten the two fixation screws 5 Verify that connections have been done correctly Procedure 4 13 Output Alarm Connection OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 34 Equipment Installation 4 7 Cabling Communication Ports AA Recommendation In order to take full benefits of the 5548C SSU management possibilities we recommend installing and using the SyncTerminal and or SyncView PLUS software 4 7 1 Local Connection The OSA 5548C enables to communicate locally via two RS 232 serial ports It is possible to connect a computer or laptop to communicate with a terminal emulator software with the recommended software supplied with the OSA 5548C SSU The two communication ports can be used simultaneously OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM
362. tion Considerations 3 7 Required Tools amp Material The installation process requires the following tools Standard tool kit Four screws flat washers and locking washers for mounting the OSA 5548C SSU in the rack user supplied ESD wrist strap for equipment installation A Multimeter for verifying the power supply voltage range and polarity An Oscilloscope with at least 30 MHz bandwidth for verifying input signal conformity Please refer to the specifications in the section 9 5 At Link Null modem cable for local RS 232 connection See section 4 7 1 1 A laptop computer with terminal emulator HyperTerminal ProComm or better with SyncTerminal or SyncView installed USB gt RS 232 converter if the user s laptop doesn t have COM port A 100 Base T category 5 cable with RJ 45 ends for remote management 2 mm cable for 48V power connection and for grounding the shelf XY Recommendations Use cable jacket that is rated in accordance with Local and State Fire Transit Building Code Ordinances Electrical Codes and a Plenum rated jacket if required Follow Best Company Practice when wiring and cabling connections Use diverse paths when routing Wires or Cables from separate sources if possible Do not combine timing in the same bound group such as using two pairs in a multiple pair cable OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 3 9 Pre Installation Considerations This page has been in
363. tivated OFF INDOOR ON OFF Enable the GPS to track only one satellite instead of four In that case a fixed position must be programmed 10 Elevation mask in degrees Satellites below this mask are not taken into account SSU B SEG R 6 DINU NONE 6 7 3 1 PPS Offset and Elevation Mask Setting Using TL1 Input Syntax ED EQPT GNSS GLN A ctag PPS_OFFSET pps_offset ELEVATION eLlevation Example ED EQPT GPS GLN A MYCTAG PPS_OFFSET 274 ELEVATION 15 Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters PPS OFFSET 999 999 999 999 0 PPS offset ELEVATION 5 to 90 10 Elevation mask in degrees Satellites below this mask are not taken into account OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 101 Operating amp Provisioning Using Sync View Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt GPS Input gt Details gt General tab PPS Offset Elevation mask Cancel Fefresh OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 102 Operating amp Provisioning 6 7 3 2 Indoor Mode Using TL1 To enable or disable the Indoor mode send the following command Input Syntax ED EQPT GNSS GLN A ctag INDOOR indoor Example ED EQPT GNSS GLN A MYCTAG INDOOR ON To retrieve the position set send the following command Inout Syntax RTRV EQPT FPOS ctag Example RTRV EQPT FPOS MYCTAG The re
364. tober 2012 6 24 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 6 4 Shortcut Menu 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 6 3 SyncTerminal Short Cut Menu 10 11 12 13 14 Connection This button allows connecting to a network element Disconnection When pressing this button it stops the current connection Run This button opens the script editor window Stop running script When a script is running press this button to stop it Print It prints all the command s answers from the window s top right side Options After pressing this button the Options window pops up PING current connection This button will automatically open the Microsoft Windows s console to ping the current connection IP address Clear window This function removes all the TL1 responses in the top right part of the window Cascade windows Arranges multiple windows in cascade Tile windows vertically This button tiles multiple windows vertically Tile windows horizontally The button tiles multiple windows horizontally View Hide journal window This function hides or unhides the left part of the SyncTerminal window About SyncTerminal When pressing this button the about window appears Exit This function immediately closes the SyncTerminal 7 Note There is fewer buttons when using the SyncTerrminal from the SyncView software OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 25 Operating amp Provisioning 6 2 6
365. tober 2012 VIII
366. tory on a CIP basis Incoterms 2000 Please include copies of the shipping documents delivery note and proforma invoice inside and outside the parcel After shipping please fax us full shipping details for follow up from our end For warranty repairs state OSA Delivery note or invoice number on your packing slip delivery note proforma invoice Procedure 8 7 Repair amp Return OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 49 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting STEP ACTION During the warranty period the costs of shipping the faulty material to OSA or to return it to the customer will be born by OSA with exception of transportation like DHL FEDEX or other local taxes customs clearance etc Outside the warranty period these costs will be borne by the Customer 7 Ship the material insured to one of the addresses below Oscilloquartz SA Attn Repair amp Return 16 Rue de Br vards 2002 Neuch tel 2 SWITZERLAND If the material is out of the warranty period we then request you to sign and date the document containing the RMA number as acknowledgement of our proposed intervention The document can be used as a Purchase Order if your company policy allows it OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 50 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 8 6 Oscilloquartz Contact Information 8 6 1 Technical Assistance For technical assistance contact the following
367. traffic line IN and OUT is connected in parallel to the same input connector Terminating The input cable is terminated by the 5548C with an impedance of 75 ohms or 120 ohms with 120 75 ohms adapter Balun Note M To retrieve current IL configuration refer to section 6 5 3 Read section Input connector to Input Line IL description to understand the concept of cross conection of input lines to physical input ports Using TL1 The TL1 command to edit the termination is the following Input Syntax ED EQPT IL aid ctag TERMINATION termination Example ED EQPT IL 1 1 MYCTAG TERMINATION BRIDGED Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations parameters This is the input line abbreviation The first digit is the group number and the second digit is the input number 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 TERMINATION TERMINATED TERMINATED Input es a connection type BRIDGED Using SyncView Open the Physical or Logical View gt Elements gt Inputs gt Input 1 8 gt Details gt Termination OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 74 Operating amp Provisioning 6 5 7 E1 Input Line Configuration This section describes how to configure an E1 input lines Different parameters can be provisioned such as e Code AMI or HDB3 e Alarm detection OOF CRC 4 BPV CV 6 5 7 1 E1 Code Two different E1 code types can be fed to the 5548C SSU such as the following AMI A
368. tribution to Output ports 1 to 10 RED Flashing No clock signal received by the OUC OFF The related outputs are not configured to supply E1 clock to Output ports 1 to 10 or the output tile is not installed if the f LED is also OFF GREEN Solid 2 048 MHz distributed properly to Output ports 1 to 10 RED Solid No 2 048 MHz distribution to Output ports 1 to 10 RED Flashing No clock signal received by the OUC OFF The related outputs are not configured to supply 2 048 MHz clock to Output ports 1 to 10 or the output tile is not installed if the E1 LED is also OFF GREEN Solid E1 distributed properly to Output ports 11 to 20 RED Solid No E1 distribution to Output ports 11 to 20 RED Flashing No clock signal received by the OUC OFF The related outputs are not configured to supply E1 clock to Output ports 11 to 20 or the output tile is not installed if the f LED is also OFF GREEN Solid 2 048 MHz distributed properly to Output ports 11 to 20 RED Solid No 2 048 MHz distribution to Output ports 11 to 20 RED Flashing No clock signal received by the OUC OFF The related outputs are not configured to supply 2 048 MHz clock to Output ports 11 to 20 or the output tile is not installed if the E1LED is also OFF Table 2 7 OUput Card OUC LED Description OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 51 Product Overview Note Sep e For detailed OUC LED status description refer to section 8 2 1 e For
369. trieving GPS PositiOn ranrnnanrnnnrnnnnrvanrnnannnanernanennernnnnennnrnnanennnennanennee 6 94 Oo Po TN 6 96 GNSS ConiqQuallbNnuavvvvavavvrejervevearsaem seende 6 97 6 7 1 MON 6 97 6 7 2 GNSS Card GNSS Group State ee 6 97 S GNSS TIP PIPE Sn 6 98 6 7 4 Retrieving GNSS Position eee e ee 6 108 O P 6 110 Line Switching Tracking amp Holdover THC Signal Filtering and Processing6 111 081 la OLE 010 fee f EE nee een eee ree 6 111 0892 SME VOTES 6 112 6 8 3 Priorities Configuration eee eee ee eee ee e 6 115 6 8 4 Manual amp Automatic Direct Digital Synthesis MADDSJ rrrarernnrenareren 6 117 6659 Pass NINNI T 6 119 Signal Generation amp Output Properties nnxrrrnnnnvnvnnnnunevnnnnnnevnnnnnnerennnnnnrnnnnnnnner 6 121 6 9 1 The Basics of SGC amp OUC Operation ese eee ee 6 121 6 9 2 Signal Generation Card SGC Group Parameters and State 6 125 6 9 3 OUtput Card Group State OUC reranrrnarnnanernnrrnnnrnrarennnennennnanennnnennnennn 6 128 6 9 4 Output Signal Type and Configuration sese eee eee eee 6 130 6 9 5 Time Code Card NTP TCC NTP State 6 140 6 9 6 Time Code Card PTP TCC PTP State 6 144 Synchronization Status Message SSM nnnnernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvennnnnnnenn 6 151 OOT Te n sie Fe 16 ER EE es 6 151 See ae c es 6 152 AES S PEN Sr 6 158 6 11 1 Buzzer Alarm Cutoff ACO and MAC State 6 159 6 11 2 Retrieving Current Active Alarms with Sof
370. tus of the card failure detected on a card but its 2 Initialize the card in question redundant ok redundant is OK 3 Pull it out and reinsert it 4 Ifthe above action did not clear this alarm return the card for repair GPS OCXO MJ The GPS card s internal Failure Oscillatore is deftective and the card should be returned to the factory for repair GPSOCXO OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 32 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Condition Cards in or Sorte ane s Carem een tan GPS Receiver GPSRCVR MJ GPS A Not enough satellites are received GPS B HLDOVRSYNC The THC card has lost its input N THC signal reference and hence Improper IMPRPRMVL M All When a card is removed from its Removal slot while it is operating generate the signal itself to rest of the shelf OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 8 33 Check that the GPS antenna has a clear view of the sky and respects the conditions described in section 3 5 Check that a in line amplifier is mounted if the cable length is longer than 70 meters If this behavior was not excepted follow this procedure Check the INC cards configuration and operation Check the Input Line configuration Check the input lines connected to the shelf If the slot in question is Supposed to remain empty disable the slot with the following command DLT EQPT INC 1 A INC 2 B GPS A GPS B THC A THC B SGC A
371. tware ee ee ee e 6 164 be AM CON 6 167 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 Vill Contents 6 114 AAMO es 6 169 6 11 5 Autonomous Messages esec eee 6 172 6 12 Performance Measurement PM annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennr 6 178 ON NNN 6 178 6 12 2 Turn on off and resetting HM sese eee 6 179 6 12 3 Delays to Retrieve the 1 Result and Time Intervals for Updates 6 180 6 12 4 Retrieving PM Result eee 6 182 6 12 5 Receiving Spontaneous Measurement Results ee ee e e ee 6 184 6 12 6 Performance Threshold Parameters eee eee 6 185 613 Firmware Download sssssssssssssssssssssss esse essen ennenen ennenen ennenen 6 189 OTST 0 enes 6 189 6 13 2 Prerequisites sse eee eee ee 6 190 6 13 3 Firmware Download and Installation sss sse ee eee 6 190 EE COMAG SONN RR TEEN 7 1 7 1 BE OUI e NE EN EE i 7 3 7 1 1 OVN 7 3 TM TORO CUS ESS T 1 3 Lilo FRE QUIPS ICING Lanseres 1 3 7 2 Configuration amp Provisioning Procedures rnnnnuvrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnuvevnnnnvr 7 4 7 2 1 Tiera ee EE EEE 1 4 7 2 2 Establishing Communication sese eee eee eee ee 7 4 7 2 3 Firmware Upgrade Procedure sss sees sese ee 7 11 7 24 General Configuration sse ee eee ee 7 13 ENN 7 15 7 2 6 Input Line Switching Selection amp Priornties cs eee eee e 7 19 7 2 f Output Line Configuration e sees eee eee ee eee eee 7 21 T SMN 7 23 7 2 9 Rest
372. unenenen 2 58 2 5 11 MAnagement Card VAC 2 61 2 5 12 POWER A amp POWER B Cada sese 2 64 2513 Connetos Panel LAY OU uvv4v4vrv44v4v2rveesd degn 2 66 2 5 14 Connector Tile Description rrrarrnnrrnnrrnnrrnrrrnnrrnnevanennnenernnernneennnrnnenunenn 2 68 2515 POWER COMMECIOIS IE senesinin or a Ea iara 2 69 25 16 MANAGEMENT Tile esasen iE 2 70 51 INPUT EN 2 75 2 5 18 Input Management amp Power Remote Panel eee eee 2 76 510 OUTPUT NI 2 77 2 5 20 Time Code Card NTP Tie 2 81 2 5 21 100x BNC Outputs Ports Remote Panel rrrrnrnnnnnnnnnrnrnrvnnnnnrnnvenernnrnnnener 2 82 26 ENN 2 83 61 VEPS 2 83 262 2 86 2 7 Synchronization Status Messaging SSM annnennnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnn 2 87 lee EEE 2 87 212 SMN SENG 2 87 P OON OUUU EEE NE 2 88 2 8 T E AE E T E EAE E N E T 2 88 PRE INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS rannnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnennnen 3 1 3 1 ENN sce cacen ee ices cs uc ic eee setae ee cw stems tvs os eee ecsee women deeneeseeseeuenis 3 3 gt EE TE EEE NE ME 3 3 3 3 ElectroMagnetic Interference EMI Prevention an rnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnen 3 4 3 4 RACK PrEP Lg 0 g EE NE RE EEE RS 3 4 3 4 1 PENN 3 4 3 4 2 Power Input and Management Remote Panel sees ee ee 3 6 3 4 3 Remote Output Panel Preparation sse eee ee eee ee 3 7 3 4 4 Power supply cables eee eee ee e ee 3 8 35 GPS FTO Te MOUNUNG sss eee ctneece gcc cee see
373. up 2 Local RS 232 Ethernet LAN Management port management port PPS Outputs UTC synchronised when GPS locked Oscilloquartz restricted access for test purpose MASTER or EXPANSION address Rotary Switch Figure 2 44 Management Connectors Tile Note 7 e For detailed Connection instructions concerning o PPS outputs refer to section 4 5 2 6 o IN OUT Alarms connectors refer to section 4 6 o Communication ports refer to section 4 7 OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 70 Product Overview 2 5 16 1 EXPANSION LINK Connectors Expansion Link SUB D 25p female connectors are necessary to cable expansion shelves The EXPANSION LINK B connector is a redundant protection of the EXPANSION LINK A 1 FREQ SGC A 14 GND SGC A 6 PPSSGCB 8 EXPLINK2 9 EXPLINK3 11 H D DDD DD DDD a D D D 0 0D 00 00 o 8B OB 8 Q 2 5 16 2 LAN COMM Port This socket is a RJ 45 female type to connect Ethernet LAN for remote management Description OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 71 Product Overview 2 5 16 3 LOCAL COMM Port This is a RS 232 serial port SUB D 9p male for local management purpose second one is located on the POWER A card on the front of the shelf Table 2 17 RS 232 Local COMM Port Connector Description Note L In TL1 commands this port is named RS REAR 2 5 16 4 EXT ALARM INPUTS Connecto
374. ure 2 56 are examples of the Graphical User Interfaces which can be seen locally and or remotely through the SyncView PLUS Management Software Figure 2 57 is the Network Browser view of the SyncView PLUS Network Manager version OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 83 Product Overview Figure 2 55 SyncView PLUS Logical View example OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 84 Product Overview File View NetworkElement Mode Configuration Windows Help w PEGS 892 48 2 198 Network Equipments OS x dk sv998 sv998 S SSU 107 SSU 108 h DEHLI S SSU 103 E a MUMBAI SSU 104 SSU 105 SSU 106 Local Manager Localsv998 5548C TSG Template 5548C SSU Template 5240 TL 1 Template f Jawaharlal f HI NE Description My comment for Network Manager Figure 2 57 SyncView PLUS Network Manager version Synchronization Network General View example OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 2 85 Product Overview 2 6 2 SyncTerminal The SyncTerminal is a terminal Interface enhanced with a TL1 tutor which assists the user with the syntax of any TL1 command for the OSA 5548C SSU The SyncTerminal can remotely access the shelf via TCP IP on LAN COMM port or locally via serial RS 232C on LOCAL COMM port Key features e Sending TL1 commands via local serial RS 232 connector as well as remote Ethernet connec
375. void reporting alarms about it In cooperation with the THC group the GNSS can also disqualify its input reference if it crosses a user defined Performance Threshold The GNSS group delivers one input signal to the THC group It provides also a clock to the SGC group in case of Pass through mode when both THC cards are removed or being in warm up or failure As soon as the GNSS card is powered it starts researching and acquiring GNSS satellites This sequence should last 8 minutes Then the GNSS internal filtering system enters in pre tracking phase for 200s Thereafter the GNSS card is able to provide its signal to the rest of the shelf OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 9 43 Product Overview 2 5 5 1 GNSS Block Diagram Antenna GNSS Engine lt OCXO gt lt Internal Communication Bus lt Ph M t syst ase Measurement system Micro processor gt 8kHz GPS Reference gt TOD PPS IN gt RJ 45 connector front panel gt 2 048MHz GPS Reference gt gt PPS Reference gt gt GNSS Pass through gt Sess as a ens cue gt NTP ToD PPS OUT l 1V2 TRI 45 connector front panel Power gt 2V5 Supply 3V3 5V Y 48V Figure 2 26 GNSS Card Block Diagram OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual R
376. when used Procedure 4 5 Cabling an E1 Input Connector 4 5 1 4 Cabling GPS Antenna This section describes the procedure to connect the antenna cable s to the 5548C AN IMPORTANT The installation guide must be carefully read prior connecting GPS antenna cable and antenna to the OSA 5548C STEP ACTION 1 When cabling a roof or wall antenna verify that the EMP protector is correctly mounted with reliable earth grounding 2 Select a connector of your choice among the 2 BNC connectors GPS1 and GPS 2 3 Connect the Coaxial cable into the intended connector 4 Check that the cable is tightened correctly into the BNC connector Procedure 4 6 Cabling a GPS Input Connector OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 19 4 5 2 Output Connectors 4 5 2 1 Output Cards amp Tiles Up to 10 Groups of OUtput Cards OUC can be inserted in the OSA 5548C SSU providing up to 200 output signals Within each GROUP there is an OUC A on which Equipment Installation an OUC B can be added on the right slot to insure a one for one protection 1 1 redundancy 10 OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM 40 60V OC 6 3A MOSCILLOQUART
377. word lv Use default Name m Password et Soe ee 5 Launch the SyncTerminal interface OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 4 Commissioning STEP ACTION A new window on the right where it should be written Connecting to COML or COM2 Connected Procedure 7 1 Serial Connection 7 2 2 2 Ethernet Configuration A Note For the first time you need to configure the Ethernet network parameters via serial connection STEP ACTION Enter the following TL1 command in one single line ED COM SYS CTAG IPADDRESS HE NETMASK HET GWLADDRESS HHH GWLNETMASK HH HHH GW2ADDRESS HH HHH GW2NETMASK HE HHH GET ETHER _SPEED 10 100 ts ie ET Follow what the SyncTerminal prompt to set the parameters and press enter 2 Then if the configuration has been settled correctly you should be prompted with the following answer SID DATE TIME M CTAG COMPLD 7 3 Then it is necessary to reboot the MAC card with the following command INT T SYS327MAC A CLTAG WARM 4 Wait until the MAC has ended its reboot cycle Procedure 7 2 Ethernet Configuration 7 2 2 3 Verifying the Ethernet Configuration STEP ACTION 1 To check if the Ethernet configuration has been done correctly send OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 7 5 Commissioning the following
378. x 1 Table 4 2 SUB D 9 Pole pin description STEP 6 ACTION Connect the Remote panel to the ground Locate the connector tile corresponding to the group required to cable Select a connector which will be configured with the signal desired The output port configuration is done by software as described in section 6 9 Connect the ribbon cable supplied by Oscilloquartz on the tile s connector required Connect the other end of the ribbon cable on the Remote panel s output tile desired Check that cable is well tightened Procedure 4 10 Cabling the SUB D Remote panel OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 4 27 Equipment Installation 4 5 2 6 Output Tile Set Connectors PPS There are two BNC connectors on the Management tile labeled PPS 1 amp PPS 2 See section 9 5 for specifications OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 1 10 SYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM OUT 11 20 ASYM QUT 11 20 ASYM POWER B M ig AD D Q Q U L L a 2 S 0 i i o o 2 2 OUT 1 10 SYM 3 1 G DC 6 3A 25 a 0 R 7 DC 6 38 JOSCILLOQUARTZ He 28 P2 me E OSCILLOQUARTZ 2a a 5 SE C C a r T 1
379. xtinguished Extinguished This status remains for a the THC short time However the can STATUS LED remains supply a RED until the THC is proper able to supply a proper signal signal to the rest of the shelf normally until the Warm Up sequence has ended OSCILLATOR LED has stopped flashing in RED Extinguished RED Flashing dot or The internal oscillator ts nothing warming up Depending on the Oscillator the delay can be up to 30min 3 GREEN RED Flashing Extinguished Input Line The THC is in fast start Number up during a couple of accompanied minutes GREEN Extinguished Extinguished with a dot The THC is operating or RED if the give the Input correctly THC is in Line number Holdover currently selected as reference G GPS input OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 B9 5 9 Seq STATUS HOLDOVER OSCILLATOR Table 5 5 Tracking Holdover Card Turn up Status 7 Note Turn up Procedure SELECTED DESCRIPTION INPUT dash if the THC is in holdover or freerun Nothing shown means that the THC is in stand by and you should see a number on the adjacent THC card Oscillator cold start to warm up intervals depend upon the type and configuration of the Oscillator modules installed In example Rubidium THC cards warm up faster than Quartz THC cards OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 5 10 Turn up Procedure 5 3 6
380. ys and Intervals to Retrieve MTIE PM Results PM observation Delay to get the first Time interval to get a new PM time PM result update after the 1 measurement MTIE 1S 900s 15min MTIE 1M 900s 15min 900s 15min MTIE 15M 900s 15min MTIE 30M 1800s 30min 900s 15min MTIE 1H 3600s 1h 900s 15min MTIE 3H 108005 3h No update as it is the latest value of the time interval Table 6 16 Delays and Intervals to Retrieve MTIE PM Results 6 12 3 2 Delays and Intervals to Retrieve TDEV PM Results PM observation Delay to get the first Time interval to get a new PM time PM result update after the 1 measurement TDEV 1S 900s 15min TDEV 4S 900s 15min TDEV 16S 900s 15min TDEV 64S 900s 15min TDEV 256S 900s 15min TDEV 10008 108005 3h No update as it is the latest value of the time interval Table 6 17 Delays and Intervals to Retrieve TDEV PM Results 6 12 3 3 Delays to Retrieve Ym PM results PM observation time Delay to get the PM result Ym 60S 60s 1min Ym 540S 540s 9min Ym 15M 900s 15min Ym 1H 3600s 1h Ym 2H 7200s 2h Ym 3H 10800s 3h Table 6 18 Delays to Retrieve Ym PM Results OSA 5548C SSU E200 User Manual Revision K October 2012 6 181 Operating amp Provisioning 6 12 4 Retrieving PM Results For retrieving the current measurement results or one the 8 previous ones stored in the OSA 5548C SSU the following command is required Using TL1 Input Syntax RTRV PM aid ctag kind set Ex

OSA5548C-200 rev-k4

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents